M41-F.o Supply Unit

FINAL DRAWING
FOR
F.O SUPPLY UNIT
S-1651/52/53/54/55/56/57/58
ST X-SEJIN
HULL DWG
S-1651/52/53/54/55/56/57/58 V6519000
NO. NO.
TITLE F.O SUPPLY UNIT
Ship Owner 74,000 DWT CRUDE / PRODUCT OIL / TANKER

Approved by
Class. KR
Eng. Model MAN 6S60ME-C8.2 TII
Generator Chexked by
(6L23/30)* x 3sets
Eng.Model
Date 2014.05.29 Prepared by
Rev. Description Date Prepare Check Appd

A FOR APPROVAL 2014.05.29 G.W GANG D.I YEO J.W LEE
B FOR APPROVAL 2014.06.09 G.W GANG D.I YEO J.W LEE
C FOR REAPPROVAL 2014.12.23 S.Y.LEE D.I YEO J.W LEE
0 FOR WORKING 2015.01.05 S.Y.LEE D.I YEO J.W LEE
F FOR FINAL 2015.10.21 S.Y.LEE D.I YEO J.W LEE
1
2.#0*+5614;
5(9 352-(&7 3$*(
'$7( '(6&5,37,21 ':1 &+(&. 0*5
12 12 12
380302'/(7<3(67$57,1*7$7,1*&855(17,6
&+$1*('
!3302'(/7<3(6!/
!67$57,1*5$7,1*&855(17$$
380367$57,1*7$7,1*&855(17,6&+$1*('
!67$57,1*5$7,1*&855(17$$
380302'/(7<3(67$57,1*7$7,1*&855(17,6
&+$1*('

!3302'(/7<3(193%!17%3

$ 6 !67$57,1*5$7,1*&855(17$$
!67$57,1*5$7,1* &855(17 $ $
<$5'
6&200(173 ,',6$33/,('

!5(029('9'91&'(6&5,37,21
)2+($7(535(6685(,6&+$1*('

!NJFPJ!NJFPJ
a '5$:,1*2)&5&5&22/(5,6&+$1*('
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

!&21752/ 7% 12 &+$1*('
!&21752/7%12&+$1*('
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

!0*23803(/(&)52006%'(6%'
<$5'
6&200(17,6$33/,('

!5(029(7+(36
<$5'
6&200(173 ,',6$33/,('
!5(029(7+(36

!<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('
% 6
!$''7+(6/()9$/9(67$1'$5'&/$66,),&$7,21
$''7+(6/()9$/9(67$1'$5'&/$66,),&$7,21
5(029(7+(36
)2+($7(5'$7$6+((7,6&+$1*('
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('
!1$0(3/$7(12 7(;7&+$1*('
!53%7%1202',)<
& 6 <$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

!53% 7(510,1$/ 12 &+$1*('
!53%7(510,1$/12&+$1*('
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('

!(0
&<3803(/(&)5200$,1628&5((0
&<6285&(
<$5'
6&200(17(/(&,6$33/,('
<$5'
6&200(17,6$33/,('
!&2116,=(&+$1*('

6
75$&,1*/,1(9$/9($''
2
STX SEJIN
Table of contents
Plan history - Plan history ------------------------------------2
Technical specifition - General description ------------------------------5

- Main component -------------------------------- 7
- Auto. data list ---------------------------------- 10
Mechnical drawing & part list - Specification Of Piping System --------------------- 12

- System diagram (P&ID) --------------------------- 13
- General arrange ---------------------------------14
- Part list ---------------------------------------15
Component drawing - HFO supply pump electric driven (PP01/02) ------------20

- HFO circulating pump electric driven (PP03/04) ---------27
- G/E EM'CY MGO pump elec. driven (PP05/06) ----------34
- HFO steam heater (HT01/02) -----------------------41
- MGO cooler(CR01/CR02-yard supply item) ------------ 43
- HFO automatic filter (AF01) ------------------------47
- HFO flow meter (FM01) ---------------------------51
- G/E inlet/outlet HFO flow meter (FM02/03) ------------ 52
- HFO viscosity control system (VCS01/02/03) -----------55
- HFO Venting Box (DT01) --------------------------60
- Pressure gauge (PI240/241/242/243/244/245/248) ------ 61
- Thermometer (TI243/245/246) ----------------------62
- Pressure switch (PS243/245/248) ------------------- 63
- Simplex oil strainer (OS02/03/04/05/06/07/08/09) -------64
- Y-type strainer (YS01) ----------------------------65
- Manual 3-way v/v with limit switch (COV01) ------------66
- Manual 3-way v/v without limit switch (COV02) --------- 67
- Pressure regulating valve (PRV01/02) -----------------68
- Steam trap (ST01) -------------------------------69
- Steam trap (ST02/03) ---------------------------- 70
- Auto. air venting valve (AVV01) --------------------- 71
- Sight glass (SG01) -------------------------------72
- Swing check valve (SW01/02) ---------------------- 73
- Safety valve (SAF01) -----------------------------74
- Self closing valve(SELF01,SAM01) -------------------75
- Compact ball valve ------------------------------ 76
- Globe & Angle valve ----------------------------- 77
- Seal pot ass'y ----------------------------------86
- 3-way test cock -------------------------------- 87
Electric drawing - Power & Control junction box -----------------------90

- Viscosity control system electric wiring diagram ---------93
- HFO Automatic filter electric drawing -----------------95
Spare parts - Spare part & Tool list -----------------------------103
3
GHL G9>=B
{
{G
4
STX SEJIN
General description
1. Ship specification society and regulation
The fuel oil supply unit shall be complied with the requirements of the following rules, regulations
and standards by the latest issue
1) Classification : KR
2) Korea industrial standard
3) Japanese industrial standard
Unless otherwise specified in above specification and standard, maker's standard will be applied.
2. Installation
The fuel oil supply unit is mounted on the ship's structure.
3. Pipe connection flange

Pipe connection flanges, which are connected to the shipyard piping and provided in accordance
with "JIS" except special flanges.
4. Name plate and Caution plate

The plate is written in English with Metric system.
5. Painting
All ecterior surface of steel parts is coated with anti-corrosive paint in accordance
with manufacture's standard, and color of finish paint is in
FINAL PAINT COLOR : MUNSELL NO. 7.5 BG 7/2
6. Guarantee
The successful operation of all equipments shall be guaranteed for twelve(12) months
from the data of official ship delivery. If any defects for equipments caused by faulty design,
material or poor workmanship within the guaranteed period as above-mentioned, the manufacture
shall replace or repair concerned parts at free of charge.
5
STX SEJIN
7. Design Basis
1) Main engine type : MAN 6S60ME-C8.2 TII
2) Generator engine type : (6L23/30)* x 3sets
3) Total power max. : Maximum total electric power consumption is 6,100 kW
during crude exporting condition according to ELA.
Diesel generator runs 3 duties, 1 standby during this condition.
4) Applied fuel : HFO 700cSt at 50℃
MGO 2.0cSt at 40℃
5) HFO inlet temperature : Less than 85℃ at unit inlet
6) Ambient temperature : Less than 45℃
7) Main power source : AC 440V, 60Hz, 3Ph
8) Control power : AC 220V, 60Hz
9) Viscosity set point : 10 ~ 15cSt
10) Steam inlet pressure : 6.0 kg/cm2
8. Others
1) Simplex strainer for Pump inlet (32 mesh).
2) Simplex strainer for M/E & G/E flow meter inlet (60 mesh) & G/E in/outlet flow meter outlet (16mesh).
3) Thermometer for HFO supply pump outlet, common inlet & outlet of steam heater
4) All HFO pipes shall be steam trace heated by 10mm copper pipe with connection around the pipe
flange.
5) Insulating for all the high temperature piping and components with glass wool lagging glass cloth cover.
6) Male/female flangeds for all in the connecting parts to protect oil spray leakage which required by
SOLAS rule requirement.
7) All pressure sensing point are to be provided with seal pot & 3-way test cock.
8) The gasket for steam, HFO line shall be used non-asbestos type
9) The valve of pumps outlet shall be screw down non return and shall be horizontally fitted.
10) Each valve and instrument parts shall have its own name plate with English
11) Copper pipe for each sensing purpose, shall be arranged alongside the coaming 20~30mm above
bottom and shall be grouping.
12) The unit itself and its components shall be designed so strong structure and good arrangement
as to maintain the normal vibration of hull structure.
13) Hyd. Test at shop shall be carried out at the 1.5 time of max design pressure.
14) Brass name plate shall be fitted to valve handle & brass caution plate shall be provided in E/R
15) Motor windings shall be designed and constructed as class B or F insulation according to
manufacturer's standard.
6
STX SEJIN
Main Components
Code Description Q'ty
PP01/02 HFO supply pump with Electric motor -------------------------------- 2

Rotary self-priming displacement screw pump with relief valve
One is stand-by pump while the other is working
Auto. change-over by pressure setting point is 3kg/cm2
* Model : ACE 032N3 NTBP / HMA2 90 L-2
* Flow rate x pressure : 3.9 m³/h x 0/4bar
* Working temperature : 100℃
* Power source / Rated power : AC 440V, 60Hz, 3Ph / 2.5kW
* Starting / Rating current : 35A / 4.7A
* Insulation / Protection : F / IP55
* Weight : Approx. 33kg
FM01 HFO flow meter for mass type --------------------------------------------- 1

Remote reading, Include auto. by-pass line with manual by-pass line
* Model : CA040L
* Flow rate : 3.9m³/h x 4bar
* Accuracy : +/- 0.1 %
DT01 HFO venting box ------------------------------------------------------- 1

* Working pressure : Max. 10kg/cm2
* Working temperature : Max. 149℃
* Insulation : Heating coil installed around the tank.
Glass wool glass cloth insulation with aluminum foil.
PP03/04 HFO circ. pump with Electric motor ---------------------------------- 2

* Model : ACE 038N3 NTBP / HMA2 112 M1-2
* Flow rate x pressure : 7.8m³/h x 4/10bar
* Power source / Rated power : AC 440V, 60Hz, 3Ph / 4.7KW
7
STX SEJIN
Main Components
HT01/02 HFO heater ------------------------------------------------------------ 2

Steam heating, Shell & Tube type, 100% each. One is stand-by heater while the other is working
Viscosity control by viscosity controller. (steam control valve)
* Model : MX20 L=1400/60
* Flow rate x pressure : 7.8m³/h x 10bar
* In/outlet temperature : 105℃ / 150℃
* Mass flow for Steam : About. 338kg/h
* Capacity : About. 194.1kW
* Heating surface : 9.5m²
* Fouling margin : About. 20.2%
* Weight : 220kg
Heaters shell be painted with heat resistant aluminum paint and insulated rock
wool with galvanized steel cover
FAF01 HFO Automatic filter ----------------------------------------------------- 1

Auto. back flushing type, with manual by-pass filter and change-over valve
With heating chamber
* Model : DACT-702-DN50
* Flow rate x pressure : 7.8m³/h x 10bar
* Mesh size : Abs. 35micron
* Power source : AC 440V, 60Hz, 3Ph
* Diff. press. Alarm high : 1.0 bar
VCS HFO Electric viscosity control system ---------------------------------------- 1

1) Housing & Viscosity sensor (VS01)
* Viscosity sensor
- Fluid temperature : Max. 150℃
- With scale range : 0 ~ 25 cSt
* Measuring range
- Viscosity / Temperature : 0 ~ 25cSt / 0 ~ 200℃
2) Viscosity controller (VS02) for fitted on E.C.R
* Model : VC 221
* 1 x relay output for valve control
* 1 x input signal 4 ~ 20mA for viscosity control
* 1 x input signal 4 ~ 20mA for temperature indicator
* 1 x alarm relay for viscosity
* 1 x alarm relay for power failure
* 1 x analog output 4 ~ 20mA for viscosity indication with galvanic isolation
with scale reading isolation
3) Electric steam control valve (VS03)
* Control : 2-way control
* Working pressure : 7kg/cm2
* Power source : AC 220V, 60Hz
8
STX SEJIN
Main Components
FM02 G/E F.O inlet Flow meter for mass type -------------------------------------- 1
* Model : CA040L
* Accuracy : +/- 0.1 %
FM03 G/E F.O Outlet Flow meter for mass type ------------------------------------- 1
* Model : CA040L
* Accuracy : +/- 0.1 %
PP05/06 G/E Em'cy MGO pump with Electric motor ------------------------------------ 2

PP05 NO.1 G/E Em'cy MGO pump with Electric motor from MAIN SOURCE ---------------- 1
PP06 NO.2 G/E Em'cy MGO pump with Electric motor from EM'CY SOURCE---------------- 1
* Model : ACE 032N3 NTBP / HMA2 90 S-2
* Flow rate x pressure : 2.3m³/h x 0/6bar
* Power source / Rated power : AC 440V, 60Hz, 3Ph / 1.75KW
CR01 MGO cooler for M/E & G/E (Shipyard supply item) ------------------------------ 1
CR02 MGO cooler for MGO line G/E (Shipyard supply item) --------------------------- 1
CB01 Control box ----------------------------------------------------------- 1

* 1 x Power J/B
* 1 x Control J/B
* 1 x R.P.B
* 1 x HFO Automatic filter control box
9
GHL G9>=B
hGG
h
pGSGGG
S
j k zG
z xN
wpY[W tnvGGGGlN GtnvG
tnv lN tnv GT^]oG¥G]V¸
T^]o ¥ ]V¸ X
wpY[X tnvGGGGlN GtnvG
tnv lN tnv WG¥GXWV¸
W ¥ XWV¸ X
wpY[Y omvGGGGomvG G
omv omv GT^]oG¥G]V¸
T^]o ¥ ]V¸ X
wpY[Z omvGGGGomvG G
omv omv WG¥GXWV¸
W ¥ XWV¸ X
wpY[[ omvGGGGomvGG
omv omv WG¥GXWV¸
W ¥ XWV¸ X
wpY[\ omvGGGGomvGG
omv omv WG¥GX\V¸
W ¥ X\V¸ X
wpY[_ omvGGGG TGG
omv T WG¥GX\V¸
W ¥ X\V¸ X
{pY[Z omvGGGomvG GGG
omv omv W
WG¥GYWW୅
¥ YWW୅ X
{pY[\ omvGGGomvGGG
omv omv WG¥GYWW୅
W ¥ YWW୅ X
{pY[] omvGGGomvGGG
omv omv WG¥GYWW୅
W ¥ YWW୅ X
zGGG

j k zG
z xN
wzY[Z zT GomvG GGGGomvG G
zT omv omv ZV¸ X
GGU
U
wzY[\ zT GomvGGGGGomvG
zT omv omv ]V¸ X
GGGU
U
wzY[_ zT GtnvGGomvGGGU
zT tnv omv U [V¸ X
hGG

j k zG
z xN
}hY[_ omvG SGGGGMG
omv S M X\zGVGXWz
X\z V XWz X
10
GHL G9>>=B
G9
tGGMGG
t M
11
2CIG
5RGEKHKECVKQP1H2KRKPI5[UVGO
&GUKIP *[FVGUV
+VGO 2KRG 2KRG,QKPV 8#.8'
%QPFKVKQP %NCUU
-I%Oŕ
5[UVGO QH )CUMGV /CVGTKCN
2TGUU 6GOR 0QO
RKRG 5JQR /CVGTKCN 6[RG 4CVG (KVVKPI
/CKP 5WD
WD
-I%Oŕ
% FKC $QF[
$Q &KUE
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
673* 121
(15722.;2257%.+0'
22.;2257%.+0' )/$1*( . %:
6&+6 $6%(6726
$ &$67,521
&$67 686

$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
(15722.;22&+5%*.+0'
22.;22&+5%*.+0'
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686
,,
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
673* 121
(1%+4%22&+5%*.+0'
4%22&+5%*.+0' )/$1*( .. %:
6&+6 $6%(6726
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686

$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
(15'48+%'
(14'67402+2'
67402+2'
5;56'/(14)'
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
'/ %;)'/)1
)'/)1 121
Ę . %:
2257%.+0'
7%.+0' $6%(6726
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
)'/)1
'/ %;)'/)1 673* 121
5%*.+0'
22&+5%*.+0'
125 ,,,
6&+6
)/$1*( . %:
$6%(6726
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
121
&4#+0.+0'
.+0' $70 . %:
$6%(6726
$ &$6767((/
&$67 686
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
-)EO)56'#/5'48+%'
O)56'#/5'48+%' 121
.+0'
,, .. %:
$6%(6726
$ &$67,521
&$67 686
56'#/5'48+%5;5 673*
)/$1*(
%10&'05#6'5;5 6&+6
$ %521=(
%52 %521=(
0$; 121
%10&'05#6'9#6'4.+0'
'05#6'9#6'4.+0' $70

,,, . %:
$6%(6726
$ &$67,521
&$67 686
#+4 $ %521=(

%52 %521=(
121
5'48+% %10641.#+4.+0'
41.#+4.+0' 125 ,,, 633 )/$1*( .. %:
$6%(6726
5;56'/ $ &$67,521
&$67 686
%11.+0) )'%964#0522
964#0522 673* 121
(95;56'/ &+5%*.+0'
.+0'
125 ,,, Ę $
6&+6
)/$1*( . %:
$6%(6726
%521=(
%52 %521=(
12
13
14
STX SEJIN
Part list
Part
Code Q'ty Description Size Technical data Mat'l Set range Set point
No.
COV01 1 3-Way change-over 10K-40A Manual, with L/S SC
ZS242A/242B 2 Limits switch

PF1/4", @63,
PI242 1 Pressure gauge SUS304 -76chmg~6kg/㎠
Dual unit (bar & kg/㎠)
PI242A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4"
PI242B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8"
FV01/02 2 Angle valve 5K-40A BC
OS02/03 2 Simplex oil strainer 5K-40A Basket type, 32mesh BC or FCD
OS02A/03A 2 Air vent valve @10
OS02B/03B 2 Drain valve @10
PP01/02 2 NO.1/2 F.O supply pump ACE 032N, 440V/60Hz/3Ph CAST IRON
PP01A/02A 2 El-motor for supply pump AC440V, 60Hz, 3Ph
PP01B/02B 2 Relief valve for supply Pump
FV03/04 2 Angle check valve 16K-25A BC
PRV01 1 Press. Regulating valve 16K-25A BC 4kg/cm2
PRV01A 1 Root valve @6 PT1/4"
PRV01B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
PI243 1 Pressure gauge PF1/4" SUS304 0~10kg/㎠
PI243B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
PS243 1 Pressure switch PF1/4" 0~10kg/㎠ 3kg/cm2
PS243A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4"
PS243B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
PS243C 1 3-way test cock @6 PT1/4"
TI243 1 Thermometer PT1/2", DIAL 0 ~ 200℃
FV08 1 Globe valve 16K-25A BC
OS04 1 Simplex oil strainer 10K-25A Basket type, 60mesh BC or FCD
OS04A 1 Air vent valve @10
OS04B 1 Drain valve @10
FM01 1 F.O Flow meter 20K-40A CA040L FCD 400
FV09 1 Angle check valve 16K-40A BC

About. 100L,
DT01 1 De-aerating tank STPG370
with tracing & insulation
AVV01 1 Auto. venting valve 16K-15A BC or FCD
SG01 1 Sight glass 16K-15A CAST IRON
FV11 1 Globe valve 5K-25A with locking device BC With locking device
(Normal close)
SELF01 1 Self closing valve 5K-25A F-TYPE BC
SW01/02 2 Swing check valve 5K-25A BC
SAF01 1 Safety valve 16K-15Ax25A BC or SC 12kg/㎠

PF1/4", @63,
PI244 1 Pressure gauge SUS304 0~10kg/㎠
PI244A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4" BRASS
FV14/15 2 Angle valve 16K-40A BC
PP03/04 2 No.1 F.O Circ. Pump ACE 038N, 440V/60Hz/3Ph CAST IRON
PP03A/04A 2 El-motor for circ. Pump AC440V, 60Hz, 3Ph
15
STX SEJIN
Part list
Part
No.
PP03B/04B 2 Relief valve for circulating pump
FV16/17 2 Angle check valve 16K-40A BC

PF1/4", @63,
PS245 1 Pressure switch PF1/4" 0~10kg/㎠ 6kg/㎠
PS245A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4"
PS245B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
PS245C 1 3-way test cock @6 PT1/4"
FV18/19 2 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD
HT01/02 2 NO.1/2 F.O heater MX20
HT01A/02A 2 Safety valve for NO.1/2 heater 1/2"

Sett. HFO circ. Pump relief
(Attached Heater) v/v + 3.5 kg/cm2
HT01B/02B 2 Air vent. valve for NO.1/2 heater 1/2"
(Attached Heater)
HT01C/02C 2 Drain valve for NO.1/2 heater 1/2"
(Attached Heater)
FV20/21 2 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD
FV22 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD Normal close
FV23 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD
CR01 1 MGO cooler for M/E & G/E Shipyard supply
FV26 1 Angle valve 5K-50A FC
FV27 1 Globe valve 5K-50A FC
AF01 1 F.O Automatic filter with DACT-702-DN50 Ductile Cast DPAH 1.0kg/㎠
by-pass manual filter Iron
AF01B 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"
AF01C 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"
AF01D 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"
AF01E 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"
AF01F 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"
FV28 1 Globe check valve 5K-15A BC
FV29 1 Angle valve 16K-50A SC
VS01 1 Viscomaster 16K-50A

Sensor Housing material
SUS316L 0 ~ 25 cSt
(Viscosity sensor) is FCD400
FV31 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD Normal close
PS248 1 Pressure switch PF1/4" 0~10kg/㎠ 4kg/㎠
PS248A 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
PS248B 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4" BRASS
PS248C 1 3-way test cock @6 PT1/4" BRASS
FV32 1 Globe valve 16K-15A BC Normal close
SAM01 1 Self closing valve 10K-15A BC
FV34 1 Angle valve 16K-40A BC

PF1/4", @63,
16
STX SEJIN
Part list
Part
No.
PRV02 1 Pressure regulating valve 16K-40A SC 10kg/㎠
PRV02A 1 Root valve @6 PT1/4" BRASS
PRV02B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370
FV33 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD With locking device
OS06 1 Simplex oil strainer 10K-40A Basket type, 16mesh BC
FM02 1 G/E inlet F.O flow meter 16K-40A CA040L FCD 400
FV56 1 Angle valve 16K-40A BC
OS07 1 Simplex oil strainer 10K-40A Basket type, 60mesh BC
FM03 1 G/E outlet F.O flow meter 16K-40A CA040L FCD 400
COV02 1 3-Way change-over 16K-50A Manual, without L/S SC
DV08 1 Angle check valve 16K-40A BC Normal close

PF1/4", @63,
PI240 1 Pressure gauge SUS304 -76chmg~6kg/㎠
DV01/02 2 Angle valve 5K-40A BC
OS08/09 2 Simplex oil strainer 5K-40A Basket type, 32mesh BC
OS08A/09A 2 Air vent valve @10
OS09B/09B 2 Drain valve @10
PP05/06 2 NO.1/2 em'cy G/E MGO pump-elec. ACE 032N, 440V/60Hz/3Ph CAST IRON
PP05A/06A 2 El-motor for em'cy G/E MGO pump AC440V, 60Hz, 3Ph
PP05B/05B 2 Relief valve for em'cy G/E MGO pump
DV03/04 2 Angle check valve 16K-25A BC
DV07 1 Angle check valve 16K-40A BC

PF1/4", @63,
DV20 1 Angle valve 10K-50A SC
DV21 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD
CR02 1 MGO cooler for MGO line Shipyard supply
DV22 1 Compact ball valve 16K-50A FCD
DV23 1 Angle valve 5K-50A FC
DV24 1 Globe valve 5K-50A FC
AV01 1 Needle valve @10
AV02 1 Needle valve @10
SV01 1 Globe valve 16K-25A BC
17
STX SEJIN
Part list
Part
No.
150mesh
YS01 1 Y-strainer 16K-25A SC480
with drain v/v
VS03 1 Steam control valve 16K-25A Elec. Spring load type FCD 400
SV02 1 Angle valve 16K-25A BC
SV03 1 Globe valve 16K-25A BC Normal close
ST01 1 Steam trap 5K-20A with drain v/v (@10) FCD450
SV09 1 Globe check valve 5K-20A BC
SV10 1 Globe check valve 5K-20A BC Normal close
ST02 1 Steam trap @10 with drain v/v FCD450
ST03 1 Steam trap @10 with drain v/v FCD450
MV01 1 Needle valve @10 PT3/8"

VC221, Viscosity control +
VS03 1 Viscosity controller for VC221 Fitted in E.C.R
temp. indicator
Power & Control & R.P.B
CB01 1 Control box
& Auto. Filter control box
18
GHL G9>>=B
G9
jG
j
19
PP01/02
3XPSFDOFXODWLRQ
Date of calculation Signature

2014-04-29
Inquiry from
Our ref. No
Cust. ref. No.
Item No
Fluid type Marine Gas Oil
Driver HMA2 90 L-2 / 3420 rpm / 2.50 kW
Selected pump ACE 032N3 NTBP
Duty case No. 1 2 3
Outlet press. bar 4.0 4.0 4.0

Inlet press. bar 0.0 0.0 0.0
Min. inlet pressure bar -0.79 -0.21 -0.82
Differential pressure bar 4.00 4.00 4.00
Speed rpm 3525 3425 3528

Viscosity cSt 25.8 1000 2.2
Inlet temp 㿐 * -22.7 * -60.7 45.0
Calc'd flow m?h 5.54 5.88 4.96

Required flow m?h 3.60 3.60 3.60
Power kW 1.04 2.43 1.00
Efficiency tot 58.0 26.0 55.0
*: VALUE OUTSIDE OPERATION LIMITS

Calculations made by IMO pumpselection program WinPump 3.7.9 D019D53F8206C853
Pump file V6.09, Oil file V1.9, Driver file V1,99
IMO AB TELEPHONE: E-MAIL: TELEFAX:

P.O. Box 42090 +46-(0)8-50622800 info@imo.se +46-(0)8-6451509
S-126 14 Stockholm
Visitors: V?tberga all?50
20
Pump performance
2014-04-29
ACE 032N3 NTBP
Duty case No. 1 2 3

Speed rpm 3525 3425 3528
Inlet temp 䃲 -22.7 -60.7 45.0
Calc'd flow [m?h]
6.20
6.00
Duty 2
5.80
5.60
Duty 1
5.40
5.20
5.00
Duty 3
4.80
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
Differential pressure [bar]
Power [kW]
2.50
Duty 2
2.00
1.50
1.00 Duty 1
Duty 3
0.500
0.0
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
21
'ULYHUVSHFLILFDWLRQ
'DWHRIFDOFXODWLRQ 6LJQDWXUH
2014-04-29
,QTXLU\IURP
2XUUHI1R
&XVWUHI1R
,WHP1R
6HOHFWHGSXPS ACE 032N3 NTBP
+"HU+0$/
0DQXIDFWXUHU +"HU
0RGHO +0$/
)UHTXHQF\ +]
3RZHU N:
1RPLQDOVSHHG USP
9ROWDJH 9
<' <
&XUUHQW $
6WDUWFXUUHQW $
,(&VL]H
:HLJKW NJ
1RLVH G%$
(IILFLHQF\
FRVIL
,VROSURW ),3
&ODVVLILFDWLRQ 0DULQH,QGXVWULDO
0RXQWLQJ ,0%
&RROLQJ ,&
&DEOH [0 0
0DWHULDO $OXPLQLXP
,QHUWLD NJP"
7RUTXH 1P
'ULYHUILOH9 '')&
,02$% 7(/(3+21( (0$,/ 7(/()$;

32%R[ LQIR#LPRVH
66WRFNKROP
9LVLWRUV9"WEHUJDDOO"
22
23
24
25
26
3XPSFDOFXODWLRQ PP03/04

2014-04-29
Inquiry from
Our ref. No
Cust. ref. No.
Item No
Driver HMA2 112 M1-2 / 3480 rpm / 4.70 kW
Duty case No. 1 2 3

Speed rpm 3542 3507 3542

Inlet temp 㿐 1.2 * -50.3 45.0
Calc'd flow m?h 8.89 9.99 8.31

Power kW 2.28 3.64 2.28
*: VALUE OUTSIDE OPERATION LIMITS


P.O. Box 42090 +46-(0)8-50622800 info@imo.se +46-(0)8-6451509
S-126 14 Stockholm
27
Pump performance
2014-04-29
ACE 038N3 NTBP
Duty case No. 1 2 3

Speed rpm 3542 3507 3542
Inlet temp 䃲 1.2 -50.3 45.0
Calc'd flow [m?h]
10.5
10.0 Duty 2
9.50
9.00
Duty 1
8.50
Duty 3
8.00
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00
Power [kW]
4.00
Duty 2
3.50
3.00
2.50
Duty 1
Duty 3
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.500
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00
28
'ULYHUVSHFLILFDWLRQ
2014-04-29
,QTXLU\IURP
2XUUHI1R
&XVWUHI1R
,WHP1R
+"HU+0$0
0DQXIDFWXUHU +"HU
0RGHO +0$0
)UHTXHQF\ +]
3RZHU N:
1RPLQDOVSHHG USP
9ROWDJH 9
<' '
&XUUHQW $
6WDUWFXUUHQW $
,(&VL]H
:HLJKW NJ
1RLVH G%$
(IILFLHQF\
FRVIL
,VROSURW ),3
0RXQWLQJ ,0%
&RROLQJ ,&
&DEOH [0 0
0DWHULDO $OXPLQLXP
,QHUWLD NJP"
7RUTXH 1P
'ULYHUILOH9 '')&
,02$% 7(/(3+21( (0$,/ 7(/()$;

32%R[ LQIR#LPRVH
66WRFNKROP
29
30
31
32
33
PP05/06
3XPSFDOFXODWLRQ

2014-04-29
Inquiry from
Our ref. No
Cust. ref. No.
Item No
Driver HMA2 90 S-2 / 3420 rpm / 1.75 kW
Duty case No. 1 2 3

Speed rpm 3464 3464 3464

Viscosity cSt 2.0 20.0 2.2
Inlet temp 㿐 50.6 -18.3 45.0
Calc'd flow m?h 4.54 5.20 4.58

Power kW 1.32 1.32 1.32


P.O. Box 42090 +46-(0)8-50622800 info@imo.se +46-(0)8-6451509
S-126 14 Stockholm
34
Pump performance
2014-04-29
ACE 032N3 NTBP
Duty case No. 1 2 3

Speed rpm 3464 3464 3464
Viscosity cSt 2.0 20.0 2.2
Inlet temp 䃲 50.6 -18.3 45.0
Calc'd flow [m?h]
6.50
6.00
5.50
Duty 2
5.00
Duty 1
4.50
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 Duty 3
6.00 7.00
Power [kW]
1.40
Duty 1
Duty 2
1.20 Duty 3
1.00
0.800
0.600
0.400
0.200
0.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00
35
'ULYHUVSHFLILFDWLRQ
2014-04-29
,QTXLU\IURP
2XUUHI1R
&XVWUHI1R
,WHP1R
+"HU+0$6
0DQXIDFWXUHU +"HU
0RGHO +0$6
)UHTXHQF\ +]
3RZHU N:
1RPLQDOVSHHG USP
9ROWDJH 9
<' <
&XUUHQW $
6WDUWFXUUHQW $
,(&VL]H
:HLJKW NJ
1RLVH G%$
(IILFLHQF\
FRVIL
,VROSURW ),3
0RXQWLQJ ,0%
&RROLQJ ,&
&DEOH [0 0
0DWHULDO $OXPLQLXP
,QHUWLD NJP"
7RUTXH 1P
'ULYHUILOH9 '')&
,02$% 7(/(3+21( (0$,/ 7(/()$;

32%R[ LQIR#LPRVH
66WRFNKROP
36
37
38
39
40
HT01/02
DATA SHEET
Aalborg Heat Exchanger
Alfa Laval Aalborg Ref.: 515214-1a

Contact person Arne Skjønnemann
Customer & Ref.: Sejin F.O. Heater

Contact person J.W. Lee S-1651 to S-1658
Date: 4 Jun 2014
Heat Exchanger Model: Aalborg Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger

2-Pass design with U-tubes
Type/size: MX20 - L1600

Class KR
Dimension sketch: 15 K
Fluid 1 Fluid 2
HFO 700 Steam
Shell Side Tube Side
Mass flow: 7,108 338 kg/h

Volume flow 7.80 92.30 m³/h
Inlet temperature: 105.0 165.0 °C
Outlet temperature: 150.0 165.0 °C
Fluid density: 911 - kg/m³
Opreating pressure: 10.00 6.00 bar g
Pressure drop: 0.50 - bar g
Fluid max. velocity 0.96 5.54 m/s
Nozzle size 50 32 /20 DN
Capacity: 194.1 kW
Overall Heat Transmission Coeff.: 736 W/m²K
LMTD Corrected: 32.5 °C
Gross Heat Surface: 9.5 m²
Fouling margin 16.7 %
Baffle distance 50 mm
Weight (empty) 220 kg
v1.3 b06.11-1
41
42
CR01
(YARD SUPPLY ITEM)
43
44
CR02
(YARD SUPPLY ITEM)
45
46
FAF01
JOB DATA
Customer : SEJIN INDUSTRIES
Purchase Order No. : TBA
Installation : M/E & G/E FO
Hull No. : S1651 ~ 1658
Filtrex Job No. : TBA
Filter Model : DACT-702-50
Drawing No. : A97930
Serial No. : TBA
TECHNICAL DATA
A) GENERAL
Operating Fluid : DO, HFO
Inlet/Outlet Connections : DN 50 DIN PN16
Flowrate : 8,98 m³/h max
Operating Temperature : 150°C
Operating Pressure : 10 Bar
Hydrotest Pressure : 1,5 X Design pressure
Painting : Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2
Insulation : -
C) MATERIALS
Housing-Flanges : Ductile Cast Iron EN-GJS400-15 (GGG 40)
Filtering Element : Stainless Steel
Gaskets : Viton
External Bolting : Cl. 8.8
D) FILTERING ELEMENT
Auto Filtering Element type : RAC-702-X-35
Auto Filtering Element surface : 2,023 cm²
By pass Filtering Element type : R-703-X-35
By pass Filtering Element surface : 3,100 cm²
Degree of Filtration : 35 µm abs (by-pass 35µm abs)
No. of Element : 1 (operating) +1 (stand-by)
'p (clean) : 0,2 Kg/cm2
Max. 'p (dirty) : 0,6 Kg/cm2
High alarm : 1,0 Kg/cm2
E) CERTIFICATE
By : KR
ATTACHMENTS
- start-up & commissioning & recommended spare parts
- "Wiring
Wiring Diagram
Diagram" No.
No SE-182-440-60
- "Gauge Board Specification" No. GB58
0 FOR APPROVAL SDL SDL SDL 12/05/2014 47

REV. DESCRIPTION COMPILED CHECKED APPROVED DATE
48
GAUGE BOARD SPECIFICATION N° GB58
ITALY
mod. GB58 Rev. 00 date: 24/09/2010
The property of this document is protected by the law. Reproduction
and disclosure to third parties or to competitors is forbidden unless
previously agreed in writing.
Technical Data
Protection class: IP-65
Switching voltage max. 250 V (0 to 250V)

Frequency 0 ~ 60 Hz (range)
Switching current max. 0,7 A (0 to 0,7A)
Switching capacity max. 70 VA (0 to 70VA)
Material: Die cast al.
Operating pressure max. 200 barg (0 to 200 bar)

Operating temperature max. 160°C (0 to 160°C)
Differential pressure range 0 ~ 1.4 bar (range)
1° Switch set point 0.6 bar ( green / yellow )
2° Switch set point 1.0 bar (yellow / red)
Cable gland PG13
drawn up checked approved

DD FS UG
49
'$7$6+((7&25,2/,60$66)/2:0(7(56
29$/(1*,1((5,1*,1&25325$7(' 7
5(9 '$7( '(6&5,37,21 35(3
' &+.
' $339
'
352-(&71267;6a 3$*( 2)
352-(&71$0(
&/,(1767; 35(3
'.6.,0 )254827$7,21 .6.,0 .6.,0 6.<$1*
*(1(5$/
7$*12 0( *()2IORZPHWHU *(,QOHW)2IORZPHWHU *(2XWOHW)2IORZPHWHU
48$17,7< 3 ,'12
6(59,&(

/,1(6,=( /,1(6&+('8/(
3,3(0$7(5,$/&/$66
(1&/2685(

0(7(5
&211(&7,216,=( 5$7,1* $-,6.5) $-,6.5) $-,6.5)
6(16257<3( '28%/(878%(7<3( '28%/(878%(7<3( '28%/(878%(7<3(
$&&85$&< RI5' RI5' RI5'
6&$/(5$1*( .JKU a a a
+286,1* 686 686 686
0$7(5,$/ 78%( 686/ 686/ 686/
)/$1*( 686/ 686/ 686/
(/(&75,&$/&211(&7,21
)/2:',5(&7,21 )25:$5'$1'5(9(56( )25:$5'$1'5(9(56( )25:$5'$1'5(9(56(
0$;,0807(03(5$785( ఁ
35(6685('523#0D[)ORZ ༆
.J *
75$160,77(5
02'(/ 3$. 3$. 3$.
02817,1*,17(*5$/RU5(027( 5(027( 5(027( 5(027(
32:(56833/<
32:(5 6833/< a9$&+]RUa9'&
9$&+]RU 9'&
a9$&+]RUa9'& a9$&+]RUa9'&
9$&+]RU 9'& 9$&+]RU 9'&
2873876,*1$/ aP$'&0$66)/2: aP$'&0$66)/2: aP$'&0$66)/2:
2873876,*1$/
2873876,*1$/ 38/6( 38/6( 38/6(
',63/$< 727$/5$7('(16,7< 7(03 727$/5$7('(16,7< 7(03 727$/5$7('(16,7< 7(03
)8//6&/( .JKU
(/(&75,&$/&211(&7,21 3)) 3)) 3))
(1&/2685( ้
([G>LE@ %7 ้
([G>LE@ %7 ้
([G>LE@ %7
$&&(6625,(6
63(&,$/&$%/( P P P
&/($1,1*

352&(66&21',7,216
)/8,' +)20*2 +)20*2 +)20*2
)/2:5$7(81,7 67$7( ໽KU / ໽KU / ໽KU /
0$; 1250,1 0$; 1250,1 0$; 1250,1
)/2:5$7( ໽K
,1/(735(6685( ༆*
.J
7(03(5$785( ୅
23(5$7,1*9,6&26,7< FVW a a a
23(5$7,1*'(16,7< .J᎑
02/(&8/$5:(,*+7
0$18)$&785(5
0$18)$&785(5 2YDO&RUSRUDWLRQ-DSDQ 2YDO&RUSRUDWLRQ-DSDQ 2YDO&RUSRUDWLRQ-DSDQ
0(7(502'(/ &$/6&$$ &$/6&$$ &$/6&$$
50
FM01 ME & GE
F.O FLOW METER
29$/&RULROLV6HOHFWLRQ*XLGH 9HU$0
&XVWRPHU 67;
7DJ1R 0( *()2)/2:0(7(5
0D[)ORZ5DWHPKRXU NJKRXU
'HQVLW\NJP JP/
9LVFRVLW\P3DV P3DV
3UHVVXUHNJIFP 03D
7HPSHUDWXUHGHJ& GHJ&
0RGHO 0DVV$FFXUDF\ 3UHVVXUH'URS 9HORFLW\ 5H\QROGV1XPEHU

5DWH NJIFP N3D PVHF
&$/
)ORZ5DWH3RLQW'DWD
0RGHO&$/
)ORZ5DWH 0DVV$FFXUDF\ 3UHVVXUH'URS 9HORFLW\ 5H\QROGV1XPEHU

PKRXU 5DWH NJIFP N3D PVHF

&DXWLRQ
3UHVVXUHGURSDQGVL]LQJGDWDRI1RQ1HZWRQLDQIOXLGVFDQQRWEHFDOFXODWHGE\WKLVDSSOLFDWLRQ
$SSUR[LPDWHXSSHUOLPLWRI1HZWRQLDQIOXLGVIRUPRGHOV&$&$DQG&1LVP3DV
PRGHOV&6DQG6LVP3DVDQGP3DVIRUDOORWKHUPRGHOV
0D[LPXPDOORZDEOHZRUNLQJSUHVVXUHGHSHQGVRQWKHWHPSHUDWXUHDQGFRQQHFWRUIODQJHUDWLQJ
51
FM02 G/E INLET
F.O FLOW METER
&XVWRPHU 67;
7DJ1R *(,1/(7)2)/2:0(7(5
'HQVLW\NJP JP/
9LVFRVLW\P3DV P3DV
3UHVVXUHNJIFP 03D

5DWH NJIFP N3D PVHF
&$/
)ORZ5DWH3RLQW'DWD
0RGHO&$/


&DXWLRQ
52
FM03 G/E OUTLET
F.O FLOW METER
&XVWRPHU 67;
7DJ1R *(287/(7)2)/2:0(7(5
'HQVLW\NJP JP/
9LVFRVLW\P3DV P3DV
3UHVVXUHNJIFP 03D

5DWH NJIFP N3D PVHF
&$/
)ORZ5DWH3RLQW'DWD
0RGHO&$/


&DXWLRQ
53
D 2 2 A A 1 1 3 3
54
KOSHA T4 Ex d IIB
VCS01/02/03
FO viscosity control system
55
<VCS01>
2. Dimensions VISCOMASTER
Weight
VISCOMASTER + Inline installation adapter 20kg
JIS 16K-50A
Material specification
VISCOMASTER material 316L stainless steel (fork is PTFE laminated)
VISCOMASTER process connection 1.5” cone seat
VISCOMASTER static gaskets No required
VISCOMASTER pressure range As defined by process connection (LR approval is valid
to 70 bar)
VISCOMASTER temperature range -50….+200°C
CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by 12-15-2006 E.G. Kim

Switzerland Checked by 12-15-2006 H.S. Kwak Dimensions, Weight,
aquametro.com Approved by 12-15-2006 F. Thorn Material Viscomaster
56
<VCS02>
Dimensions viscosity controller VC221 :
Display
VC 221
Installation dimensions and panel/console cut-out:
Type of 4-20mA 4-20mA Visco. Temp. Visco. Alarm Viscosity Temperature

controller Visco.input Temp.input control control Relay output 4-20mA 4-20mA
(Switchable) output output
High Low
VC211 O O O High & Low O
VC220 O O O O O
Ä VC221 O O O O O O
VC322 O O O O O O O O
Viscosity controller general specification

Power supply : 230VAC +/- 10 %, 48...62Hz
Power consumption : approx. 14 VA
Protective system DIN 40050 : IP54 (terminals IP20)
Permissible ambient temperature : 0...60°C
Nominal temperature : 20°C
Relay: max 250V 2A
Control function : 3-point step-controller
Control outputs : 2 relays for steam control valve
57
<VCS01>
3. Dimensions Inline installation adapter :
Flanges are based on DIN norm drilled according to specification:
Hole circle and number of holes (16K- 50A)

Ä JIS 10K / 16K Ø F1 120
JIS 10K holes and Øh 4x19
Ä JIS 16K holes and Øh 8x19
body Spheroidal graphite iron FCD400/ GGG40.3
pressure range 40 bar

Switzerland Checked by 12-15-2006 H.S. Kwak Dimensions, material
aquametro.com Approved by 12-15-2006 F. Thorn installation adapter
58
<VCS03>
5. Dimensions steam control valve
153
Space required
Actuator type: 145 to remove
2kN: 4e1230 (for 4-6kN-actuator: 190) the bonnet
4(6)kN: 4e14(6)30
Bonnet
Motor
Limit switch
Gear
Spring plate-unit H*
Spindle (actuator)
Hand wheel
Mounting rod
PTFE-V-ring-unit
Spindle
Plug
Valve body type: vg21...

L
- M/E STEAM COTROL VALVE 10K- 32A
Dimensions (flanges are based on DIN norm drilled according to specification):

DN 15 20 25 Ä32 40 50
Height H* 491 505 499 505 511 513
Immersion length L 130 150 160 180 200 230
ØF 95 105 115 Tbd 150 165
ÄJIS 10K / 16K Ø F1 70 75 90 Tbd 105 120
ÄJIS 10K holes and Øh 4x15 4x15 4x19 4x19 4x19 4x19
JIS 16K holes and Øh 4x15 4x15 4x19 4x19 4x19 8x18
Weight kg 13 14 15 17 18 20
body Spheroidal graphite iron FCD400/ GGG40.3
Spindle sealing Spring loaded PTFE-V-Ring-Unit
Internal parts Stainless steel
pressure range 10 bar

Dimension, weight, material,
Switzerland Checked by 12-15-2006 H.S. Kwak
aquametro.com Approved by 12-15-2006 F. Thorn Steam control valve
59
k{WXGomvG}lu{punGiv
60
PI240/241/242/243/244/245/248
BAR
BAR
61
TI243/245/246
62
PS243/245/248
63
OS02/03/04/05/06/07/08/09
64
< YS01 >
65
< COV01 >
COV01
66
COV02
67
< PRV01
PRV01/02 >
PRV01
PRV02
68
< ST01 >
69
<ST02/03>
70
< AVV01 >
71
< SG01 >
72
73
<SAF01>
74
<<SELF01,SAM01>
SELF01 >
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
GHL G9>>=B
G9
lG
l
89
90
91
92
93
94
AF01
95
96
97
?
?
98
99
100
ALTImass TypeU GBN120E-13
■ DIMENSIONS [Unit in mm]

● Separately located transmitter
230
344 127 103
70 233 120
20 61.7 171.5 74
φ134
124
160
69
60
125
Conduit connection G3/4
Conduit connection G3/4 (G1/2:TIIS) 64
※: While stanchion mounting hardware are furnished as standard accessories, the customer is to furnish the stanchion.
■ REMOTE MEASURING SYSTEM
Transmitter
(Integral type)
Sensor Unit ● Analog output (flow rate, temp. or density)
｛
4 to 20mADC
● Flow rate pulse output
Transmitter Voltage or open collector
(Separate type)
Personal
computer DCS, computer
etc
Recorder
Sensor Unit
Controllers
■ WIRING DIAGRAM
● Terminal identification and description
Item Label Description Remarks
Power terminals A1(+)
Analog output 1 (4 to 20mA) 1. Max. load resistance is 600Ω
A1(−) for analog output 1 and 2.
Status in/out A2(+)
Analog output 2 (4 to 20mA) 2. Pulse output (voltage pulse)
terminals A2(−)
transmission length is
P1(+) Pulse output 1 Max. 10m (at 10kHz)
Ext. GND terminals P1(−) (voltage/open collector output) Max. 100m (at 1kHz)
Max. 1km (at 100Hz)
P2(+) Pulse output 2 finished O.D: 0.75sq
Signal P2(−) (voltage/open collector output)
3. In case of TIIS explosionproof
S.I.(+)
Analog and pulse Status input (contact input) type used under the ambient
S.I.(−) temperature of 45℃ or higher,
Remote output output terminals
S.O.(+) use a cable resistant to the
terminals Status output
temperature of 75℃ or higher.
S.O.(−) (open collector output)
I/O(+)
Expanded in/out
Max. 1km at 0.65sq
I/O(−) (Modbus communication, etc.)
L(+) Power (with DC power: +)
Power FG Earth ground
N(−) Power (with DC power: –)
NOTE: The common terminals for pulse outputs 1 and 2 and the status output of this
instrument are not isolated. Therefore, if you want to connect an external device to
each output terminal with a load (resistance) added to the minus side, no correct output
might be obtained. Please be sure to use the external device with the load connected to
the plus side.
101
15
ALTImass TypeU GBN120E-13
■ WIRING
● Wiring between Sensor Unit and Separately Mounted Transmitter
Transmitter
Mass Flow Kg／min
0.00000
Vol Flow L／min
0.00000
SEL CUR
Sensor terminal box
Interconnect cable
(200m max.)
Barrier cover to be applied Cut off shield wires here except for the
in a hazardous area shield wire over BRN and RED lines. Interconnect cable (Max. 200m)
Shield
(Protected by black tube)
Shield wires
Brown Brown
Red Red
Brown
Red
Green Green Green
White
Grey
White White Blue
Yellow
Orange
cut Orange
Purple
Yellow
Green
Blue Blue
Black
Blue Grey Grey Red
Purple Brown
Grey cut
White
Purple Purple
Yellow Yellow
Orange Orange
Sensor terminal box cut

Shield Transmitter terminal box
NOTE 1. Do not fail to use dedicated interconnect cable.

2. Shield wire preparation
(1) Transmitter end:
As shown in the above figure, bundle shield wires colored in brown/red, green/white, blue/grey and purple/yellow/orange
and cover the wires with a black tube. Then connect only one wire to the terminal box (black) taking care to avoid potential
contact with the housing or conductive parts.
(2) Sensor end:
As shown in the figure, cover the brown/red shield wire with a black tube and connect it to the terminal box taking care to
avoid potential contact with the housing or conductive parts. Clip all shield wires except brown/ red as shown in the above
figure.
(3) Recommended cable end treatment:
9mm
※: Use of a stick type crimp terminal is not necessary.
102
16
GHL G9>=B
z

zGG
103
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 1 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
NO NAME SKETCH MATERIAL UNIT Pos.no REMARKS
Working Spare
for HFO supply pump

1 BALL BEARING PUMP Steel 2 2 EA 122
(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

2 LIP SEAL Teflon 2 2 EA 125
(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

3 GASKET KlingerSil 2 2 EA 418
(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
Fluor for HFO supply pump

5 O-RING 2 2 EA 443B
rubber ((Art. No 190712))
for HFO supply pump

6 WASHER Aluminium 2 2 EA 462A
(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

9 SHAFT SEAL 50G 2 2 EA 509
(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
Sejin Industries Co., Ltd.

104
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 2 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
Working Spare
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
for HFO supply pump

(Art. No 190712)
Fluor for HFO supply pump

13 O-RING 2 2 EA 605
rubber (Art. No 190712)
for HFO circ. Pump

14 BALL BEARING PUMP Steel 2 2 EA 122
(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

15 LIP SEAL Teflon 2 2 EA 125
((Art. No 190499))
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

17 O-RING KlingerSil 2 2 EA 443B
(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)

105
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 3 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
Working Spare
509 for HFO circ. Pump

21 SHAFT SEAL 50G 2 2 EA
(Art. No 190977) (Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
for HFO circ. Pump

(Art. No 190499)
Fluor for HFO circ. Pump

25 O-RING 2 2 EA 605
rubber ((Art. No 190499))
for G/E em'cy

26 BALL BEARING PUMP Steel 2 2 EA 122 MGO pump
(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

27 LIP SEAL Teflon 2 2 EA 125 MGO pump
(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

28 GASKET KlingerSil 2 2 EA 423 MGO pump
((Art. No 190712))
for G/E em'cy

Fluor
29 O-RING 2 2 EA 443B MGO pump
rubber
(Art. No 190712)
ffor G/E em'cy

'
30 WASHER Aluminium 2 2 EA 462A MGO pump
(Art. No 190712)

106
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 4 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
Working Spare
for G/E em'cy

(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

34 SHAFT SEAL 50G 2 2 EA 509 MGO pump
(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

(A t No
(Art. N 190712)
for G/E em'cy

(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

(Art. No 190712)
for G/E em'cy

Fluor
38 O-RING 2 2 EA 605 MGO pump
rubber
((Art. No 190712))
Gasket W/BAR
39 MAKER STD 4 4 EA 15P4006 For HFO heater (Ø218)
MX15 T16
Gasket
40 MAKER STD 2 2 EA 86G3003 For HFO heater (Ø218)
MX15 T16

107
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 5 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
Working Spare
Spring for For HFO heater

41 MAKER STD 2 2 EA 87S0028
safety valve (12.1-20.0bar)
for FO automatic filter

Backwash nozzle
42 MAKER STD 2 2 EA 7 (X-RING
(X RING D=35mm,
D 35mm,
gasket
D
T=3.53mm)

Backwash shaft
43 MAKER STD 1 1 EA 7a (O-RING D=43mm,
bushing gasket
D
T=3.53mm)

Self-cleaning filter
44 MAKER STD 1 1 EA 13 (O-RING D=140mm,
cover gasket
D
T=3.53mm)

Self-cleaning filtering
element ggasket
D
T 3 53
T=3.53mm) )

46 Backwash line gasket MAKER STD 1 1 EA 20 (O-RING D=31mm,
D
T=3.53mm)

47 Static filter cover gasket MAKER STD 1 1 EA 53 (O-RING D=152mm,
D
T=3.53mm)
Static filtering element for FO automatic filter

48 upper-lower head MAKER STD 2 2 EA 54*58 (O-RING D=108mm,
D
gasket
g T=3.53mm))

Static filter housing
gasket
D
T=3.53mm)
ffor FO automatic
t ti filt
filter
Change-over valve
flange gasket
D
T=3.53mm)

108
Rev. No.
Spare Part List 0

PAGE : 6 / 6
Q'ty/Ship
Working Spare
T

Change-over valve
body side gasket
D
T=5.34mm)

Change-over valve
52 MAKER STD 2 2 EA 109 (O-RING
(O RING D=90mm,
D 90mm,
plug side gasket
D
T=5.34mm)
FOR HFO Viscosity

MAKER STD
53 PTFF V-Ring-Unit 1 1 EA 93880(DN 20) control
(PTFE)
system
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

109
Screw pumps
A Member of the Low pressure pumps

COLFAX PUMP GROUP
Installation and Start-up Instruction
This instruction is valid for all standard low pressure pumps:

LPD, ACD, ACE, ACG/UCG, ACF/UCF, LPQ and ABQ
Contents Page
Pump identification 2
Installation 3
Start-up 8
Trouble shooting 10
Before commencing any work, read this instruction carefully! Failure to comply
! with these instructions may cause damage and personal injury!
LP 1205GB
July 2001
These instructions are valid for all low pressure pumps as specified in the Pump identification chart below.
Pump identification
Pump name Size Rotor Design Material Shaft- Mounting Valve Also Comments
(1) lead modification pump- seal (2) (3) valid for
(1) body design option
(1) (1)
LPD 015 N 1 I V B P Pumpunit

020 without shaft
coupling
ACD 025 L 6 I V B P Pumpunit

N N T without shaft
coupling
ACE 025 K V
032 L
T
038 N 3 N B P A101
Q
ACG/UCG 045 K 6 I V B E A101 O = max 6 bar

052 N N T F G A327
060 O A020
070 P A385
ACF/UCF 080 K 4 I R B E A020 O = max 10 bar

090 L N V F O A084
100 N P A087
110 A101
125
LPQ 100 L 1 I R Y P
110 N
125 P
140 J
ABQ 160 B 5 I R Y O A328 O = max 5 bar

180 L P
N
(1) See Product description or Service instruction for specified Option

pump model A020 Pump with surface treated casing(s)
A084 Pump with lifetime greased ball bearing
(2) B = Flange mounting
A087 Pump with CCW-rotation and lifetime greased ballbearing
F = Foot mounting
A101 Pump with CCW-rotation, when not standard
Y = Vertical foot mounting
A327 Pump with Tuning®
(3) E = Without valve A328 Pump with Tuning®
G = Valve with external return A385 A101 + A327
O = Valve with internal return for reduced pressure range
P = Valve with internal return for total pressure range
2 IMO AB, Telephone: + 46 8 50 622 800, Telefax: + 46 8 645 15 09 LP 1205GB

E-mail: info@imo.se, Web: www.imo.se July 2001
Identification of safety instructions Safety instructions which shall be considered for
Non compliance of safety instructions Safety instructions where reasons of safe operation of the pump or pump
identified by the following symbol - electrical safety is involved, unit and/or protection of the pump or pump unit
could affect safety for persons. are identified by: itself are marked by the sign:
ATTENTION
Installation
BEFORE COMMENCING ANY WORK, READ THIS INSTRUCTION CAREFULLY!
Design limitations and technical data for each pump are found in the Product description.
Installation of IMO AB low pressure pumps does not require special skills. However, these instructions
presume that the work is carried out by experienced fitters.
Maintenance and service instructions, which are specific for each pump are presented in a separate docu-
ment.
Failure to comply with these instructions

! may cause damage and personal injury!
Transport and storage

Always protect the pump against ingress of water
and other impurities. Store the pump in a clean, dry
and warm environment. The pump is delivered with
the internals oiled and with protective covers over
the pipe connections and drain openings. These
covers should remain in place for as long as possible
during the mounting and installation procedure but
must be removed before start up.
All work carried out on the pump has to be

! performed in such a manner that risks for
personal injury are observed!
Fig. 1 Clean and dry environment.
max 90°
Lifting of pump min 60°
max 90°
All pumps should be lifted with straps min 60°
! securely attached to the pump or pump unit,
so that the center of gravity is located be-
tween the straps in order to avoid tipping of
the pump.
Use two eye bolts (M 20) securely fastened to the max 90°
front cover for pumps LPQ and ABQ. Pump and min 60°
connecting frame are lifted together using two eye
bolts securely fastened to the top of the connecting
frame. (Thread dimension is M 16, except for frame
size 600, where it is M 20).
Fig. 2 Lifting of pump

LP 1205GB IMO AB, Telephone: + 46 8 50 622 800, Telefax: + 46 8 645 15 09 3
July 2001 E-mail: info@imo.se, Web: www.imo.se
Lifting of the complete pump unit with the lifting
device attached to the motor, should be avoided as
A
the motor’s lifting provisions may not be able to
carry the combined weight of the pump and motor.
Lifting a complete pump unit, using slings

! or hooks attached to the pump or connecting
frame may be dangerous since the centre of
gravity of the pump unit may be higher than Distance Circular Angular
the points of attachments. between run-out alignment
coupling halves
t
Mounting
The pump must be securely mounted on a firm
stable foundation and positioned so that it is easily D
accessible for inspection and servicing.
Provisions for collecting oil spillage when servicing max
0.1°
the pump should be considered.
See table below D4 ø max 0.3 mm An angular

ATTENTION D6 ø max 0.4 mm
E4 ø max 0.4 mm misalignment of
The installation must always be designed to 0.1° corresponds to
minimise damage. Should an operational or approx. 0.2 mm
functional failure occur. E.g. precautions deviation/100 mm.
should be considered to collect oil spillage
due to a broken pipe or pump housing, to
stop pump operation if overheating should B
occur or if the oil volume is below a mini-
mum tank level.
Alignment and shaft couplings

The pump shall be connected to its driver via a
flexible shaft coupling. Pumps of type ACG/UCG
and ACF/UCF may also be driven via gears or
pulleys as specified in the Product Description,
ØD
provided the radial forces are kept within the

specified range.
x=y-t
t
An angular misalignment of 0.1° corresponds to X Y
approx. 0.2 mm deviation/100 mm.
The coupling and alignment shall be selected not to
transmit any axial or radial loads on the shaft ends.
IMO AB standard couplings shall have a distance
between the coupling halves as per table, fig 4. the
coupling halves shall be secured by lock screws.
For other types of couplings, please refer to respec-
tive maker’s manual.
Fig. 3 Alignment of the IMO AB standard coupling

When fitting the shaft coupling, do not use a
! hammer or similar as this may damage the
ball bearing and shaft seal.
Use some kind of press tool. Outer diameter Distance between Outer diameter Distance between
of coupling coupling halves of coupling coupling halves
(D mm) (t mm) (D mm) (t mm)
A B A B
When handling liquids that may harm skin 50 26 2.0 8 148 3.5
! use gloves and/or protective clothing. 67 40 2.5 16 168 3.5
82 55 3.0 18 194 3.5
97 65 3.0 20 214 4.0
112 80 3.5 24 240 4.0
128 95 3.5 26
When handling liquids which may involve
! fire hazards appropriate precautions to avoid Fig 4. Distance between coupling halves.
danger are to be taken. (IMO AB standard coupling)

Measures shall be provided to avoid acci- For direct driven pumps the alignment between
! dental contact with the rotating shaft cou- pump and motor shafts must be kept within the
pling. Any installed coupling guard following limits:
shall permit easy access to the pump shaft
for maintenance and inspection of the Max run-out Max angular
pump bearing and seal housing. misalignment
(mm) (degrees)
Type LPD
Pipe connections and ACD (n/a short coupled)
The pipe work shall be installed and supported so Other types 0.3 0.1
that no pipe stresses are transfered to the pump
body. Fig 5.
The pipe work should be tight in order to avoid
leakage and infiltration of foreign particles and/or
air.
Shut off valves should be installed in both suction
and discharge pipes, so that the pump can be hy-
draulically isolated.
Suction line
The suction pipe should be designed so that the total
pressure drop, measured at the pump inlet flange,
does not exceed the suction capability of the pump.
Make a proper calculation of the suction line includ- Fig. 6 Pipe connections
ing components such as valves, strainer, pipe bends
etc. Generally, the pressure drop in the suction line
should be as low as possible, which is achieved if the
suction pipe is short, straight and has a suitable
diameter.
The velocity in the suction line should be kept in the
range 0.5 - 1.2 m/s. For L.O. circulating systems, we
recommend to keep it as low as possible.
The suction line must be equipped with a port that
allows filling the pump before start.
Discharge line
The discharge line should be dimensioned to keep
the velocity in the range 1 - 3 m/s. Fig.7 Suction line
Deaeration
In installations with negative suction head, where
the pump might be started against a pressurized
system, a deaeration pipe with an orifice (2-3 mm
recommended) has to be installed. The deaeration
pipe should be connected to the outlet pipe’s highest
point.
This must also be installed when the pump is used
as an stand-by pump.
Fig. 8 Deaeration
Strainer
The pump has to be protected from foreign matter,
such as weld slag, pipe scale, etc., that could enter
the pump via the suction line. If the cleanliness of
the system cannot be guaranteed, a strainer must be
installed in the inlet pipe near the pump. For practi-
cal reasons a suction strainer with 0.5 - 2 mm mesh
openings is recommended:
Small pumps (LPD, ACD, ACE) 0.5-0.8 mm
Large pumps (ACG/UCG, ACF/UCF, LPQ,/ABQ)
0.8-2.0 mm
The size of the strainer should be selected so that it
is large enough to allow adequate pressure at the
pump inlet. The pressure drop across the strainer Fig. 9 Strainer
should preferably not exceed 0.1 bar at max. flow
rate and normal operating viscosity. A vacuum
gauge between the strainer and the pump inlet is
recommended to indicate when the strainer needs
cleaning.
Shaft seal drain

The pump should be installed so that any leakage
from the shaft seal does not become a hazard. As the
shaft seal has to be lubricated a small amount of oil
dripping cannot be avoided.
Provisions to collect the leakage from the shaft seal
must be made.
A drain pipe can be connected to the drain connec-
tion on the pump, (not applicable to pump series
LPD). However, when pumping heavy fuel oil or
any other liquid that is likely to become very viscous
at ambient temperature, we recommend that the
liquid is allowed to drop freely from the drain
;;;;
opening.
Fig. 10 Shaft seal drain
;;;;
SealGuard
;;;;
For heavy fuel oil high temperature applications, a
SealGuard should be applied to the pump. Further
information about SealGuard, read the Installation
and Start-up Instruction for SealGuard.
Liquid trap
In some mounting arrangements the pump may not
retain the liquid at stand still. In such installations
the suction pipe should be arranged so it forms a
liquid trap together with the pump, keeping the
pump half filled with liquid. See fig. 11.
Fig. 11 Liquid trap

Gauges
Gauges for monitoring the pump’s working condi-
tions are recommended. These gauges should be
placed readable as close to the pump’s in- and outlet
flanges as possible. On standard pumps, series ACE,
ACG/UCG, ACF/UCF and LPQ, there are gauge
connections for both in- and outlet.
bar
Fig. 12 Gauges
Pressure relief valve

All systems with screw pumps must be equipped
with a pressure relief valve installed immediately
adjacent to the pump.
In the standard versions of IMO AB low pressure
pumps, this pressure relief valve is an integral part
of the pump to protect the system against excess
pressure.
When liquid is circulated through the valve it heats
up in proportion to the set pressure level and the
percentage of by-passed liquid. 100% by-pass can
only be tolerated for less than about 3 minutes, 50 %
by-pass generally for unlimited periods of time. Fig. 13 Pressure relief valve
If more than 50% recirculation is anticipated, a value
specific to each application should be determined by
closely monitoring the pump body temperature.
If the pump is operating in line with a separate
pressure control valve (see fig. 13), the setting of the
relief valve should be high enough so as not to
interfere with the control valve. Likewise, if two
pumps are operating in parallel, the setting should
be such that interference between the two valves is
avoided.
Pressure testing and flushing

The system must be flushed and pressure tested
before connecting the pump. If corrosive liquid, such
as water is used, the system must be thoroughly
drained, dried and protected against corrosion after
having been flushed.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery and

! cause personal injury.
Fig. 14 External control with pressure relief valve

Start-up
Before starting
After installation and whenever it can be assumed
that the pump has been emptied, the pump must be
thoroughly filled with liquid. See fig 15.
For ACE Generation 3, ACG Generation 6 and ACF
Generation 4 delivered after 1997, the pumps has
been fitted with deaeration plugs making venting of
the shaft seal compartment easy before start-up.
In installations with positive suction pressure: After
opening the inlet and outlet valves, simply open the
deaeration plug a few turns until oil sips out.
Tighten the plug.
In installation with negative suction pressure: After
opening the inlet and outlet valves, remove the
deaeration plug and fill the shaft seal compartment Fig. 15 Filling the pump
with oil. Fit and tighten the plug. See fig. 16.
Note! Not applicable on LPQ/ABQ.
Deaeration
plug
Deaeration
Make sure the prime mover is locked out plug
! and can not be started accidentally.
ACE
Rotate the shaft by hand while filling the pump, to Deaeration
ensure that the rotor bores and the shaft seal cavity plug
is filled. On the smaller pumps: (LPD, ACD, ACE,
ACG/UCG), this is done by rotating the fan on the
electric motor after removing the fan cover.
ACG
Do not forget to fit the motor fan cover again
! before making start of motor possible.
IMO AB
Deaeration plug
On the ACF/UCF, LPQ and ABQ pumps, the pump
can be turned using the shaft coupling. If the suction
pipe cannot be completely filled, it is important to
ensure that the trapped air is evacuated without any
pressure build up. (See fig. 8 Deaeration).
ACF
ATTENTION
Starting a dry pump is likely to cause
damage, especially to the shaft seal.
Fig. 16 Deaeration plugs
Direction of rotation
When the pump is ready to be started, switch the
motor briefly on and off and check that the drive
motor rotates in the correct direction as indicated by
the rotation arrow.
The arrow is placed on different spots depending on

the pump series.
ATTENTION
Don't mix up with arrow for inlet and outlet!
Fig. 17 Direction of rotation

Starting 3. Turn the upper screw and continue to reduce the
Check that all valves necessary for the operation are noise level. (If turned too much the noise will
fully opened in both discharge and suction lines. increase again).
The first time, the pump should be started with the 4. Repeat item 2. and 3. in order to achieve the
adjusting spindle of the pressure relief valve tight- lowest possible noise level.
ened to half of the available turns (the valve setting
Setting of tuning of the ACG/UCG and ACF/UCF:
is increased when the spindle is turned clockwise).
By monitoring the pressure gauge it can be deter- 1. Before starting the setting, check that the setting
mined when the suction line is primed and the screw (8 mm: ACG/UCG, 12 mm: ACF/UCF,
pump begins to work. Should the pump not operate socket head cap screw on the discharge side) are
normally soon after start, stop the pump within half closed.
a minute. Start again after about 3-5 minutes (the 2. Turn the screw CCW until the noise level be-
shaft seal must have time to cool off) and run for comes the lowest (if turned too much the noise
half a minute. This procedure may need to be will increase again).
repeated a couple of times if the suction line is
Once set, the tuning needs no further adjustment,
extremely long. Should the pump still not work, it
providing the operating conditions stay the same.
must be assumed there is a problem in the system
that needs to be remedied. Check the suction line NOTE: It´ s not possible to accidentally turn the
calculation on page 5 and/or see ”Trouble shoot- tuning spindle too far.
ing”, page 10.
If operating temperature exceeds 60°C
Pumps with external ball bearing including ! (149°F), appropriate measures to avoid
! grease nipple, must be regreased after one skin contact shall be provided.
hour of running, while the pump is
operating
Use hearing protections whenever high
! noise can be expected from pump, motor
Setting the pressure relief valve and/or environment.
The setting of the opening pressure is made as
follows: Tighten the valve spindle by rotating
clockwise to the maximum extent. The system
pressure is regulated by throttling to required value.
The pressure relief valve is eased until the pressure
is just beginning to decrease by turning the spindle
CCW. The valve is now preset for desired opening
pressure. Open the throttling valve entirely.
NOTE: The set screw on LPD is hidden behind a
plate.
Adjusting the tuning

The tuning adjustment, which is a standard feature
on ACF/UCF and LPQ (option on ACG/UCG and
ABQ) pumps, is a device for minimizing the effects Fig. 18 Adjusting the tuning
of dissolved and free air in lube oil systems. The
tuning principle is described in the Product Descrip-
tion.
The tuning should be adjusted while the pump is
working under normal operating conditions. This is
done by turning the tuning spindle with an Allen
key (size 8 mm for ACG/UCG , 12 mm for ACF/
UCF and LPQ ) to a position where the noise level
comes to a minimum. On a double acting pump like
the LPQ pump, there are two tuning valves, which
must be adjusted individually.
Setting of tuning of the LPQ:
1. Before starting the setting check that both setting
screws (8 mm socket head cap screw on the
discharge side) are closed.
2. Turn the lower screw until the noise level obtains
a minimum.(If turned too much the noise will
increase again).

Trouble shooting
Problem Cause What to do
Wrong direction of rotation - Electric cables to motor wrongly Reverse the terminal connection
connected. on electric motor.
Connecting and discon-

necting of electric cables
must be done only by
personnel authorized to
do such work.
The pump cannot be primed - Wrong direction of rotation. See above.

- Suction line is not open or Check all components in suction
pressure drop in the suction line line. The inlet condition should
is too high. be checked with a vacuum
gauge at the pump inlet.
- Major air leakage into the Check the suction line.
suction line.
- The pump cannot evacuate the See the chapter on Deaeration
air through the discharge line (see page 5).
due to excessive counter
pressure.
No flow - The pump is not primed. See above.
- The pressure relief valve is set Readjust the pressure relief
below the counter pressure. valve to a value above counter
pressure.
Flow too low - The pressure relief valve is set Readjust the pressure relief
too low (Discharge pressure also valve
low).
- Something is restricting the flow Check all components in the
in the suction line. (This would suction line (strainers, valves
usually cause noise). etc.).
- The pumped liquid contains a See the chapter on Noise and
significant amount of com Vibration. ( Page 11).
pressible gas, such as free air.
(This would usually cause
noise).
Pressure too low - The pressure relief valve is set Readjust the pressure relief
too low. valve.
- Counter pressure in the dis- Check the components in the
charge line is too low due to a discharge line inclusive the
major leakage. recipients.
- The valve piston is stuck in open Check the valve. See Mainte-
position. nance and Service instruction for
respective pump.
- Something is restricting the flow Check all components in the
in the suction line. (This would suction line (strainers, valves
usually cause noise). etc.).
- The pumped liquid contains a See the chapter on Noise and
significant amount of com- Vibration. ( Page 11).
pressible gas, such as free air.
(This would usually cause
noise).
- A too small pump has been Contact your IMO AB
chosen. representative.

Disturbance Cause What to do
Pressure too high - The pressure relief valve is set Readjust the pressure relief valve.
too high.
- The oil is too cold (or has higher Reduce the pressure setting until
viscosity than anticipated). operational temperature has been
reached.
- Counter pressure in the dis- Check the discharge line.

charge line is too high.
Drive motor difficult to start - Counter pressure too high. See above: Pressure too high.
or tends to stop by tripping
the motor overload relay - Liquid too cold. Readjust the pressure relief valve
to a lower value. Thus the power
consumption for the pumping is
relieved and overloading due to
the high viscosity may be
avoided. When the liquid has
reached normal temperature and
thus flows easily, the relief valve
is reset to normal pressure.
- Motor is undersized for the Check the motor.

prevailing conditions.
- Electrical power supply faulty. Check the motor and motor

connection.
- Motor overload relay set too low Readjust or replace the relay.
or is faulty.
- Incorrect setting of Y/D starter. Readjust the setting of the start-

ing sequence. The time before the
motor overload relay is tripped
should not exceed 10-15 seconds.
Noise and vibrations - The flow to the pump is insuffi- See chapter: The flow is too low.
cient.
Monitor the pump - Insufficient support of pipe Check for pipe vibrations in the
! function and shut down work. pump connections. Check that
if any sign of mal- the pipes are sufficiently
function is noticed. clamped.
- Bad alignment Check alignment, see page 4.
- Air leakage into the suction line. Check the suction line for air
leakage.
- Free air in the liquid or gas For pumps with Tuning:

cavitation. Adjust the Tuning. If this does
not help or for pumps without
Tuning: Contact your IMO
representative or IMO service
dept.
- Faulty electrical supply. Check all three phases of the

supply.

Screw pumps
A Member of the
COLFAX PUMP GROUP
ACE3
Maintenance and Service
Instruction
This instruction is valid for all ACE pump models shown on page 2
Contents Page
List of components 2
Exploded view 3
Ordering code/Service intervals 4
Sectional view 5
Useful tools/Shaft seal-assembly drawing 6
Dismantling/reassembly 7
Pressure relief valve/SealGuard 11
ACE 0620GB
June 2000
Before commencing any work, read this instruction carefully! Failure to comply with
! these instructions may cause damage and personal injury!
For more information about the pumps identification code, technical data and performance we refer to the
ACE Product description. For more information about the pumps installation, Start-up and trouble shooting
we refer to the IMO Installation and Start-up instruction for Low Pressure Pumps.
List of components
Valid for all pumps in sizes: ACE 025/032/038 Rotor diameter and Generation: L3/K3/N3
With version codes: N V B P Also valid for pump options: A101
T The version code is composed of the letters in the 4 columns.
Q Example of pump designations std: ACE 025L3 NTBP;
option: ACE 038N3 NVBP A101
Components included in spare parts sets:
Pos Denomination Q-ty G011 G012 G050 G053 G054 G057 G070 G082 Notes Explanations:
no
1010 Power rotor 1 x (x)
1020 Power rotor 1 x x G011: Rotor set
113 Key 1 x x x
122 Ball bearing 1 x x x G012: Rotor set
125 Secondary seal 1 x x x x 1
201 Idler rotor 2 x (x) G050: Shaft seal
202 Idler rotor 2 x x
351 Balancing bush 1 x x x G053: Minor kit
401 Pump body 1
416 Suction flange 1 G054: Major kit
417 Screw 8
418 Gasket to 1 x x x G057: Joint kit
suction flange
423 Gasket to 1 x x x G070: Valve element
discharge flange
427 Discharge flange 1 G082: Seal Guard kit
440 Return valve 1
451 Screw 4 Notes:
453 Screw 4 1) Version NTBP
462 Plug 1 and NQBP
462A Sealing washer 1 x x x 2) Version NQBP
463 Plug 1 only
463A Sealing washer 1 x x x 3) Including
501 Front cover 1 Gasgenerator
506 Gasket 1 x x x
509 Shaft seal 1 x x x
537 Deaeration plug 2
537A Washer 2 x x x
551 Rear cover 1
556 Gasket 1 x x x
557 Plug 1
557A Washer 1 x x x
605 O-ring 1 x x x x
608 Valve spindle 1 x x
608A Tension pin 1 x x
6120 Set screw 1 x x
613 Pin 1 x x
614 Valve piston 1 x x
615 Valve spring 1 x x
7310 Compl. Seal 1 x 2,3
Guard
732 Gas generator 1 x 2
ACE 0620GB 2
June 2000
Exploded view
202
1020
113
351
122
509
462
462A
417 416
418
427
xVxx
453
423
xTxx
xQxx
551
537 556
537A
(608A)
451 463 463A 401
440 (605)
506 (608)
537A 537
(6120)
(613)
557A 557 (615)
(614)
125 501 7310
732
xTxx, xQxx xQxx
xQxx
Fig. 1
All work carried out on the pump has to be When handling liquids which may involve
! performed in such a manner that risks for ! fire hazards appropriate precautions to
personal injury are observed! avoid danger are to be taken.
When handling liquids that may harm skin In case of failure for a system with elevat-
! use gloves and/or protective clothing. ! ing pressure fluid jets may cause injury
and/or damage.
Before any maintenance work, ensure that
! the driver is deenergized and the pump Oil leakage may make the floor slippery
hydraulically isolated. ! and cause personal injury.
Connecting and disconnecting of electric

cables must be done only by personnel
authorized to do such work.
3 ACE 0620GB
June 2000
Ordering code
Part numbers for pump size
Item Spare Parts sets 025 032 038 Recommendation:
For maintenance the following spare
G012 Rotor set CW-rotation (std) part sets are recommended:
Low lead-L3 190486 190485 –
Low lead-K3 – – 190482 Set: To be used:
Normal lead-N3 190487 190484 190483 G057 Joint kit
G011 Rotor set CCW-rotation For dismantling the pump.
Normal lead-N3 190492 190491 190488
G050 Shaft seal-xVxx 189964 189964 189964 G053 Minor kit
Shaft seal-xTxx 190495 190495 190497 For service.
Shaft seal-xQxx 190495 190495 190497
G054 Major kit
G053 Minor kit-xVxx 190501 190710 190500 For repair after damage or greater
Minor kit-xTxx 190503 190712 190499 wear.
Minor kit-xQxx 190503 190712 190499
G054 Major kit=G012(G011)+G053+G070
Ordering example:
G057 Joint kit-xVxx 190525 190714 190522 For IMO-pump ACE 032N3 NVBP,
Joint kit-xTxx 190524 190713 190523 serial number 456789:
Joint kit-xQxx 190524 190713 190523 Shaft seal pos G050 p/n 189964
G070 Valve element 189873 189873 189873 Valve element pos G070 p/n 189873
G082 Sealguard-kit xQxx 190526 190526 190527
125 Secondary seal xTxx, xQxx 190469 190469 190468
732 Gas generator xQxx 190530 190530 190530
Service intervals Inspection of shaft seal

The intervals for inspection and replacement of wear Excessively leaking shaft seals (more than 10 drops
parts vary greatly with the properties of the pumped per hour) should be changed without delay, as the
liquid and can only be determined by experience. leakage normally will grow worse and cause addi-
Pumping liquid which contains abrasive materials, tional damage.
or liquid that is corrosive, will significantly reduce In installations where unplanned shut downs must
service life and call for shorter service intervals. be avoided, it is advisable to dismantle the pump for
Wear will normally show as unnormal: a thorough inspection and thereby change out shaft
• Vibration seal and ball bearing, every three years as a max
period.
• Noise It is recommended always to have the spares in-
• Loss of capacity cluded in minor spare part kit available.
• Reduction in flow/pressure
• Leakage Inspection of rotors
A quick inspection of the idler rotors can be made
If the pumps operating temperature exceeds simply by removing the rear cover. Note that the
! 60°C let the pump cool off before any service, driver must be deenergized and the pump hydrauli-
maintenance or dismantling work is com- cally isolated before the rear cover is removed.
menced to avoid burn injury. If a more thorough investigation is needed, proceed
as under ”Dismantling/Reassembly”.
ACE 0620GB 4
June 2000
Sectional view
125 (xTxx, xQxx)
C-C E-E
463 463A
732
7310
537 537A
(xQxx)
Fig. 2
5 ACE 0620GB
June 2000
Useful tools
d
Allen key Fine Oil can

5 mm and emery
3 mm Mounting tool kit
D
Plastic D= 25,5 mm Screw
Screw mallet driver
spanner
16 mm
Puller
Tool 1 Tool 2
Sliding calliper
For dimension and material,
please contact IMO AB Service.
Fig. 3
Shaft seal - assembly drawing

Shaft seal G050 (509)
Seat slot
S2 S6 S4 S8
S7 S1 Version code xVxx
Front S1 Seat
cover S2 O-ring
retaining S4 Seal ring
tab S6 O-ring
S7 Spring unit
S8 Stop screw
Seat retaining lug
Stationary member Rotating member
S5 S8 Version code xTxx

S3 S2 S1 S4 S7 S6 S1 Seat
S2 O-ring
Seat slot
S3 Retainer
S4 Seal ring
S5 Carrier
S6 O-ring
S7 Spring unit
S8 Stop screw
Retainer lug
+ Secondary seal 125
Stationary member Rotating member
Version code xQxx
S4, S7 is one unit
xTxx + Complete
SealGuard 7310
Fig. 4
ACE 0620GB 6
June 2000
Dismantling
B.
A. OFF ON
• Turn the electricity OFF.
• Close the valves.

• Remove the pump
from the system.
ATTENTION
Use appropriate vessels to collect oil spill- • Note the position of the shaft coupling.
age when removing and opening the pump.
• Release the stop screw.
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
C. D.
113
• Remove the shaft • Remove the key 113.

coupling.
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
E. F. 1020
451
5011
• Remove the • Remove the front cover 501 and power

screws 451. rotor 1020.
Fig. 9 Fig. 10
7 ACE 0620GB
June 2000
G. H. xTxx and xQxx
501 125
501
1020
• Separate the front

cover 501 and the
power rotor 1020.
• Remove the secondary seal 125 with a
suitable screw driver.
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
I. J. xVxx
xTxx
xQxx
501
xVxx
• Place the front cover 501 on a pair of

wooden pieces.
• Press out the shaft seal, stationary member
• Loosen the shaft seal rotating member.
with a suitable tool.
Fig. 13 Fig. 14
K. xTxx and xQxx L. 202

Rotating
Member
• Insert two suitable

screw drivers in the
carrier S5 slots and
gently push the
rotating member
S4, S7 off the rotor
shaft.
S8 S5
• Loosen the two
stop screws S8
(3 mm Allen key)
on the carrier S5 • Remove and inspect the
and pull it off. idler rotors 202.
Fig. 15 Fig. 16
ACE 0620GB 8
June 2000
Reassembly
B.
A. • Un-pack a new shaft seal 509.
202
S8
xVxx xTxx, xQxx S8
S6 S6
S4 S5
401
• Lubricate S4,S7
the idler rotors 202 • Check that the O-ring S6 is in place.
and fit them into the pump body 401.
Fig. 17 Fig. 18
Oil can
C. xVxx D. xTxx and xQxx
S5 Emery
122
• Polish the power rotor shaft
1020 with a fine emery and oil.
• Fit the carrier S5 tight against the
ball bearing. Make sure the carrier
is not fitted upside down.
Rotating
• Firmly tight the two stop screws S8. member
• Lubricate the O-ring S6 in the rotat-
ing member with oil.
• Polish the power rotor shaft
• Press the rotating member S4, S7
1020 with a fine emery and oil.
gently on to the rotor shaft and make
• Fit the rotating member above sure the driving lugs enters the slots
the ball bearing 122 and lock it in the carrier S5.
with its stop screws S8.
Fig. 19 Fig. 20
E. F. xTxx and xQxx
1020
Tool 1 1 2 Tool 2
125
401 • Press the Secondary
seal 125 in place with
a suitable tool in two
steps as shown. Use a
column drill machine
as a press tool.
NOTE! 501
Tool nr 2 has
one end for sizes
025, 032 and one
• Insert the Power rotor 1020 into the pump
body 401. end for size 038
Fig. 21 Fig. 22
9 ACE 0620GB
June 2000
G. xVxx H. xTxx and xQxx Tool 1
Tool 1
S1
• Fit the spring unit S7 in place. • Fit the retainer S3 S2
Note the position for the Seat S1 in place. Note the
slots and lugs. position for the S3
S2 501
(See fig 4.) retainer lugs and
• Lubricate the O-ring S7 cover slots.
501 (See fig 4.)
S2 and put it on the
seat S1. Fit the seat • Lubricate the
S1 on top of the O-ring S2 and
spring unit. Watch put it on the
position of the Seat seat S1. Fit the seat S1
slots and lugs. on top of the retainer.
(See fig 4.) Watch the position of the seat
• Press the seat gently into the recess in the slots and lugs. (See fig 4.)
front cover 501 with a suitable tool as • Press the seat gently into the recess in the
shown. front cover 501 with a suitable tool as shown.
• Turn the front cover 501 up-side down. The • Turn the front cover 501 up-side down. The
seat shall now remain in the cover. seat shall now remain in the cover.
Fig. 23 Fig. 24
I. J.
451
501
506 • Fit the screws

451.
• Tight them crosswise,
step by step to avoid
deformation on bearing
• Replace the gasket outer ring and seal
506. damages.
• Carefully fit the • Turn the shaft to check
Front cover 501 on that it moves without
the pump. too much force.
Fig. 25 Fig. 26
K. L.
• Press on the shaft coupling
to its original position.
• Tighten the stop screw.
• Install the pump

back into the
113 system and proceed
according to in-
structions under
• Fit the key 113 back in place. ”Start-up” in the
Installation manual.
Fig. 27 Fig. 28
ACE 0620GB 10
June 2000
453
Pressure relief valve
551
ATTENTION
Spring tension.
• Release spring tension by turning set screw 6120 612

6120
CCW as much as possible. 605
• Loosen and remove the screws 453.

• Separate the valve element from the rear cover
551.
556
• If necessary, replace the gasket 556 and the
O-ring 605.
• Reassemble the parts in reverse order. Be careful
to tighten the screws 453 crosswise.
• Readjust the valve pressure according to the
”Installation and Start-up Instruction for IMO Fig. 29
Low pressure pumps”.
SealGuard
Version code N Q B P
Recharging
1) Disconnect the pipe connector (4) from the ATTENTION 9
0 12
6
1 3
dispenser (2). Remove the check valve (3). The SealGuard can be
readjusted or switched off
2) Remove the cover disk (10). Remove the gas Gas generator
during operation.
generator (9) from the dispenser (2) with a 21 10
Depending on temperature
mm socket. Dispose the generator in the recyc-
and setting, it can take from 9
ling system for batteries, where available. Push
hours to a couple of days
the piston to its ”filled” position, and fill the
after starting, until oil is 2
dispenser with high-temperature resistant engine
being dispensed.
oil. Fit the check valve (3) and the connector (4)
to the dispenser.
1
3) Feed oil into the hose (5) and seal compartment,
For more information about
for example with an oil-filled grease gun. Recon-
SealGuard, read the Installa-
nect the hose (5) to the connector (4). 3
tion and start-up Instruction
4) Fit a new gas generator (9) to the dispenser (2). for SealGuard. 4
Tighten with approx. 2 Nm. Clip on the cover
disk (10). Note!
Must be open
5) Turn the gas generator set knob (3 mm Allen
key) to no. 6 which will make the oil last for
about 3 months.
5
NOTE!
For longer periods of stand-by, the gas gene-
rator set-knob could be set to zero to avoid
unnecessary oil consumption. 8 7
6
Keep away from open fire when

!
removing the gas generator.
Fig. 30
11 ACE 0620GB
June 2000
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER
Instruction Manual
TM
for VESTA MX
Table of contents for instruction manual
1. General Description......................................................................................... 1
2. Installation Space Requirements ..................................................................... 2
3. Storage............................................................................................................. 2
4. Mounting and Installation ............................................................................... 2
5. Connecting the Heat Exchanger ...................................................................... 3
6. Operation ......................................................................................................... 3
7. Conservation during shut down periods .......................................................... 4
8. Maintenance and Cleaning .............................................................................. 4
9. Dismantling and reassembling of the tube section .......................................... 5
10. Safety measures ............................................................................................... 5
11. Spare Parts ....................................................................................................... 6
Appendix:
- Spare Parts Drawing
- Dimensional Drawing
1. General Description
Aalborg Industries' Vesta MX heat exchangers are of the shell and tube type with
u-tubes.
The Vesta MX heaters range from 0,5 m² to 60 m² heating surface with design
pressures 16 or 30 BAR.
Other capacities may be manufactured at request.
All heaters may be delivered as immersion or outflow heaters for insertion in
tanks.
Vesta MX heat exchangers are primarily used as fuel oil, lubrication oil, or water
heaters (JCW).
The heating media used is either steam, hot water or thermal oil.
Safety valve, thermometer, and pressure gauge may be mounted on a standard

outlet tube (optional).
Regulating equipment for either oil, steam or water is optional.
Vesta MX heat exchangers have been type approved by all major classification
societies.
2. Installation Space Requirements

2.1. Space allowance
When mounting the heater sufficient space must be allowed for withdrawal of
the tube insert for cleaning, inspection, or replacement purposes.
Please refer to dimensional drawing for withdrawal space requirements.
2.2. Installation surface

The heater must be placed on a level and stable surface.
3. Storage
3.1. Damp and humidity
Store the heater only in a dry storage room before installation. If the room is
damp the heater must be isolated with bags of silica gel. To avoid damage it is
recommended the heater be stored in the original packaging.
3.2. Hydrostatic testing

All Aalborg Industries heat exchangers have undergone hydrostatic pressure test-
ing before delivery. The testing fluid used contains a certain amount of corrosion
protection (Castrol Rustilo Aqua 2); hence no further actions regarding storage
are required before installation.
3.3. Extended storage

When heat exchangers are to be kept in storage for an extended period of time
we recommend Castrol Rustilo Aqua 2 be used as protection against corrosion.
4. Mounting and Installation

The heat exchanger is designed for vertical or horizontal installations.
In case of horizontal installation, the inlet pipe and media outlet pipe must face
upwards.
Instruction manual for heat exchanger type VESTATM MX 2/8

Manufactured in Aalborg, Denmark
APR. 2001, rev. 3 – Project specification deleted. OKT 2002, rev. 4 – Reference to steam replaced with
heating media. DEC 2005 T30 series torque added.
C:\Documents and Settings\LJW\바탕 화면\F.O SUPPLY UNIT 업무 관련 사항\MANUAL\3.HEATER_1_2.doc
If the heater is placed vertically the inlet and outlet tubes as well as the media
inlet must be at the bottom and the heater must be equipped with an air escape
screw at the top end.
The steam regulator (optional) must always be placed horizontally.
The steam trap (optional) should be mounted as close to the condensate outlet as
possible and somewhat lower. The steam trap is always to be placed horizontally.
Place the heater on the surface and drill the holes for the foundation bolts. Place
the bolts into the holes and tighten up at one end, while the other is left suffi-
ciently loose to allow for movement caused by thermal expansion. The bolts at
the expansion end must be secured with counter nuts.
5. Connecting the Heat Exchanger

5.1. Preparation and pipe connection of the heat exchanger
Remove all plugs and cover flanges before connecting the heater. Make sure
sand and other impurities are removed from all connections. Set up the pipe con-
nections and make sure that no forces are transferred to the heat exchanger.
6. Operation
6.1. Commissioning
Before start-up it is important to make sure that all connections are securely
tightened.
Before start-up it is equally important that the heater is filled 100% with liquid
and that all connecting pipes are thoroughly air-vented.
NOTE: Remember to retighten the air ventilation plug.
6.2. Initial adjustments

The safety valve must be adjusted to maximum design pressure or lower.
6.3. Initial start-up

IMPORTANT: Fluid flow through the heat exchanger must be established be-
fore the heating medium is applied.
Tighten all main flange bolts according to below schedule. Operate the heater for
one hour, stop, and retighten all bolts according to schedule.
Heater main flange bolts tightening schedule (dry & smooth values) – T16 types
No bolts Size Torque [Nm] Tightening schedule
MX10 8 M16 50 14725836
MX15 8 M20 83 14725836
MX20 12 M20 79 1 7 11 4 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8

MX25 12 M24 137 1 7 11 4 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8

MX30 12 M24 186 1 7 11 4 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8
MX40 16 M27 245 1 9 5 13 8 16 12 4 15 7 3 11 6 14 10 2
Heater main flange bolts tightening schedule (dry & smooth values) – T30 types
No bolts Size Torque [Nm] Tightening schedule
MX15 8 M16 164 14725836
MX20 12 M20 158 1 7 11 4 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8
MX25 12 M20 234 1 7 11 4 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8
Always use a torque wrench when tightening the flange bolts.
Both sides of the heater must be carefully vented and the circuits carefully in-
spected for leakage during the whole start-up period.
6.4. Output
The output of the heater is subject to the supply of heating media at the inlet
steam valve. The steam pressure/heating media temperature applied, is to be ac-
cording to heater size calculation.
The output is furthermore subject to correct type of steam trap being used. Cor-
rect layout of the condensate system avoids negative effect of counter pressure.
7. Conservation during shut down periods

Corrosion occurrences in shut down periods are mainly caused by oxygen. The
corrosion occurs if non-distilled or alkaline water remains in the heat exchanger.
However, even when fully emptied, heaters are exposed to corrosion caused by
water residues or condensation. Hence, heaters out of service should be protected
against corrosion.
If the heater is out of service for an extended period of time – in particular during
winter seasons with frost – it must be carefully emptied. Open the air escape
valve and check for clogging.
8. Maintenance and Cleaning

8.1. Regular cleaning periods
The heater should be cleaned regularly every six months by removing the tube
insert or at any time there is a decrease in output not related to other causes.
Note: The heat exchanger must be emptied before removing the tube section.
Check if any deposits have collected on the tubes.

8.2. Cleaning of tubes

Cleaning of the tube system from the outside is carried out after removing the
tube insert using a sharp liquid jet (citric acid or water).
Cleaning of the tube system from the inside is carried out after removing the
cover by flushing the tubes with e.g. citric acid.
8.3. Heavy contamination

If the heater is heavily contaminated with carbon deposits Aalborg Industries
recommends the heater chemically cleaned with a carbon remover.
After cleaning has been completed the heater must be flushed carefully with
fresh water and allowed to dry afterwards.
8.4. Checking the safety valves

Once every year the safety valve must be checked for correct set point.
9. Dismantling and reassembling of the tube

section
The tube section is inserted into the heater and fastened tightly between the shell
flange and the end flange. The back end of the tube section is not fixed.
The primary connection for heating media must be dismantled before disman-
tling the tube section for inspection, cleaning, etc. The tube flange has threaded
holes for dismantling screws and for mounting eyebolts for lifting devices.
Gasket surfaces are to be cleaned and protected against damage. New gaskets are
to be fitted every time the flange connection has been dismantled.
IMPORTANT: Fluid flow through the heat exchanger must be established be-
fore the heating medium is applied.
Tighten all main flange bolts according to below schedule. Operate the heater for
one hour, stop, and retighten all bolts according to the schedule on page 3.
A pressure test should be carried out to prove tight joints.
Note: Pressure testing to be carried out only with insert mounted in shell.
Both sides of the heater must be carefully vented and the circuits carefully in-
spected for leakage during the whole start-up period.
10. Safety measures

During installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance, the following
measures must be observed:
10.1. Installation
10.1.1. Lifting
When lifting the heat exchanger, following methods are allowed:

a) Two or four point lifting with straps and shackles in the holes or lifting lugs
on the mounting brackets.
b) Two point lifting with wide support straps around the heater body.
Other ways of lifting the heat exchanger may damage it or cause risk of dropping
it.
10.1.2. Connecting the flanges

It is important that the connecting pipes are arranged in such a way, that no
forces other than short leg thermal expansion forces are transferred to the heater.
Pipe supports are to be placed adjacent to the nozzle flange connection, and any
vibrations in the system must be sufficiently damped. Excess force may cause
the nozzle weld to crack, with subsequent leakage of the fluid.
When tightening the bolts on the nozzle flanges, it is important that the applied
force corresponds to the gasket material used. If this is not observed, there is a
risk of leakage or gasket blow out. Flange connections which are not insulated
after installation should be fitted with blow out guards/screens.
10.1.3. Insulation
The heat exchangers are delivered with thermal insulation according to the scope
of supply stated in the contract. The main flanges are not insulated, since the
class stamps are placed on the rim of the flanges, neither are branch pipes, noz-
zles or connecting flanges, since this would hamper the installation process. In-
sulation of these parts should be completed during the commissioning phase,
Aalborg Industries recommend an insulation thickness of 50 mm mineral wool or
equivalent heat barrier. Any insulation delivered with the heat exchanger is de-
signed for a maximum surface temperature of 60°C at engine room conditions,
so no special warnings of hot surfaces is required.
10.2. Operation & maintenance
10.2.1. High pressure

The heat exchanger is a part of a large pressurised system, and does as such not
carry an individual warning sign. This is considered unnecessary, since there are
no quick opening devices on the pressure part and since safety valves and valves
for drain and venting must be installed with discharge piping.
10.2.2. Maintenance
During disassembly, inspection, reassembly and testing it is important that safety
measures of this manual as well as the ships safety procedures are observed. The
fluids in the systems can be both hot and flammable as well as posing a health
risk if ingested. Therefore it is important that proper depressurising, isolation and
draining is performed, as well as spillage control during disassembly and clean-
ing. Procedures for reassembly must be followed and the mandatory pressure test
be carried out with great care. Insulation and splash guards must be fitted during
recommissioning.

11. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts please state the serial number of the heat exchanger
(located on the nameplate).
For spare parts and further information please contact Aalborg Industries.

Picture for reference only. For actual
scope of supply refer to the attachments
Rev. 00 OM.29
16/03/07
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW page 2
2. CAUTIONS & WARNINGS FOR HS&E HAZARDS page 3
3. INTRODUCTION page 4
4. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FILTERING SET page 5
5. FILTER SECTIONAL DRAWING WITH PARTS LIST page 7
6. INSTALLATION OF THE FILTERING SET page 9
6.A INSTALLATION SCHEME – TYPICAL page 12
7. START-UP page 13
8. OPERATION page 15
8.A FILTRATION PHASE page 15
8.B FILTRATION AND CLEANING PHASE page 16
8.C LOCAL CONTROL PANEL page 18
9 MAINTENANCE page 19
10 INSPECTION AND CLEANING OF THE FILTERING UNIT page 20
10.A SELF-CLEANING FILTERING ELEMENT page 21
10.B STATIC FILTERING ELEMENT page 23
10.C CHANGE-OVER VALVE page 24
11 TROUBLESHOOTING page 25
12 SPARE PARTS page 26
Filtrex assumes no liability for any mistakes by improper use of the product.
We reserve the right to change this description without prior notice.
OM.29
Rev. 00 DACT Automatic Filter Page 1 of 26
16/03/07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. OVERVIEW
IMPORTANT!
In order to have the maximum benefit from your Filter, we suggest that you read through
this manual’s sections concerning installation and operation prior to the product’s
installation, and when the product is operated or serviced. Do not hesitate to contact
Filtrex S.r.l. or our local branch for any further technical information you may require.
This manual contains information on the erection, operation, and maintenance of the
Filter based on the specifications of the unit when delivered from our factory. In case
post-delivery alterations have been made to the unit, we recommend that you contact
Filtrex S.r.l. or our local branch for an updated manual.
This manual makes reference to other pieces of literature, such as schematics and
drawings that are added to the manual as needed depending on the filter parameters
and configuration.
When ordering spare parts or requesting technical assistance, always state the serial
number of the Filter (see page I of this manual and name plate on unit).
Unless special permission has been granted by Filtrex S.r.l. do not attempt to repair or
dismantle the Filter or any of its components within the warranty period of the unit (with
exception of any dismantling necessary for the replacement of filter element). Failure to
seek the said permission will cause the guarantee on the said parts to be void!
Filtrex S.r.l. product liability does not cover technical modifications to the filter unit
unless Filtrex S.r.l. in writing has accepted such extension of liability.
CONVENTIONAL SIGNS USED IN THIS MANUAL:
A warning indicates either potential for malfunction

of the equipment or of the system and tells you
WARNING! how to avoid the problem.
A danger indicates a potential for damage to the

DANGER! equipment, to the system or personal injury.
STOP
A stop indicates that the filter shall be put out of
STOP! service.
OM.29
2. CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS FOR HS&E HAZARDS
• The Filter does not require to be inspected daily.
• Fluid drained very often contain harmful substances that must not be drained to
ordinary sewers, but be collected in a special container and disposed of in
accordance with local regulations for chemical waste.
WARNING
Check to be sure the available electrical power matches the
voltage, phase and cycle requirements of the electric motor and
automatic control panel. Damage may occur if improperly
connected.
WARNING
Do not expose the pressure equipment to working pressure over
the Design Pressure.
Monitoring of the internal inlet pressure shall be considered by
the user.
WARNING
In order to avoid opening the cover when the filter is pressurized,
the user shall install on the inlet pipeline to the Filter,
downstream of any isolation valve, a pressure indicator.
WARNING
Do not expose the filter to working temperature over the Design
Temperature, otherwise it might be damaged. Monitoring of the
working temperature shall be considered by the user.
DANGER
Due to working temperature, pressure equipment insulation may
be considered by the user.
DANGER
When installing the filter, make sure that any oil or fuel which
leaks due to improper handling cannot result in a fire or injury.
OM.29
3. INTRODUCTION
In many machining plants and for the trouble-free operation of all internal combustion
engines the removal of contaminants from a fluid process stream makes that fluid more
valuable and increases product yields. A DACT filter placed in a strategic location can
eliminate many costly problems, protecting moving parts from wear and also acting as a
monitor for the whole circuit.
The features of the DACT system are:

- Resolves the existing problems:
It greatly improves the quality of the oil being delivered to the engine’s moving parts
(crankshafts, bearings, cylinder’s liners, piston’s rings) and other oil wetted parts in
the equipment, thereby improving their reliability and longevity.
- Enhance the personnel’s life by reducing maintenance activity:
It virtually eliminates the requirements for a routinely planned maintenance on the

engines.
- Improves the engine’s reliability and performance characteristics:
Human factor, and thus error, are completely eliminated since the filter does not need
intervention for twenty-thousand hours, as compared to the few hours of a static filter.
- Minimizes the impact on the environment:
Since there is no need to dispose of used filter cartridges.
- More advantages:
Simple construction and easy maintenance, does not require special tools, possible
emergency cleaning by manual hand wheel, monitoring of the cleaning frequency
with alarm for too short cleaning intervals, low operating costs, compact and
lightweight.
OM.29
4. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FILTERING SET
The special shape of FILTREX DACT filters allows to get a light and efficient continuous
working and ensures a safe and easy replacement of the clogged filtering element. The
DACT filter mainly consists of:
• Two side housings provided with :
a) two main flanged connections, one for the inlet and the other one for the outlet.
The direction of the fluid is marked on the above mentioned flanges.
b) a backwashing nozzle.
c) other connections as requested by the process conditions.
d) a cover fixed to the housing by means of bolting.
e) a heating pocket.
• A filtering element is placed inside each housing with the appropriate filtration
degree, according to the customer’s request; its size has been calculated according
to the design flow rate and normal pressure drop.
• An electric motor with gear reducer for the rotation of the backwashing arm during
the on-condition cleaning of the automatic filtering element.
• A pneumatic actuated valve installed on the backwash line for the automatic
discharge of the impurities during the backwashing phase, complete with solenoid
valve.
• A local control panel, supplied loose and separate from the filter, to monitor and
operate the backwashing cleaning system.
• A common differential pressure indicator with electric contacts.
• A change-over valve, provided with No. six (6) flanges, No. four for the connection
with the two side filters, while the remaining two are connected with the external
circuit. An indicator on the valve body shows the direction of the fluid through the
filtering set. A lever is installed on the valve body for the manual switch of the valve.
• The pressure balancing line complete with manual isolation valve in order to balance
between the two filter housings and to fill the filter in clean condition after a switch
operation for maintenance.
OM.29
• Optional accessories as :
¾ Differential pressure gauge or switch or transmitter
¾ Vent & drain valves
Refer to attached “General Arrangement Drawing” for actual limit of supply.
Other optional accessories are available on request.
OM.29
5. FILTER SECTIONAL DRAWING WITH PARTS LIST
Drawing for reference only
OM.29
SELF-CLEANING FILTER PARTS LIST CHANGE-OVER VALVE PARTS LIST
1. Gear reducer 100. Change-over valve lever
2. Gear shaft 101. Pressure balancing line valve
3. Electric motor 102. Change-over valve flange bolt
4. Thrust bearing flange fixing bolt 103. Commutation indicator
5. Gear reducer flange/cover fixing bolt 107. Change-over valve flange gasket
6. Thrust bearing 108. Change-over valve body side gasket
7. Backwash nozzle gasket 109. Change-over valve plug side gasket
7A. Backwash shaft bushing gasket 110. Lock pin
8. Self-cleaning filter vent plug
BACKWASH VALVE PARTS LIST
9. Self-cleaning filter cover
10. Self-cleaning filter cover bolt 151. Pneumatic actuator
11. Backwash shaft bushing 152. Backwash valve body
12. Filtering element fixing bolt 153. Solenoid valve
13. Self-cleaning filter cover gasket 154. Interconnecting nipple
14. Self-cleaning filter body
15. Self-cleaning filtering element
16. Backwash nozzle
17. Self-cleaning filtering element
gasket
18. Backwash shaft bushing
19. Self-cleaning filter drain plug
20. Backwash line gasket
21. Differential pressure instrument
STATIC FILTER PARTS LIST

50. Static filter cover
51. Static filter vent plug
52. Static filter cover screw
53. Static filter cover gasket
54. Static filtering element upper head
gasket
55. Lock nut
56. Static filtering element upper head
57. Static filtering element
58. Static filtering element lower gasket
59. Static filter body
60. Static filter drain plug
64. Static filter housing gasket
OM.29
6. INSTALLATION OF THE FILTERING SET
To install the filtering set follow these usual operations:
1. Identify the vessel inlet and outlet. Position the vessel in the line so that the fluid
enters the inlet connection in order to perform properly and to avoid damage to the
system.
WARNING
Be sure that sufficient headroom is provided for easy removal of
the internal parts. This require a clear height above the top (refer
to the attached “General Arrangement Drawing”). Clearance for
rigging equipment must also be considered.
2. Connect the filtering unit to the inlet/outlet piping, making sure that all closing means
(nuts, bolts, valves, etc.) are fast tightened. Inlet and Outlet piping should be carefully
aligned to avoid stressing the filter connections during installation. Installation of shut-
off valves on either side of the vessel is recommended so that it can be
independently drained for filtering element change or inspection.
3. Connect all the remaining nozzles provided on the vessel.
WARNING
A vigorous backwash flow is necessary for proper operation of
the filter. It is therefore important to prevent back-pressure by
having a short, vented, free-flowing backwash line with a minimum
of bends, elbows or vertical risers. The backwash line Ø has to be
no smaller than the size indicated in the attached “General
Arrangement Drawing”.
4. Connect power source to the electric motor and all other electrical components
included in the scope of supply (e.g. local panel, solenoid valve, instrumentation,
etc.). It is advisable to use flexible power cable with extra length to allow for filter
cover removal without having to disconnect the motor.
DANGER
Check to be sure the available electrical power matches the
voltage, phase and cycle requirements of the electric motor and
automatic control panel. Damage may occur if improperly
connected.
5. Connect the earthing lug (when provided) to the general earthing system.
OM.29
6. Before start-up of the local control panel assure that the following steps of checks are
performed (refer also to the “ Wiring Diagram” attached):
6.1 Isolate incoming electric power feed to the Local Control Panel.
6.2 Verify that the grounding of the Local Control Panel is connected.
6.3 Put the front panel hand operated “Q” switch in OFF position.
6.4 Open the Local Control Panel front door and check there is no missing
equipment inside.
6.5 Verify that all incoming and outgoing cable connections are properly connected
on the terminal strip and assure isolation and no short circuit.
6.6 Open the fuse holders and check all internal fuses are inside and that are not
blown.
6.7 Close the fuse holders.
6.8 Check that all front panel signal lamps are inside the lamp holder, check the
proper voltage/power and that are not blown, then restore.
6.9 Check the setting of the thermal protection on Circuit Breaker “Q” in accordance
with the Electric Motor data for each filter size..
6.10 Check the setting of the timers KT1 to avoid any incoming false contact from the
Differential Pressure Switch.
6.11 Check the setting of the timers KT2 in accordance with the foreseen backwash
cycle time foreseen on filter size.
6.12 Check the incoming contact on terminal strip 3-4 from the Differential Pressure
Switch is normally open for filter clean.
6.13 Close the Local Control Panel front door.
6.14 Check the upstream electric power feed comply with the values reported on
Local Control Panel data label.
6.15 Feed incoming electric power to the Local Control Panel.
6.16 Put the front panel hand operated “Q” switch in ON position.
6.17 Check that the System ON lamp L1 is lighting and that the filter cleaning lamp
L2 and filter alarm lamp L3 are off.
6.18 Check there is no cumulative alarm reported outside to the User.
6.19 Verify that all the operative conditions on the Backwash Filter are fulfilled.
6.20 Perform a cleaning cycle test by activation of the Start PB on panel front and
check the lighting of the filter cleaning lamp L2.
OM.29
6.21 Check the operation of the filter motor, the opening of the backwash valve, the
effective time of the complete backwash cycle the motor stop and the closure of
the backwash valve at the end of the cycle.
6.22 Perform a simulated cleaning cycle test by closing the contact on the Differential
Pressure Switch of the filter and check that at the end of the cycle time the
motor stop, the backwash valve close and that the filter alarm lamp L3 will light
giving the alarm signal (filter clogged) and the cumulative alarm reported
outside to the User is active.
6.23 Remove the by-pass contact on the Differential Pressure Switch and check the
return on normal condition of the Local Control Panel with no alarms.
6.24 Put the filter with the Local Control Panel into operation.
DANGER
During the installation of the filter, make sure that any oil or fuel
which leaks due to the improper handling cannot result in a fire or
injury.
OM.29
6.A INSTALLATION SCHEME - TYPICAL
Typical installation for DACT filter:
Supply System
Booster System
OM.29
7. START-UP
To start the filtering set follow these usual operations:
1. Check that all valves installed on the vessel nozzles are in the relevant service
position.
2. Energize the electric motor and/or controls.
3. Set the change-over valve at its mid position, both housings in use.
4. Open the vent connection on filter covers.
5. Open the pressure balancing valve.
6. Slowly introduce fluid to be filtered, to ensure the complete filling of the housings and
the complete utilization of the whole filtering surface.
7. Close the vent connection when air is expelled and fluid begins to flow.
WARNING
Before filling up the filter, make sure that all the valves connected
on vessel nozzles are in the relevant service position.
8. Operate the change-over valve to isolate the by-pass (static) filter and to insert the
main (automatic) filter into the operating process condition.
WARNING
During normal operation the pressure balancing valve should be
open, in order to prevent useless stressing of the change-over
valve seals if the by-pass (static) filter is not under pressure.
OM.29
STOP
It is very important to consider that, during this start up phase or
after important works (long time not running period), the filter is
submitted to particularly heavy conditions as it must provide the
elimination of impurities such as lints, piles, metallic slags and/or
STOP
other contaminants that are by chance introduced in the system.
It is therefore important to keep carefully under control the ∆p of
the filter, to prevent the ∆p increase reaching the alarm value
prolonged operation in this mode can result in damage to
downstream components. If the alarm value is reached, the filter
must be taken out of service. Dismantle the filtering element and
clean it (see section “Inspection and cleaning of the filtering
unit”).
WARNING
After start-up phase the status of the filtering element shall be
checked, in order to verify that no damages have been occurred.
OM.29
8. OPERATION
8.A FILTRATION PHASE
The filter works with on-condition back-washing using its own process fluid; the
backwashing fluid is fed back into the circulation tank again.
The fluid enters from the inlet flange (A) and flows through all the sectors of the filtering
element (C) except three (inside-outside filtration). The filtered fluid is collected in
chamber (D) and exits from the outlet flange (B). During this phase the filter operates as
a static filter and the cleaning of the filtering element is not operating; the motor (E) and
nozzle (F) are not operating, the backwash valve (H) is closed. The differential pressure
shown on the indicator (G), due to the accumulation of impurities on the surface of the
filtering element, gradually increases with time until it reaches the set-point value
starting the backwashing phase.
D
E
B
C
G
H
A Drawing for reference only
OM.29
8.B FILTRATION AND CLEANING PHASE
When the differential pressure shown on the indicator (G) reaches the set-point value
the backwashing phase starts. The motor (E) and the nozzle (F) start and the backwash
valve (H) opens.
While all the filtering sectors except three of the filtering element (C) provide the
filtration of the fluid, the sector in front of the nozzle (F) is cleaned by the backwash
flow spilled from the filtered fluid in chamber (D) (outside-inside backwash). The
impurities are carried by the same backwash fluid, through the nozzle (F) to the
backwash outlet nozzle (J). At the end of the backwash set-time the motor (E) stops and
the backwash valve (H) closes, thus returning to static filtration.
D
E
B
C
G
H
A
Drawing for reference only
OM.29
The pressure gradient thus produced (operating pressure with
respect to the free discharge – atmosphere) results in an
extremely efficient cleaning action.
WARNING
For the correct automatic operation of the filter it is mandatory
that the pressure at the outlet is not lower than 2 barg
downstream the filter.
WARNING
In case of clogging alarm during normal operation, it is essential
not to force the filter operation. Continuous and repeated alarm
conditions might cause net deformation with possibility of
contamination of the post-filtered fluid. To solve these situations,
proceed to the failure searching as shown in the Section
TROUBLESHOOTING and replace the filtering elements..
OM.29
8.C LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
The local control panel, supplied with the filtering set, monitors and operates the
backwashing cleaning system.
The controls and signals of the filtering set are located on the front door of the local
panel and mainly consist in:
- Incoming circuit breaker Q
- Push button PB to start manual backwash
- White lamp L1 for circuit ON
- Green light L2 for backwash cycle ON
- Red lamp L3 for cumulative alarm
Refer to the attached “Wiring Diagram” for the following information:
¾ Details of control panel front layout and internal layout with parts list.
¾ Identification of cable size for wiring the electrical components on the filter to the
control panel.
WARNING
Before opening the control panel, cut-off incoming power
supply.
WARNING
In order to ensure correct filter operation, it is absolutely
essential that warning alarms be connected and acted upon at
the installation premises. If the alarms are ignored, the back-
flushing filtration function will be disrupted.
OM.29
9. MAINTENANCE
Even with automatic filters inspection and maintenance must be performed at regular
intervals.
It is extremely important to remember that in spite of an on-condition back-washing the
mesh may become clogged over the course of time, depending on the quality of the
fluid and whether a by-pass treatment unit is installed.
In order to maintain trouble-free operation, the following aspects are to be observed
during maintenance :
9.1 The filter must be switched off for all maintenance work.
9.2 Check filter and connections for leaks.
9.3 Check for the correct rotation of the backwash shaft by means of the gear motor.
After every cleaning make sure that the backwash shaft rotates
freely.
9.4 Carry out a careful visual check of the filtering elements status once a year.
STOP
Should a higher differential pressure occur beforehand, the
filtering element must be checked and, if necessary, cleaned
STOP (refer to section 10 “Inspection and cleaning of the filtering unit”).
Prolonged operation at a differential pressure of 2 bar or more
can result in damage to the filtering element.
9.5 It’s recommended to replace the filtering element after two years operation.
Longer use is also possible if the filtering elements are checked

carefully.
9.6 Replace the gaskets.
It is advisable to replace all the gaskets during any overhaul.
OM.29
10. INSPECTION AND CLEANING OF THE FILTERING UNIT
Refer to section 5 “Filter Sectional drawing with parts list”

For the inspection and cleaning of the filtering element proceed as follows:
10.1 Open (if not already open, see Section “Start-up”) the pressure balancing line
(101) in order to equalize the pressure into the two vessels.
10.2 Exclude the clogged filter acting on the change-over valve lever (100) until the
commutation indicator (103) will indicate the stand-by filter (clean filter), in order to
put it in service and to put out of service the clogged filter.
10.3 Close the pressure balancing line (101).
10.4 Isolate the heating line (*).
10.5 In case of inspection of the change-over valve, open the by-pass line (*) and/or
close the closing devices at the filter inlet and outlet (*) in order to isolate the
filtering unit.
10.6 To proceed with the inspection, refer to the hereafter descriptions.
WARNING
Before dismantling any filter parts and discharging the fluid,
make sure that the filter is not pressurized.
(*) If existing
OM.29
10.A SELF-CLEANING FILTERING ELEMENT
For ordinary maintenance operations the following tools are required :

- Fork wrench
- T Socket head screw
For disassembling procedure please refer to the pictures on the next page.
10.A1 Empty the filter removing the drain plug (19) located on the bottom of the vessel.
10.A2 Remove the electric motor / gear reducer assembly unscrewing the bolts (5)
(picture no. 1) and put in a safe and clean area (picture no. 2).
10.A3 Remove the filter cover bolts (10) and screw two of them in the threaded holes
positioned on the same cover bolts circle in order to slightly raise the filter cover
(9) (picture no. 3).
10.A4 Lift the cover / filtering element assembly by hands (picture no. 4), or for big filter
size, provide an adequate lifting device and place it in a safe and clean area,
paying attention that the backwash nozzle (16) will not be raised together with the
cover / filtering element assembly (picture no. 5).
WARNING
Take care not to damage the filtering element (15), the backwash
nozzle (16) and the gaskets (13) and (17).
10.A5 Remove the fixing bolts (12) of the filtering element (15) (picture no. 6).
10.A6 The filtering element (15) can be now easily disconnected by hands from the
cover (9).
10.A7 Dip the filtering element (15) into the clean gasoil for a few hours.
10.A8 After dipping the filtering element, clean them thoroughly from the outside to the
inside with a clean compressed air .
10.A9 Prior to be installed the filtering element (15) shall undergo a visual examination
and if damaged shall be replaced.
WARNING
Damaged filtering elements must not be used again.
OM.29
10.A10 Re-assemble the filtering element (15) in the reverse sequence to that
described under points above and insert the cover / filtering element assembly
inside the filter body without forcing.
10.A11 Fasten the bolts (10) and after checking that the backwash nozzle (16) rotates
freely for a complete revolution, fix the electric motor / gear reducer assembly
with the bolts (5).
DANGER
Inspection to the filtering elements involves the risk of
contaminating the main circuit, therefore it is necessary to
operate with the utmost care and cleanliness.
Picture no. 1 Picture no. 2 Picture no. 3
Picture no. 4 Picture no. 5 Picture no. 6
Pictures for reference only
OM.29
10.B STATIC FILTERING ELEMENT
For the inspection and cleaning of the filtering element proceed as follows:
10.B1 Empty the clogged filter removing in sequence the vent plug (51) and the drain
plug (60).
10.B2 Remove the cover bolts (52), remove the filter cover (50), paying attention not to
damage the cover gasket (53).
10.B3 Unscrew the fixing nut (55), remove the filtering element upper head (56) and
extract the filtering element (57), paying attention not to damage the gaskets (54)
and (58).
10.B4 Dip the filtering element (57) into clean gasoil for few hours.
10.B5 After dipping the filter element, clean it thoroughly from the outside to the inside
with clean compressed air.
10.B6 Prior to be re-installed the filtering element (57) shall undergo a visual
examination and if damaged it shall be replaced.
WARNING
Damaged filtering elements must not be used again.
10.B7 Re-assemble the filtering element (57), in the reverse sequence to that described
under points above.
DANGER
Inspection to the filtering elements involves the risk of
OM.29
10.C CHANGE-OVER VALVE
In order to ensure a perfect tightness in any condition, the internal parts of the change-
over valve have been designed and manufactured in order to the eventual wears of the
body side gasket (108) and the plug side gasket (109), ensuring in this way a constant
tightness.
In spite of the several precautions adopted it may happen that very voluminous
particles, during the commutation phases, may damage the above gaskets, making
necessary their replacement.
For the replacement proceed as follows (see Section 5 “Filter Sectional Drawing with
Parts List”) :
10.C1 Empty the filtering unit removing in sequence the relevant vent plugs and drain
plugs for each vessel.
10.C2 Unscrew the lock pin (110) and raise with slight rotation the vent plug, replacing
the damaged gaskets.
10.C3 Re-assemble the whole again in the reverse sequence to that described under
points above, taking care to position the threaded hole on the valve plug in order
to screw the lock pin (110).
WARNING
Damaged gaskets and/or packings must not be used again.
DANGER
Inspection of the change-over valve involves the risk of
OM.29
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
FAULTS POSSIBLE CAUSE INTERVENTIONS/REMEDIES

Viscosity too high due to low temperature Wait for normal operating conditions
Perform backwash cycles using the
High solids loading in process fluid push button on the local control
panel
High
Differential Shorten backwash line, eliminate
Pressure Backwash piping elbows, upwards pipe runs,
restriction due to valves, etc.
Clogged filtering elements Clean the filtering element
Check if nozzle (J) or back-washing
Backwashing fluid volume too low
piping are clogged
Bolts not tightened Check bolts tightness
Fluid Leakage
Gaskets damaged Replace damaged gaskets
Obstruction between
filtering element and Remove obstruction
Motor overloads backwash arm
Backwash arm tripped
Misalignment of backwash
not rotating Check backwash arm alignment
arm
Motor/Reducer Incorrect power applied to
Check power
failure el. Motor
Incorrect power applied to control panel and/or
Check power
valves, switches, etc.
Incorrect wiring between control panel and/or
Control Check electrical continuity
valves, switches, etc.
problems Check functionality and calibration of
Differential pressure switch improperly adjusted
the instrument
Insufficient air pressure applied to
Increase instrument air pressure
pneumatically operated backwash valve
Loss of incoming electric
Check electrical continuity
a) System Light “L1” power supply
OFF
b) Alarm Light “L3” Blow-out of fuse F1 or F2
OFF on auxiliary transformer Replace fuse
c) Incoming circuit TR power supply
breaker “Q” ON
Auxiliary transformer TR
Replace transformer
failure
a) System Light “L1”
Filter motor electrical Refer to “Backwash arm not
Control Panel OFF
overload rotating”
cumulative b) Alarm Light “L3”
alarm “ON” OFF
c) Incoming circuit Electrical short circuit Check electrical circuit integrity
breaker “Q” OFF
Differential press. Switch Check functionality and
failure calibration of the instrument
a) System Light “L1” Timer KT1 failure Replace timer
ON Timer KT2 failure Replace timer
b) Alarm Light “L3” Motor contactor “KC”
Replace contactor
ON failure
Backwash valve SOV
Check valve functionality
failure
Filter clogged Clean the filtering element
OM.29
12. SPARE PARTS
FILTREX filters are so easy to operate and so accurately manufactured that there is no
need of special spare parts for the ordinary maintenance.
It is advisable to use Filtrex Genuine spare parts; only in this way customers are sure of
exact interchangeability of spare parts and enables them to claim under the
manufacturing warranty stipulated with the purchase order.
Please refer to Filtrex Code (see Section 5 “Filter sectional drawing with part list” for
identification code) to order the spare parts required.
For Two years ordinary maintenance it is advisable to keep in store the spare parts
listed on page I of this manual
For any further information or eventual request of intervention of highly skilled

personnel, please apply to the manufacturing firm at the following address:
FILTREX S.r.l.
Via Rubattino, 94/B
20134 Milan, ITALY
Tel +39-02-75.33.841
Fax +39-02-75.31.383
E-mail info@filtrex.it
OM.29
January 2007
VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC
Technical Manual
VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC – Technical Manual Page 1 of 35

VERY IMPORTANT
HANDLE THE VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC WITH CARE
DO NOT …drop the transmitter.
DO NOT …use liquids incompatible with materials of construction.
DO NOT …operate the VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC above its rated

pressure.
DO NOT …pressure test beyond the specified Test pressure.
ENSURE …all explosion proof requirements are applied
ENSURE …transmitter and associated pipework are pressure

tested to 1½ times the maximum operating pressure
after installation.
ALWAYS …store and transport the VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC in its

original packaging.

Contents
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
1.1 ABOUT THE VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC .............................................. 5

1.1.1 What is it? ........................................................................................................ 5
1.1.2 ViscoMaster Dynamic measurements .............................................................. 5
1.1.4 What is it used for ? ......................................................................................... 6
CHAPTER 2 - MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... 7
2.2 INSTALLATION EFFECTS ..................................................................... 8

2.2.1 Boundary effects .............................................................................................. 8
2.2.2 Fluid conditioning ........................................................................................... 10
2.2.3 Temperature and thermal insulation .............................................................. 10
2.2.4 Entrained gas ................................................................................................. 10
2.2.5 Solids contamination ...................................................................................... 11
2.2.6 Vibration effects ............................................................................................. 11
2.3 GENERAL FITTING NOTES ................................................................. 11
2.4 VISCOMASTER IN-LINE ADAPTER .................................................... 12
2.5 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................. 13
2.6 DURING NORMAL RUNNING .............................................................. 13
2.7 REMOVAL AND REFITTING PROCEDURE ........................................ 13
CHAPTER 3 - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................... 15
3.2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................... 16

3.2.1 Power supply ................................................................................................. 16
3.2.2 EMC ............................................................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Ground connections ....................................................................................... 16
3.2.4 Cabling ........................................................................................................... 17
3.2.5 Surge protection............................................................................................. 17
3.3 WIRING THE VISCOMASTER SERIES TRANSMITTER ..................... 18
3.4 POWER SUPPLY INPUT ...................................................................... 18

3.5 MODBUS (RS-485) ................................................................................ 19
3.6 4-20mA OUTPUT .................................................................................. 20
3.7 WIRING PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 21
CHAPTER 4 - MAINTENANCE
4.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................. 23
4.2 GENERAL MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 24

4.2.1 Physical checks ............................................................................................. 24
4.2.2 Electrical checks ............................................................................................ 24
4.2.3 Performance checks ...................................................................................... 24
4.2.4 Calibration check ........................................................................................... 24
4.3 FAULT ANALYSIS AND REMEDIAL ACTION ..................................... 25

4.3.1 Mechanical servicing ..................................................................................... 27
4.3.2 Time Period Trap ........................................................................................... 27
CHAPTER 5 - SPECIFICATION
5.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................. 28
5.2 SPECIFICATION ................................................................................... 28

5.2.1 Sensor performance ...................................................................................... 28
5.2.2 Environmental................................................................................................ 29
5.2.3 Transmitter power supply .............................................................................. 29
5.2.4 Analog output ................................................................................................ 29
5.2.5 RS485 Interface ............................................................................................. 30
5.2.6 Approvals....................................................................................................... 30
5.3 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION ............................................. 31

1
Introduction
1.1 ABOUT THE VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC
1.1.1 WHAT IS IT?
The Viscomaster Dynamic is a digital viscosity transmitter, designed for use with Heavy Fuel Oils (HFOs). Based on
proven tuning fork technology, it is an all-welded sensor designed to be mounted directly in-line or into a tank.
Viscosity are determined from the resonance of the tuning fork immersed in the fluid. A temperature sensor (PRT) is
also fitted within the transmitter, which is used to measure the transmitter’s temperature. The wetted parts of the
transmitter are available in stainless steel (type 316) and the immersed tines are coated with PTFE to inhibit the build
up of asphaltenes.
The transmitter contains integral electronics that allow sensor and calculation configuration, enabling it to perform a
variety of calculations. Two forms of output are available:
1. Two 4-20mA analog outputs, factory set but have individually configurable span, bias, limits and
filter options. The standard factory settings for these outputs are Line Kinematic Viscosity on
Analog Output 1 and Temperature on Analog Output 2.
Alternatively, each output may be controlled by one of the following:

• Line dynamic viscosity.
• Line temperature.
Note: The Viscomaster Dynamic’s analog output 2 is factory set to Temperature and only the span,
bias and limits can be changed.
2. An RS485 (Modbus) interface, giving access to other measurement results, system information
and configuration parameters.
No signal converter is required, which simplifies wiring and enables the Viscomaster to be connected directly to a
plant monitoring / control systems or a local indicator.
Re-configuration of the transmitter’s default settings (see chapter 5) is achieved by linking a PC to the Modbus
(RS485) connection and running ADView software. Once configured, the PC can be removed.
1.1.2 VISCOMASTER DYNAMIC MEASUREMENTS

The Viscomaster Dynamic directly measures the following fluid properties:
• Line dynamic viscosity (measured in centiPoise - cP).
• Temperature (measured in °C or °F).

From these measurements, Viscomaster Dynamic calculates:
• Line kinematic viscosity (measured in centiStokes - cSt).
Note: The Line Kinematic Viscosity calculation requires the user input of a base (or reference) density value and a
temperature (at which the base density value is valid).
1.1.3 WHAT IS IT USED FOR?

The Viscomaster is designed specifically to control the viscosity of Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) used by large diesel engines.
This is typically achieved by adjusting the heating of incoming HFO to maintain the viscosity within the limits set by
the engine manufacturer.
HFO is a low cost, high viscosity fuel derived from refinery wastes. The quality of the oil and its viscosity/temperature
characteristics can vary due to:
• Stratification within storage tanks.

• Contamination in transit storage.
• Variations in the production process at the refinery or at the blending plant.
HFO heating is usually required to ensure that the viscosity of the oil at the injectors of a large diesel engine or burner
nozzle is maintained at the optimum value (typically between 10 and 20cSt). Failure to observe the viscosity limits
results in inefficient combustion, pollution problems and higher operating costs (either due to excessive fuel being burnt
or premature wear to engine components).
Since simple temperature control has been shown to be ineffective due to the variability of oil quality in HFO, viscosity
control is usually performed.
A typical HFO fuel circuit is shown in figure 1.
Note: In some installations, equipment may be installed in between the viscosity transmitter and the burner
/ engine to remove contaminants from the fuel; the efficient operation of this equipment may also depend
on the viscosity of the HFO.
1
2
Relay Viscosity alarm (to AMS)
* *
*
3
* *
*
* Not supplied by Aquametro
Figure 1

2
Mechanical Installation
2.1 INTRODUCTION
There are a variety of external factors which affect the ability of the Viscomaster to operate successfully. In order to
ensure that your system works correctly, the effects of these factors must be taken into consideration when designing
your installation.
There are two main aspects to consider:

1. The accuracy and repeatability of the measurements;
2. The relevance of the measurements to the overall purpose of the system.
Factors which may adversely affect accuracy and repeatability include:

• The presence of gas or bubbles within the fluid being measured.
• Non-uniformity of the fluid.
• The presence of solids as contaminants.
• Fouling of the transducer.
• Temperature gradients – thermal insulation must be placed near the sensor chamber and body.
• Cavitations and swirls caused by valves or discontinuities in the pipework.
• Operating at temperatures below the wax point of heavy fuel oil (HFO).
• The correct pipe diameter that corresponds to the calibration of the Viscomaster.
In some applications, absolute accuracy is less important than repeatability. For example, in a system where the control
parameters are initially adjusted for optimum performance, and thereafter only checked periodically.
The term achievable accuracy can be used to describe a measure of the product quality that can be realistically obtained
from a process system. It is a function of measurement accuracy, stability and system response. High accuracy alone is no
guarantee of good product quality if the response time of the system is measured in tens of minutes, or if the measurement
bears little relevance to the operation of the system. Similarly, systems which require constant calibration and maintenance
cannot achieve good achievable accuracy.
Factors which may adversely affect the relevance of the measurements could include:
• Measurement used for control purposes being made too far away from the point of control, so that the
system cannot respond properly to changes.
• Measurements made on fluid which is unrepresentative of the main flow.
This chapter has the following sections:

• Section 2.2 – The importance of installation effects.
• Section 2.3 – General fitting notes.
• Section 2.4 – Mechanical details for mounting and installing Viscomaster.
• Section 2.5 – Commissioning the system.
• Section 2.6 – During normal running.
• Section 2.7 – Removal and refitting procedure.

2.2 INSTALLATION EFFECTS
Unlike other Mobrey’s sensors, the vibrating tines of the Viscomaster are not totally enclosed. The walls of the pipe or
tank in which the transmitter is installed will introduce boundaries to the fluid flow, and this will have an effect on the
calibration of the sensor. To overcome this, Mobrey calibrates the Viscomaster under a variety of pre-defined
conditions corresponding to the installation and pipe schedule. This condition is selected when ordering the
Viscomaster, so that by calibrating the sensor under the same boundary conditions as the installation, the need for
additional on-site calibration is eliminated.
2.2.1 BOUNDARY EFFECTS

Any insertion device or transducer can only measure the properties of the fluid within the region of fluid to which it is
sensitive.
For practical reasons it is helpful to consider the sensitive or effective region for the transmitter as an three-
dimensional ellipse centred on the tips of the tines with its long axis aligned with the direction in which the tines
vibrate, as shown below. The Viscomaster is insensitive to the properties of the fluid outside this region.
long axis
short
axis
If part of this volume is taken up by the pipework or fittings there is said to be a boundary effect; i.e. the intrusion of
the pipe walls will alter the calibration.
The diagram below illustrates the Viscomaster installed in a pocket on the side of a 4” (100mm) horizontal pipe line
(viewed from above). The effective region is completely enclosed within the pipe line and thus is completely fluid.
2봖chedule 40 4?horizontal pipe

Pocket or 밫
Top or Plan view

This next view shows other pipe outlines superimposed:
4?(100mm) 6? 150mm)
vertical pipe vertical pipe
2봖chedule 40
Pocket or 밫
Top or Plan view
The smaller circle represents a 4” vertical pipe, which intersects the effective region. The 6” (150mm) pipe is the
smallest pipe diameter to completely enclose the effective region when the pipe is vertical. Thus smaller pipe
diameters can lead to a variety of different geometries which would each require a separate calibration.
An alternative condition is shown in the next diagram where the side pocket is extended until it passes completely
through the effective region producing a “core”:
2봖chedule 40
Pocket or 밫
Top or Plan view
From this, it would appear that almost every installation requires a separate in situ calibration - a very undesirable
situation. The problem is resolved by providing standard calibration geometries which can be used in all pipe work
configurations and thereby allow the factory calibration conditions to be reproduced in the process. These standard
geometries are described in Section 오류! 참조 원본을 찾을 수 없습니다..

2.2.2 FLUID CONDITIONING
The fluid in at the Viscomaster must be of uniform composition and at uniform temperature, and it must be
representative of the fluid flow as a whole. This is achieved either by mixing of the fluid either using a static inline
mixer or taking advantage of any natural pipe condition that tends to cause mixing, such as pump discharge, partially
open valves etc.
2.2.3 TEMPERATURE AND THERMAL INSULATION

Always insulate the Viscomaster and surrounding pipework thoroughly (see photograph below). Insulation should
completely cover installation kit / flow-through chamber and Viscomaster assembly, up to the electronics housing.
Insulation must be a minimum of 25mm (1”) thick rockwool / calcium silicate and enclosed in a sealed protective casing.
Avoid direct heating or cooling of the Viscomaster and associated pipework upstream and downstream that is likely to
create temperature gradients. If it is necessary to provide protection against cooling due to loss of flow, electrical
trace heating may be applied, provided it is thermostatically controlled and the thermostat is set to operate below the
minimum operating temperature of the system.
2.2.4 ENTRAINED GAS

Gas pockets can disrupt the measurement. A brief disruption in the signal caused by transient gas pockets can
be negated in the internal signal conditioning software, but more frequent disruptions or serious gas
entrainment must be avoided. This can be achieved by observing the following conditions:
• Keep pipe lines fully flooded at all times.
• Vent any gas prior to the Viscomaster.
• Avoid sudden pressure drops or temperature changes which may cause dissolved gases to break out
of the fluid.
• Maintain a back pressure on the system sufficient to prevent gas break out. (E.g. back pressure
equivalent to twice the head-loss plus twice vapour pressure).
• Maintain flow velocity at the sensor within the specified limits.

2.2.5 SOLIDS CONTAMINATION
• Avoid sudden changes of velocity that may cause sedimentation.
• Install the transmitter far enough downstream from any pipework configuration which may cause
centrifuging of solids (e.g. bends).
• Maintain flow velocity at the sensor within the specified limits.
• If necessary, use a suitable screen or filter to trap objects or lumps which may block or damage the
sensor or flow chamber. (Viscomaster can handle normal slurries.)
2.2.6 VIBRATION EFFECTS

The Viscomaster series transmitters have been extensively tested under severe vibration conditions, both in the test
laboratory and Marine/Power Station/Burner applications. The Viscomaster transmitters are approved according to
the Lloyds Register standard, levels ENV 1,2 and 3 and operate correctly up to the classification level of ENV4
(vibration test 2). This vibration level, ENV 4 includes correct operation at vibration levels of 4g rms between
frequencies of 5-100Hz, and is used to describe the requirements for engine mounted equipment.
If vibration levels exceed these limits, or the Viscomaster series transmitters are not installed as recommended by
Mobrey, Mobrey cannot take responsibility for the correct operation of these units.
2.3 GENERAL FITTING NOTES

The Viscomaster uses a 1.5” Swagelok style of fitting which requires no seals, minimising maintenance and spares.
These fittings are leak proof over a wide range of pressure and temperature conditions, and during rapid temperature
cycling, which may occur during the transfer from HFO to distillate fuel.
The Viscomaster should normally be installed horizontally, with the slot between the tines vertical; this ensures that,
for low flow rates, any solids or gas bubbles are not trapped. When installed in a flow-through chamber, however,
provided that the flow rate is within the recommended range, the transmitter can be mounted horizontally or vertically.
Allow at least 200mm (7.8”) clearance to enable the Viscomaster to be removed from the fitting.

2.4 VISCOMASTER IN-LINE ADAPTER
Conditions:
Temperature: -50 to +200°C
Flow: 10 to 330 l/min (0.6 to 20 m3/hr) (2.6 to 87 US gal./min)
Viscosity limit: Up to 100cSt
Pressure: As defined by process flanges.
Viscometer
calibration boundary: 2½“ Schedule 40
This adapter has been specifically designed to provide a simple, direct replacement for existing vibration-type
viscometers. Typically, the flange-to-flange distance is 150mm. Usually, no pipework changes are necessary.
The viscometer is mounted 25mm away from the main flow line, allowing good product mixing, sensor protection and
stable measurement conditions.
Typical dimensions are shown in the drawing.
Note: The schematic shown may vary without notice, although overall dimensions will remain unchanged.

2.5 COMMISSIONING
1. Once the pipework installation has been prepared, and before installing the Viscomaster and thermal
insulation, fit a blanking compression nut to the Viscomaster mounting, and pressurise and flush the
system.
2. Isolate the system, depressurise and remove the blanking compression nut.
3. Install the Viscomaster, and tighten the fitting nut, but do not fit the thermal insulation.
4. Slowly pressurise the system and check for leaks, particularly if the normal operating temperature is
high, or the Viscomaster has been fitted cold; tighten as necessary.
5. Now tighten the nut again, if necessary. Once you are satisfied with the integrity of the seal, the
insulation can be fitted.
6. Once the system has stabilised and is leak free, fit the insulation material.
2.6 DURING NORMAL RUNNING

Observe and record the normal operating temperatures and viscosity readings.
When several systems are run in parallel and use the same fuel source, comparison of the readings between
installations can be a useful indicator of possible system faults. Differences between readings or changes from the
normally observed conditions should always be investigated to confirm that instrumentation is functioning correctly.
Particular attention should be paid to the conditions before and after engine shutdowns in order to detect any
possibility of asphaltenes coating (precipitation of asphaltenes from the HFO caused by dilution with distillate fuel)
which may cause the instrument to read high. If the re-circulation flow is high enough or the instruments have been
supplied with PTFE coating, asphaltenes or any other deposits should quickly be removed and the expected
operating temperatures should be restored.
If Viscomaster is still reading high and the oil quality is known not to have changed, then the instrument should be
removed and cleaned with a rag. Removal should only be performed in accordance with the engine or burner
manufacturers’ recommendations or in accordance with safe site practice. This must include isolation and
depressurisation, as detailed below.
2.7 REMOVAL AND REFITTING PROCEDURE

All national and international safety regulations should be observed.
Observe safe working practice, wear protective clothing and safety glasses, and use suitable gloves to prevent burns
or absorption of hot oil.
Check that the isolation valves have been fully closed, remove insulation and allow to cool to a safe level (cooling will
tend to reduce any retained pressure) and de-pressurise the system if a drain valve or pressure relieving valve is
fitted.
When the above conditions are satisfied, slacken the lock nut by 1½ to 2 turns, sufficient for the sensor to be rocked.
(If necessary, jolt the Viscomaster loose with a blow of the hand to the amplifier housing.) This will allow the seal between
the sensor and the chamber retro-fit kit to be broken. Do not slacken the lock nut further unless the seal is broken and
the sensor is definitely loose in the fitting.

Note: If the system is still pressurised, the Viscomaster may lift and be held against the retaining nut. Rocking and
alternately pushing the sensor in and out of the pocket within the limits allowed by the slackened nut will break any
seal and allow oil under pressure to seep past the lock nut. If this leakage is excessive, re-tighten the lock nut and
take further action to de-pressurise the system.
When the Viscomaster can be rocked in the flow chamber and there is no serious or continuous escape of oil, it is
safe to remove the lock nut.
Always keep all parts of your body away from the axis of the sensor (i.e., the direction in which the sensor
will be withdrawn). If the system is under pressure or suddenly comes under pressure (e.g., due to valve
failure or pump start), and the lock nut is not in place, the instrument may be forcibly ejected from the flow
chamber and cause serious injury.
Clean and maintain the Viscomaster as directed and then refit it, as described in Section 2.5

3
Electrical Installation
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Viscomaster Series transmitter has two types of output:
• Two 4-20mA analog outputs:

The Viscomaster Dynamic has a single fully configurable output proportional to a user-specified
parameter.
The parameters that can be output on each analog output are as follows:
Viscomaster Dynamic
Analog Output 1 Analog Output 2
Dynamic viscosity (cP) Temperature *
Kinematic viscosity (cSt)*

Line density
Temperature
* Factory default selection.
Note: In all cases, the Limit values of each analog output are configurable.
• A Modbus (RS485) interface, giving access to other measurement results, system information and
configuration parameters. The Modbus interface is also used to configure the Viscomaster Series
transmitter, using a PC running Mobrey’s ADView software (see separate manual)
It is recommended that both outputs are installed, requiring a minimum of eight wires (two for each output, and two
for power). Although you may not immediately require the Modbus connection, it may be required for in-situ
calibration adjustment and future system enhancements, and the cost of the additional wires is trivial compared to the
expense of installing them retrospectively.
A number of factors must be taken into account when planning the electrical installation. These include:
• Power supply (Section 3.2.1 and Section 3.4)

• EMC (Section 3.2.2)

• Ground connections (Section 3.2.3)
• Cables (Section 3.2.4)
• Surge protection (Section 3.2.5)
• Modbus connections (Section 3.5)
• Analog Output connections (Section 3.6)
3.2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

3.2.1 POWER SUPPLY
The power supply to Viscomaster Series transmitters must have the following specification:
Voltage: Nominally 24V dc, but in the range 20 to 28V dc.

Current: >50mA.
If several Viscomaster Series transmitters are to be used within a local area, one power supply can be used to power
them all; where the transmitters are distributed over a wide area and cabling costs are high, it may be more cost
effective to use several smaller, local power supplies.
Upon leaving the factory, the two 4-20mA analog outputs are non-isolated as they are powered through internal links
to the power supply input. However, if split-pads “LNK A” (Analog Output 1) and “LNK B” (Analog Output 2) by the
terminal block are ‘broken’, they become isolated and require a separate 20-28V dc power supply. (See section 3.6
for further details).
Care should be taken where there is the possibility of significant common-mode voltages between different parts of
the system. For example, if the Viscomaster Series transmitter is local powered from a power supply which is at a
different potential to the RS485 ground connection (if used).
3.2.2 EMC
To meet the EC Directive for EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility), it is recommended that the transmitter be
connected using a suitable instrumentation cable containing an overall screen. This should be earthed at both ends
of the cable. At the transmitter, the screen can be earthed to the transmitter body (and therefore to the pipework),
using a conductive cable gland.
3.2.3 GROUND CONNECTIONS

It is not necessary to earth the transmitter through a separate connection; this is usually achieved directly through the
metalwork of the installation.
The electronics and communications connections (RS485/Modbus and 4-20mA analog outputs) of a Viscomaster
Series transmitter are not connected to the body of the transmitter. This means that the negative terminal of the
power supply can be at a different potential to the earthed bodywork.
In the majority of applications, it is not necessary to connect the RS485 ground connection. In areas where there is a
significant amount of electrical noise, higher communications integrity may be obtained by connecting the negative
power terminal (pin 2) of the Viscomaster Series transmitter to the communications ground. If this is done, it is
important to ensure that the possibility of ground loops (caused by differences in earth potential) is eliminated.

3.2.4 CABLING
Although it is possible to connect separate cables to the Viscomaster Series transmitter for power, RS485 and the 4-
20mA analogue output, it is recommended that all connections are made through one instrumentation-grade cable.
Connections for the Analog and Modbus signals should be individually screened twisted-pairs with an overall screen,
foil or braid for the cable. Where permissible, the screen should be connected to earth at both ends. (At the
Viscomaster Series transmitter, this is best done using a conductive cable gland.)
Cables should conform to BS2538. In the USA, use Belden 9402 (two-pair) or Beldon 85220 (single-pair). Other
cables that are suitable are those that meet BS5308 Multi-pair Instrumentation Types 1 and 2, Belden Types 9500,
9873, 9874, 9773, 9774 etc.
The typical maximum recommended cable length for the above cable types is 1000m (3200ft.), but care must be
taken to ensure that the power supply at the transmitter is at least 20V. Thus, for 24V power supply, the overall
resistance for the power supply connections (both wires in series) must be less than 100 ohms.
In order to complete the wiring, you will need the following parts:
• ½” NPT to M20 gland adapter.
• ½” NPT blanking plug.
• M20 x 1 cable gland (not supplied).
The gland adapter and blanking plug are supplied with each Viscomaster Series transmitter. These two parts
are “EExd” rated. However, you will need to get a suitably rated cable gland. Alternative parts may be required
in order to meet local electrical installation regulations.
In hazardous areas, all parts must be explosion-proof.
3.2.5 SURGE PROTECTION

Careful consideration should be given to the likelihood of power supply surges or lightning strikes. The power supply
connections of the Viscomaster Series transmitter have a surge arrestor fitted that gives protection against power
supply transients.
If there is a possibility of lightning strikes, external surge protection devices - one for each pair of signals and the
power supply - should be installed as close to the Viscomaster Series transmitter as possible.
Another method of surge protection is to connect an MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) (breakdown voltage >30V)
with an NE-2 neon bulb in parallel across each wire and ground. These can be mounted in a junction box close
to the Viscomaster Series transmitter.

3.3 WIRING THE VISCOMASTER SERIES TRANSMITTER
Figure 3.1 shows the terminal board of the Viscomaster Series transmitter. To reveal the terminal board, it is
necessary to unscrew the housing cap; the procedure is described in Section 3.7.
Note: If the Viscomaster Series transmitter is to be used in hazardous areas, the electrical installation
must strictly adhere to the safety information given in safety instruction booklet 78265061/SI, which
will have accompanied this manual.
The connections to the Viscomaster Series transmitter are:

• Power.
• Modbus (RS485) communications.
• Analog output (4-20mA).
It is recommended that you install all three connections (six cores) at installation, to avoid the possibility of expensive
alterations to the cabling at a later date. Typically, three pairs of shielded 19/0.30mm2 (#16 AWG) to 19/0.15mm2
(#22 AWG) wire are used for wiring.
Figure 3.1: View of the terminal board
3.4 POWER SUPPLY INPUT

Terminals 1 and 2 are for connecting an external 24V dc power supply, as guided in Figure 3.2.
Ensure that the loop resistance of the cable(s) is such that the voltage at the transmitter terminals is greater than 20
volts. (The maximum voltage at the terminals is 28V dc.)

Figure 3.2: Power supply connections

3.5 MODBUS (RS485)
Terminals 3 and 4 are for RS485/Modbus connections to a PC, as shown in Figure 3.3.
Note: The PC and converter are always located in a non-hazardous (safe) area.
The RS485/232 converter and PC are not normally installed permanently. However it is strongly recommended that
the wiring to the Viscomaster Series is made at the time of installation.
For detailed information on RS485, see separate manual.
Note: If you encounter communication difficulties with RS485, swap over the ‘A’ and ‘B’ signal
connections at one end of the network.
TERMINAL BLOCK VERSION:
OR
9-PIN DIN CONNECTOR VERSION:
Figure 3.3: Modbus connections < 100 metres

3.6 4-20mA OUTPUTS
Terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 are for connecting the two 4-20mA analog outputs to external devices, such as a signal
converter.
Upon leaving the factory, the two 4-20mA analog outputs are non-isolated as they are powered through internal links
to the Power Supply Input.
However, if split-pads “LNK A” (Analog Output 1) and “LNK B” (Analog Output 2) by the terminal block are ‘broken’,
they become isolated and require direct connections to another external 20-28V dc power supply. A second or third
external 20-28V dc supply can be used.
Figure 3.4: 4-20mA Outputs (Isolated)
Note: The external device must be located in a non-hazardous (safe) area unless it is explosion proof and
suitably certified.
The 4-20mA analog outputs can be configured to be proportional to a user-defined base density, referred density,
temperature, or one of the special functions. Fault conditions within the Viscomaster Series are indicated by a 2mA
output. If this is detected, the Modbus link can be used to interrogate the transmitter to establish the likely cause of
the problem.

3.7 WIRING PROCEDURE
1. Open the Terminal Board side of the

VIEW FROM TOP OF 7829:
Viscomaster Series’s electronics housing by
UNDO THIS CAP
undoing the 2.5mm AF grub screw and
unscrewing the lid anticlockwise. GRUB
SCREW
2. Fit the M20 gland adaptor into the most

convenient ½” NPT hole. Then, fit the M20 x 1
cable gland to the adapter.
Fit a ½” NPT blanking plug to the unused hole.
(1) ½” NPT Blanking Plug.
(2) ½” NPT to M20 adaptor.
(3) M20 cable gland.
3. Insert the cable through the cable gland and

adaptor so that the multi-core cable is gripped
leaving 200mm of free, unscreened wire to
connect to the terminal blocks.

4. Wire up the cable cores as shown:
6. When you have screwed the wires into the

correct terminals, carefully tuck the wires
around the electronics, and tighten the
cable gland
7. Finally, screw the housing cap on fully and VIEW FROM UNDERNEATH THE ELECTRONICS:
tighten the locking grub screw using the

2.5mm AF hex drive.
TIGHTEN
CAP
TIGHTEN
GRUB

4
Maintenance
WARNING: If the transmitter being serviced is to be used in a hazardous
area, the rules of compliance with current standards
concerning flameproof equipment must be strictly adhered to.
4.1 GENERAL
The Viscomaster Series transmitter has no moving parts and maintenance is limited to simple visual checks for
leaks and physical damage. ADView’s Data Logging facility can be used whenever necessary to verify that the
transmitter is functioning correctly (See sperate manual).
Check calibrations should be carried out at specified intervals in order to identify a malfunction or deterioration in
transmitter performance. If a fault or a drop in performance is detected, further tests are required to identify the cause
of the fault. Remedial action is limited to cleaning the tines, making good any poor connections and replacing the
internal electronics. In extreme cases, the complete Viscomaster Series transmitter may need to be replaced.
Note: The electronics within the transmitter contain calibration information relevant to that particular transmitter only.
The circuit boards operate as a pair, and therefore both boards must be changed together. Contact Aquametro for
more details if you need to change the boards.
CAUTION: Care is essential in handling of the Viscomaster Series transmitter

during removal from and fitment to the tank, and during
transportation. Wherever possible, retain and use the original
packaging.

4.2 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
This procedure is recommended for periodic maintenance and can also be used when fault finding.
4.2.1 PHYSICAL CHECKS

a. Examine the transmitter, its electronics housing and cables for any signs of damage and corrosion.
b. Make sure that the spigot connection is tight.
c. Check the transmitter for sign of leakage.
d. Check that there is no ingress of water/fluid into the electronics housing.
e. Ensure that the threads on the covers are well greased (graphite grease) and that the ‘O’ rings are in
good condition.
Note: The covers MUST be completely screwed down and, in the case of an explosion-proof enclosure
application, DO NOT FAIL to tighten the locking screws.
4.2.2 ELECTRICAL CHECK

Check the power supply and current consumption at the transmitter terminals 1 and 2.
These should give:
35mA to 42mA (at 22.8V to 25.2V)

If the current consumption is outside this range, contact Aquametro for advice.
4.2.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

When several systems are run in parallel and use the same fluid source, comparison of the line viscosity,
base density and temperature readings between installations can be a useful indicator of possible system
faults. Differences between readings, or changes from the normally observed conditions should always be
investigated to confirm that instrumentation is functioning correctly.
4.2.4 CALIBRATION CHECK

a. Carry out a check calibration as detailed in sperate manual.
b. Compare the results obtained with the previous calibration figures to identify any substantial
deterioration in transducer performance or any malfunction.
Notes:
1. A drop in performance is likely due to a build-up of deposition on the tines, which can be removed by
the application of a suitable solvent. See section 4.3.1 for further details.
2. Malfunctions generally could be the result of electrical/electronic faults in either the Viscomaster Series
transmitter or the readout equipment. Always check the readout equipment first before attention is
directed to the Viscomaster Series transmitter.

4.3 FAULT ANALYSIS AND REMEDIAL ACTION
A fault may be categorised as either an erratic reading or a reading that is outside limits.
Electrical faults can also cause symptoms that appear to affect the readings and it is recommended that the electrical
system be checked first, before removing the transmitter for servicing.
Fault Possible causes Remedies
Readings fluctuate Analog output averaging Increase the averaging time using
slightly, i.e., are noisy time not long enough ADView’s Board Configuration facility
(see separate manual).
Erratic readings Gas bubbles around tines Remove primary cause; e.g.:
Cavitations - install air release units to release
gas; apply back pressure to
Severe vibration discourage bubble formation.
Severe electrical - remove cause of vibration
interference
Alternatively, it may be necessary to
Large amount of adjust the Time Period Trap
contaminants
Readings outside limits Deposition and/or Clean tines

corrosion on the tines.
Analog output = 0mA No power to analogue If voltage across pins 5 and 6 is not 15
output to 28V, replace power supply.
Analog output circuit Use ADView’s facility to set the
failure analogue output to 4, 12 or 20mA (in
Board Configuration) to check whether
the output is functioning. If not, replace
circuit boards.
Analog output is 2mA Alarm condition caused by If voltage across pins 1 and 2 is not 20
lack of power to to 28V, check and replace main power
Viscomaster Series supply.
transmitter
Alarm condition caused by Use ADView Diagnostics to check that
other internal failure phase locked loop is in lock.
Temperature readings If other readings from Return the transmitter to Mobrey for
incorrect transmitter are correct (i.e. servicing. Re-fit the transit cover to the
analog output and Modbus transmitter and secure it with 2 grub
appear to be functioning screws.
correctly), the temperature
sensor has probably failed.

Fault Possible cause Remedy
Transmitter does not Power failure to Check power supply to transmitter and
communicate with transmitter. converter; replace if necessary.
ADView:
Power supply to Check wiring.
RS485/232 converter
failed.
A and B Modbus Check wiring.
connections reversed.
RS485/232 converter Try another converter.
failed, wired incorrectly,
or connected the wrong
way round.
ADView incorrectly Re-install ADView.

installed on PC.
Incorrect Slave address Check slave address.

chosen for transmitter.
RS232 port on PC failed. Connect to another free RS232 port on

the PC, if available.
Alternatively connect a known working

RS232 device to the PC to check that the
port is working.
Viscosity reads high Thermal insulation is Repair or replace thermal insulation.

during normal running defective.
PTFE laminate damaged, Remove transmitter for visual check;

leading to coating of fork return to Mobrey for servicing.
tines.
Calibration data is Compare calibration data to certificate or
corrupted. stored configuration. Re-program as
necessary.
Viscosity reads high Pump coated with Check pump delivery; service pump.
after engine shutdown asphaltenes.
and restart
Bypass not fully closed. Close bypass
PTFE laminate damaged, Remove transmitter for visual check;

leading to coating of fork return to Mobrey for servicing.
tines.
Calibration data is Compare calibration data to certificate or

corrupted. stored configuration. Reprogram as
necessary.
Return transmitter to Mobrey for

servicing.

4.3.1 MECHANICAL SERVICING
This mainly comprises the cleaning of any deposition or corrosion from the tines. Deposition is removed by the use of
a suitable solvent. Take care not to damage the PTFE coating. Where extensive corrosion has been treated, it is
highly recommended that a full calibration is carried out to check the transmitter characteristics.
CAUTION: Care is essential in handling the transducer during transit,

installation, and removal from the installation.
4.3.2 TIME PERIOD TRAP

Disturbances in the fluid caused by bubbles, cavitations or contaminants can cause sudden changes in the measured
output, which may, under some circumstances, give rise to instability (i.e. hunting) in a control system relying on the
measurement. The Viscomaster Series transmitter can maintain the analogue output during such perturbations by
ignoring the aberrant measurement, and maintaining the output at the last good measured value. This facility is known
as the Time Period Trap (TPT).
Under all normal circumstances, the factory settings for the TPT should be used. However, in extreme cases it may be
necessary to alter the settings to meet the demands of a particular system. This should only be done after monitoring
the behaviour of the system for some time, to establish the normal running conditions.
Great care must be taken not to reduce the sensitivity of the transmitter so that normal response to fluctuations in the
fluid is impaired.
The time period trap facility works as follows:
After each measurement of the time period (of the Viscomaster Series transmitter’s vibrating tines), the new value is
compared with the previous value. If the difference between them is smaller than the allowable tolerance, the output is
updated to correspond to the new measured value, and the TPT remains inoperative; i.e., operation is normal. If the
difference exceeds the allowable tolerance, the output remains at the previous level, and does not follow the apparent
sudden change in value.
This process is repeated until either:

(a) The latest measured value falls back to the level of the original value, indicating that the transient has
passed; or
(b) The TPT count is reached. At this point, it is assumed that the change in value is not due to a random
disturbance, and the output adopts the value of the latest reading.
Two Modbus Registers control the operation of the Time Period Trap facility. These can be changed, if necessary,
using ADView’s Register Read/Write facility (see separate manual).
Modbus Register 138: contains the maximum allowable change in the time period between readings, specified in μs.
The preset value is 10.
Modbus Register 137: contains the Time period count, which is the maximum number of measurements to be
rejected before resuming normal operation; the preset value is 2. If the value is set to 0, TPT is disabled, and the
output will always follow the time period measurement. If you want to program another value, it should be determined
experimentally, and be equal to the length of the longest undesirable transients which are likely to arise. If the value
is set too high, the Viscomaster Series transmitter will be slow to respond to genuine changes in the fluid properties.

5
Specification
5.1 GENERAL
The Viscomaster Series transmitter comprises a vibrating fork sensor, with processing electronics within a housing which
allows full configuration; all signal processing, calculations, and calibration adjustments are made without the need for
external electronics.
Two 4-20mA analog outputs are available:

• On the Viscomaster Dynamic, Analogue Output 1 is configurable to output a user-specified parameter,
such as Kinematic Viscosity. Analogue Output 2 is fixed to output Temperature. The zero and span are
configurable. (For further details, see Chapter 3.)
An RS485 serial communications link is also available, which utilises the Modbus protocol to provide a means of
configuring the device, retrieving data measurements, and performing diagnostics.
ADView, a PC software application running under Windows 98, NT, 2000 or XP, is available for data logging,
configuration and diagnostics purposes (see separate manual)
5.2 SPECIFICATION
5.2.1 SENSOR PERFORMANCE
Viscosity measurement
Measurement technology: Tuning Fork driven and sensed by piezoelectric
crystals.
Operating range: 0.5 to 100cSt
Accuracy: ± 1% operating range

(0.5 to 100cSt: ± 0.2%)
Repeatability: ± 0.5% reading
Pressure effect: Negligible

Temperature
Temperature Technology: PT100 platinum resistance thermometer in tuning fork
Integral PRT Temperature Range: -50° to +200°C
Integral PRT Temperature Accuracy: BS1904 Class B , DIN 43760 Class B
5.2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
Fluid temperature range: -50°C to +200°C (-58°F to +392°F)
Max. operating pressure: 207 Bar (3000psi)
Enclosure Type: Die cast low copper alloy.

Polyurethane paint finish.
Protection: IP66
Max. weight: 6.7kg.
Max. vibration: 4g rms 5-100Hz

(as specified by Lloyds Register ENV4 specification)
5.2.3 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY

Minimum Input Voltage: 20V
Maximum Input Voltage: 28V
Current Consumption: 35 to 45mA
5.2.4 ANALOG OUTPUT

Note: See Chapter 3 for details of powering the analog outputs.
Number of channels: 2
Range: 3.9mA to 20.8mA
Alarm Condition: 2mA
Nominal Power Supply: 24V
Maximum Terminal voltage: 28V
Minimum Terminal voltage: 15V
Isolation to Main Power Supply: 75Vdc rated
Accuracy @20°C: ±0.1% reading ±0.05% FS
Repeatability: ±0.05% FS
(-40°C to +85°C)

5.2.5 RS485 INTERFACE
Connections: A and B signals (screw terminals)
Communications protocol: Modbus RTU
Isolation: None (RS485 in same circuit as main power supply)
Baud rate: 9600 (fixed)
Termination: Not required
5.2.6 APPROVALS
EMC: EN 61326:1997 +A1
Approvals: EEx d IIC T4 (ATEX)
CSA Class 1, Division 1, Group C.

5.3 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
The Viscomaster Series transmitters are supplied in a standard configuration.
Analog outputs are set to provide line kinematic viscosity (in cSt) and temperature (in °C). Units are kg/m3 for the density
parameter.
The complete set of default values are shown below.
Viscomaster Dynamic
Parameter
Factory default value
Analog output 1: Variable Line kinematic viscosity

Units cSt
4mA setting 0
20mA setting As ordered.
Analog output 2: Variable Temperature

Units °C
4mA setting 0
20mA setting 150°C
Alarms: Coverage General system

Analog output
User range
Hysteresis 2%
Alarm user range: Variable Line kinematic viscosity

Units cSt
Low setting 0
High setting 100
Density calculations: Temperature units °C

Temperature offset 0
Pressure units bar
Pressure set value 1.013
Line density units kg/m3
Line density scale factor (Not Applicable)
Line density offset (Not Applicable)
API referral: Product type (Not Applicable)

User K0 (Not Applicable)
User K1 (Not Applicable)
Base temperature (Not Applicable)
Base pressure (Not Applicable)
Output averaging 5s
time:

Modbus: Slave address 1
Byte order Big Endian
Register size 32 bit
Hardware type: Advanced fork

Head Office:
Switzerland: Aquametro AG, Ringstrasse 75, CH-4106 Therwil, Phone +41 61 725 11 22, Fax +41 61 725 15 95
Officies:
Switzerland: Aquametro SA, Rue du Jura 10, CH-1800 Vevey, Phone +41 21 923 51 30, Fax +41 21 922 58 44
Belgium: Aquametro Belgium SPRL, Dallaan, 67, B-1933 Sterrebeek, Phone +32 2 241 62 01, Fax +32 2 216 22 63
Czech Republic: Aquametro s.r.o., Prosecká 811 / 76a, CZ-190 00 Praha 9, Phone +42 02 86 88 77 78, Fax +420 02 86 88 95 59
Germany: Aquametro Messtechnik GmbH, Zum Panrepel 24, D-28307 Bremen, Phone +49 421 / 871 64-0, Fax +49 421 / 871 64-19
Marketing-Officies:
Japan: Aquametro Representative Office, Yasuhiko Takahashi, 1-18-4, Nakane, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 152-0031, Phone +81 3 3723 8611, Fax +81 3 5729 4607
Korea (south): Aquametro Representative Office, Dennis Kwak, The # Centum Park 102-2704, Haeundae gu Jaesong 1-dong 1200, Busan Korea, Phone +82 5 1314 3017, Fax +82 5 1988 3017
Singapore: Aquametro Representative Office, Deniel Wong, 273 Thomson Road, #03-03 Novena Gardens, Singapore 307644, Phone +65 6 256 8152, Fax +65 6 256 9917

www.aquametro.com

Motor control valve in two way form 421 ... E
PN 16 / 25, GGG-40. Page 1 of 2
Body: GGG-40.3, two way form,

for water and steam,
Pressure range: PN 16, PN 25
Flanges acc. to DIN,
Spindle sealing: spring loaded PTFE-V-ring unit,
for media temperatures up to 250°C
alternatively: graphite-packing
Internal parts: stainless steel
Flow characteristic: equal percentage
Leakage: acc. to VDI/VDE 2174
Actuator: with integrated manual emergency

and load dependent limit switches
Thrust: 2000 N
Power input: 10 VA
alternatively: 4000 N / 20 VA (appendix ..c)
5500 N / 20 VA (appendix ..d)
Power supply: 230V /50...60Hz
other voltages on request
Protection class: IP65
Accessories, special types:

Add. signal switches (see page 49e, 49w)
Feedback potentiometer (see page 49f)
Integrated positioner (see page 49sr)
Other voltages (on request)
Other positioning speed (on request)
Reduced kvs-values (on request)
Order text:
Motor control valve PN . ., DN . .
in two way form with PTFE-V-ring unit,
Power supply . . ., List-No. 421 . . .
Max. operating pressure:

by: 120 200 250 °C
PN 16 16 13 13 bar
PN 25 25 20 18 bar
DN List-No. Kvs Stroke Pos. speed Closing pressure (bar)

PN 16 PN 25 m³/h mm sec 2000N 4000N 5500N
15 421 400 421 500 4,0 20 66 25,0
20 421 401 421 501 6,3 20 66 25,0
25 421 402 421 502 10 20 66 25,0
32 421 403 421 503 16 20 66 17,3 25,0
40 421 404 421 504 25 20 66 10,8 25,0
50 421 405 421 505 40 20 66 6,6 16,0 23,0
65 421 406 421 506 63 30 100 3,4 9,1 13,3
80 421 408 421 508 100 30 100 2,0 5,8 8,6
100 421 410 421 510 160 30 100 1,1 3,5 5,4
data subject to alteration 421-1-E.DOC / 0411517

Motor control valve in two way form 421 ... E
PN 16 / 25, GGG-40. Page 2 of 2
153
Space required
Actuator type: 145 to remove
2kN: 4e1230 (for 4-6kN-actuator: 190) the bonnet
4(6)kN: 4e14(6)30
Bonnet
Motor
Limit switch
Gear
Spring plate-unit H*
Spindle (actuator)
Hand wheel
Mounting rod
PTFE-V-ring-unit
Spindle
Plug
Valve body type: vg21...

L
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Height H * 491 505 499 505 511 513 556 557 564
Immersion lenght L 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350
Weight kg 13 14 15 17 18 20 33 37 47
* = add. 45mm for 4-6 kN-actuator
Electrical wiring: Accessories (optional):

Limit switch Potentiometer Signal switch
M load dependent travel dependent
for valve position
CLOSE OPEN
1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 36
N L on 2 = Straightway closes
L on 3 = Straightway opens
data subject to alteration 421-2-E.DOC / 0411504

Installation and operating manual B4E
for motor control valves
Installation:
Attention!: - Installation, operation and maintenance should be done only by qualified personnel.
- Disconnect supply before working on the valve.
- It is not permitted to work on the valve body and to exchange the actuator as long as
the valves are subjected to pressure and temperature.
The mounting site should be easily accessible and have sufficient clearance for maintenance
and for removing the actuator. Ensure that the pipe line axes are flush and connection flanges
are parallel. Provide suitable measures to absorb possible tensile and pressure forces.
The valve must not serve as a fixed point. It must be carried by the piping.
Clean pipelines thoroughly prior to installing the control valves in order to avoid damage through
residual installation material, welding beads or forging scale. If possible, provide a dirt trap
in front of each control valve.
Installation position should be vertical to horizontal. Ensure that the installation direction is
correct (directional arrows of the flow on the valve housing). Observe a 10 x DN spacing
to flanges, elbows, etc., to avoid an impaired valve function.
Regard the permitted max. operating pressure and temperatur as described in the
corresponding valve specification sheet.
Observe the ambient temperature limits (-20...+60°C), if necessary, provide a drive heater
at lower temperatures, and for higher temperatures insulate the pipeline, provide conductive
plates or cooling possibilities.
Retighten the screws of all flange connections (also lid and connection piece flanges) prior
to commissioning/start-up and following initial heat-up.
Electrical connection:
Check supply voltage according to the rating plate, loosen screws on the motor hood
and remove hood
Route signal and control lines separately from high-voltage lines, if necessary, run in
screened cables. Insert cables (1.5 mm²) through a wringing nipple or cable screw
connection.
Perform electrical connection with the supply voltage switched off according to the
connection diagram (observe VDE and EVU regulations).
In the event of deviations, the connection diagram in the motor hood has precedence
Maintenance:
Following the initial temperature and pressure load, retighten the screws of all flange connections
(also lid and connection piece flanges), the valve cone should be located in the centre.
Attention! Never loosen the lid and flange screws as long as the fittings are subjected
to pressure and temperature.
Protect valve spindle against soiling, if necessary, clean and grease lightly in order to protect
stuffing boxes and deflector hoods against increased wear.
Retighten stuffing box seals slightly in the event of leaks.
No further maintenance work is required for fittings with deflector hoods or bellows.
Undertake maintenance on the drive in accordance with the corresponding information in the
separate operating instructions.
data subject to alteration 4BA-E.DOC / 0210525

n
c
e
s
g
E
w
A
iar:lc
ie
s
to
r
Electric actuator 4e1 4e1... E

Page 1 of 2
Electric actuator for valves

with integrated manual emergency
Controlling device: 3-point step controller r
Power supply: 230V / 50...60Hz
alternatively: 115V / 50...60Hz (option 49u1)
24V / 50...60Hz (option 49u2)
24V DC (option 49u8)
Thrust: 2000 N
Power input: 10 VA
alternatively: 4000/5500 N / 20 VA
Positioning time: 3,3 s/mm
alternatively: 2,2 s/mm (option 49t12)
Stroke: 41 mm
alternatively: 60 mm (on request)
Protection class: IP 65
Limit switches: 1 changeover switch for each limit position,
load dependent, ratings: 250V / 2A
Mounting position: any, avoid hanging position
(damaging by effluent media possible)
Max. ambient temperature: -15...60° C
Accessories, special designs:

Add. load dependent signal switches (see page 49e)
Add. travel dependent signal switches (see page 49w)
Feedback potentiometer (see page 49f)
Integrated positioner (see page 49sr)
Order text:
Electric actuator, thrust . . ., power supply . . .,
pos. time . . ., mounting rod lenght . . .,
List-No. 4e1 . . .
List-No. Thrust Mounting rod* Pos.time Weight

N mm s/mm kg
4e1134 1500 195 3,3 6
4e1230 2000 200 3,3 6
4e1231 2000 218 3,3 6
4e1232 2000 231 3,3 6
4e1235 2000 250 3,3 6
4e1430 4000 200 3,3 7
4e1431 4000 218 3,3 7
4e1432 4000 231 3,3 7
4e1435 4000 250 3,3 7
4e1630 5500 200 3,3 7
4e1631 5500 218 3,3 7
4e1632 5500 231 3,3 7
4e1635 5500 250 3,3 7
* = other rod lenghts on request
Electrical wiring: Accessories (optionaly):
Limit switches Potentiometer Signal switches

M load dependent travel dependent
for valve position
DOWN UP
1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 36
N L on 2 = stroke downwards
L on 3 = stroke upwards
data subject to alteration 4e1-1-E.DOC / 0411504
Electric actuator 4e1 4e1... E
Page 2 of 2
153 Space required to

Bonnet remove the bonnet h
Motor
Gear
Limit switch for

valve end position
“down”
H
Terminal bar
Mounting plate with

wiring diagram
Limit switch for

valve end position
“up”
Base plate
Cable bushing
Spring housing
Disc spring unit

A
Spindle
Mounting rod
Stroke
Hand wheel with
blocking lever Cmax
Coupling nut Cmin

100
Screw collar ring
Type Thrust A Cmin Cmax H h G g

N mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
4e1134 1500 195 40 81 146 145 M12 24
4e1230 2000 200 45 86 146 145 M16 32
4e1231 2000 218 63 104 146 145 M16 32
4e1232 2000 231 76 117 146 145 M16 32
4e1235 2000 250 95 136 146 145 M16 32
4e1430 4000 200 45 86 191 190 M16 32
4e1431 4000 218 63 104 191 190 M16 32
4e1432 4000 231 76 117 191 190 M16 32
4e1435 4000 250 95 136 191 190 M16 32
4e1630 5500 200 45 86 191 190 M16 32
4e1631 5500 218 63 104 191 190 M16 32
4e1632 5500 231 76 117 191 190 M16 32
4e1635 5500 250 95 136 191 190 M16 32
data subject to alteration 4e1-2-E.DOC / 0411504
Electric actuator 4e1 B 4e1... E
Operating instructions Page 1 of 2
Attention:
- Adjustment of and work on the actuator may only be done by skilled labour
- Disconnect power supply before removing the cover
- Observe local instructions and terminal diagram
Actuator disassembly: Actuator assembly:

- disconnect supply - lift actuator onto valve connection and secure nuts (18)
- loosen fixing screw (21) (see Fig.1)
(see Fig.1) - tighten (19) coupling nut and fixing screw (21)
- unscrew coupling nut (19) - connect lines acc.to wiring diagram
- unscrew nuts (18) - if necessary, move actuator in both limit positions and
- take off actuator from valve connection adjust stroke indikators (17) on mounting rod
Maintenance: the spindle has to be kept cleen and lubricated, if necessary, lubricate the spindle with
molykote including grease
Limit switches:
Attention! The limit switches work load dependent and turn off automatically when the valve drives in
end position, so that a readjustment, as for travel dependent limit switches, is not necessary
and not allowed. Change of the factory adjustment endangers correct operation, no warranty
will be given and no liability will be accepted in case of damage of the varnish sealing.
If for extraordinary reasons, for instance by previous damages, a readjustment is exceptionally
necessary, the actuator should preferably be sent in for new factory adjustment. Only if this is
exceptionally not possible, a new coarse adjustment can be directly done, with our agreement
and acc. to the following operating instruction.
Special information for actuators with integrated positioner:

No reaction of limit switch can occur when the positioner turns off the actuator to early,
before the valve is in the end position. Don’t readjust limit switch in this case, control
at first adjustment of positioner and correct it if necessary.
Upper limit switch
Add. upper switch

Add. lower switch
Lower limit switch

Lower limit switch
Fig.1
data subject to alteration 4E1_1BE.DOC / 0310522

Electric actuator 4e1 B 4e1... E
Operating instructions Page 2 of 2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
detail X
14
15
16
17
19
20
X
18
Fig.2
No. Designation Part-No.

01 Bonnet: 2kN / 4kN e3h136 / e3h180
02 Motor 230V / 50/60Hz: 2kN / 4kN*** e2m220 / e2m220.4
02a Capacitor: 2kN / 4kN e2k033 / e2k068
03 Gear: pos. speed 3,3s/mm / pos. speed 2,2s/mm e2g1875 / e2g1250
04 Limit switch for spindle position "down" eheo
05 Mounting plate for motor e3zp
06 Terminal bar e6k12
07 Gear wheel e3zr75
08 Mounting plate with wiring diagram e3hb
09 Limit switch for spindle position "up" eheu
10 Base plate e3gp
11 Screw-type cable bushing PG11 e1kv11
12 Spring housing e3fg
13 Set of disc springs e5ft355+e5fs335
14 Spindle e3s
15 Mounting rods e3s... / e3s...n
16 Hand wheel with blocking lever ehhr
17 Stroke indicator e5ak
18 Hexagonal nut M16 e8mv16
19 Coupling nut e5vk
20 Screw collar ring e3sr...
*** = only for standard actuator: voltage 230V / 50/60Hz
data subject to alteration 4E1_2BE.DOC / 0310522

Parts list vg21-t E
Control valve in two way form, type 21, GGG-40.3, PN16/25 Page 1 of 2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
No. Designation Part-No.

01 Screw joint with scaper 6a21dv..
02 Gasket 6a21sd..
03 V-rings 6a21dm
04 Mounting bonnet 6a21vd..
05 Guiding bush 6a21gb
06 Spring 6a21f
07 Studs with hexagon nuts 6a21ss..
08 Gasket 6a21dd..
09 Plug with spindle 6a21ks..
10 Seat ring 6a21s..
11 Valve body 6a21vg..
data subject to alteration Vg21-te.doc / 0104518

Replacing of the PTFE-V-ring unit B vg31-badm E
Control valve body in 3-way-form type 31
(((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((
01
02 Screw joint complete
03
04
05
06
A AB
%+30)*/1- 2, 5.+ $&#"!’!4/1- 61/5

(8 :.95*,. <1. +.558? ;.*5 2< 2; 78< 7.,.;;*:@ <8 :.68>. <1. ,87<:85 >*5>. /:86 <1. 929.527.
)& ;CKMSC QFC ?AQR?QMO$ RLPAOCT QFC AMJJ?O OGLE DOMK QFC S?JSC PNGLBJC !()" ?LB OCKMSC
QFC AMRNJGLE LRQ ?LB QFC JMAIGLE LRQ GD LCACPP?OU
*& =LPAOCT QFC PAOCT HMGLQ !(*"
+& :RJJ MRQ QFC ERGBGLE @RPF !(." ?LB >%OGLE RLGQ !(-" DOMK QFC PAOCT HMGLQ !(*" MO DOMK KMR
@MLLCQ !(," GD LCACPP?OU
4 87 < -*6*0. <1. 27;2-. ?*55 8/ <1. ;,:.? 3827<!
,& 3JC?L QFC spindle (01) if necessary
Dameged spindle must also be replaced a new V-ring unit will soon start leaking again with
a damaged spindle!
&% :RQthe V-ring unit (05) ?LB QFC ERGBGLE @RPF !(." GLQM QFC PAOCT HMGLQ !(*"
7 *4. ;=:. <1*< <1. 9*:<; *:. 27;<*55.- 27 <1. ,8::.,< 8:-.: *7- 98;2<287 ";.. -:*?270 *+8>.#!
.& Replace the gasket (03)
/& :RQ PAOCT HMGLQ RLGQ !(*#(+#(-#(." GLQM QFC KMRLQGLE @MLLCQ$
’*4. ;=:. <1*< <1. )$:270; *:. 78< -*6.0*- <1:8=01 <1. ;927-5.$<1:.*-!
0& <AOCT ML QFC PAOCT HMGLQ !(*" ?LB QGEFQCL GQ !V).( 8K"
B?Q? PR@HCAQ QM ?JQCO?QGML >6+)%2147%5&493 ’ (-()-*-

industry controller KFM 92 / KFM 93 B 9200 E
operating instructions Page 1 of 8
1
1 Digital display actual value
2 2nd digital display (if aktive) 3
2
3 LED-display relais function
4 Key for setpoint and parameter mode
5 Setpoint adjustment 6
6 Parameter mode lock switch (back face)
4 5
DIN-certificate: TR (TW) 949 ..
Brief description:
KFM 92 is a microprozessor based industry controller series in panel mounting- format 96 x 96 mm.
Design and operating elements are especially devised for easy and convenient handling and operation.
An assembly system renders possible the simple basic version as well as a plurality of variants with
up to 8 relays, several digital and analog out- and inputs and other additional devices.
Types: Inputs:
(depending on configuration*): type: max. 4 measuring inputs, type suffix
indicator 9201. acc. to sub-type:
one stage controller 9210. Pt100 DIN, 0...400°C none (or 0)
two stage controller 9220. Pt100 DIN, 0...100°C 1.
heating / cooling controller 9230. thermo couple Ni Cr NI (type K)0...1200°C n.
positioner / follow-up controller 9240. thermo couple Fe Cu NI (type J)0... 900°C f.
two- point- PID controller 9250. thermo couple Pt Rh Pt (type S)0...1700°C p.
three- point- PID controller 9260. feedback device 0...100 up to 1000 Ω w.
three- point- step controller 9270. standard signal 0(4)...20mA, 0(2)...10V e.
continuous controller 9280. combined input Pt100 / standard signal q.
continuous controller, 2 outputs 9281. Ranges:
Sub-types: suffix (*) Pt 100: 0...400°C, switchable to °F, optional: other
basic function .0 ranges; for standard signal range adjustable -999 to
basic function + 1 additional contact .1 4000. Setpoint ranges can be limited by menu
basic function + 2 additional contacts .2 Displays:
2 x basic function .3 2 four- figured digital displays, decimal point
extension: logik output ..L adjustable, upper display: actual value, lower
function extensions suffix (*) display: other selectable data,
cascade controller 991k up to 8 LEDs for relays function display.
program controller 991p Display of function:
ramp set point value 991r Hold down the P-key for more than 5 sec
step controller 991t to get a short-cut message of the configured function on
the display (=position 3-5 of list number)
Additional devices: (*) (in case of locked parameter mode only ).
additional analog inputs (99) a Measuring line monitoring:
external set value incl. switch-over (99) bwa Display "Err 1...4" in case of measuring line fault
second set value incl. switch-over (99) bwz and adjustable safety shut down of all outputs
binary input to switch special functions (99) b..
additional switching contacts (99) f.. Outputs:
analog signal outputs (99) o. up to 8 relays with potential free change over switch,
serial interface RS 232/485 (99) s. as control outputs or as additional contacts,
interface Profibus, Interbus S, other (99) sp/si. capacity: 250V 2A,
incl. spark extinction (for normally open contacts)
* In case of more than 1 extension there is at the 1-2 continuous outputs 0/4...20mA, 0/2...10V as
data plate only once '99' , f.e. 92700-99aw-ogx-rü. control or signal outputs(apparent ohmic load 500 Ω)
For more information see corresponding data sheets.'
data subjects to alteration 9200e1.doc / 0510208
Industry controller type KFM 9... B 9... E
Installation and connection Page 2 of 8
Installation:
Before installation inspect the controller for any visible signs of damage caused during transport
Check power supply acc. to name plate.
Push the housing from the front into the DIN - panel cut-out and secure from behind with the
fastening devices supplied.
Electrical wiring:
Plug bar on the back face of the controller; connect up the controller at the rear following the
wiring diagram; wire cross section max. 1,5 mm 2
- To avoid cross interference all low voltage measuring lines and pilot wires must be encased
in a shielded cable (the shielding must be earthed one -sided).
- The control leads must be fused externally to protect the output relays.
- Phase wire and neutral wire must not be transposed.
Putting into operation:

Switch on power supply. Digital display and control lamps will light up according to
the setpoint after some seconds. If nothing happens check the fine -wire fuse on the back panel
of the controller and the electrical wiring. Adjust set value and check other adjustments.
Maintenance:
All electronic controllers in the KFM range are virtually maintenance -free. Provided that the
controller is correctly installed and put into operation and is protected against mechanical
damage and inadmissible operating conditions, it should give years of trouble -free service.
In case of faults repair work by the customer should be restricted to the externally accessible
leads and connections and components the customer is expressly permitted to deal with himself.
(bridge circuits, fuses).
All further work, especially on internal components will terminate warranty, makes subsequent
inspection and fault repair more difficult and can cause considerable damage to the circuitry.
For repair remittance remove plug board with connected leads on the rear side,
loosen fastening devices and remove controller from the panel.
In case of remittance please give precise details of the fault to reduce t ime and cost of repair.
Error messages:
Err 1...6 Fault on measuring input nr. ...
check measuring lines for short circuit or breakage
check measuring input by connecting a RTD
Err 55 Fault on loading the parameter;
press any key, the controller sta rts in emergency operation mode,
configuration of the parameters has to be checked
Err 50 Hardware error in program section
Err 52 Hardware error in data section
no further operation possible, remit controller for repair
Error messages during self adaptation:

Err 202 Ambient conditions are not suitable for self adaptation;
adjust parameter manually
Err 205 routine exceeded the setpoint
raise setpoint or lower actual value and start adaptation again
Err 206 Fault on measuring input during adaptation;
check the wiring and start adaptation again
data subjects to alteration 9_E2.DOC /0010803

Operation Page 3 of 8
Operating status:
The upper display shows the actual value (channel / measuring input 1),
the lower display remains empty or (depending on the version and settings) shows
- the attendant unit of measure (°C, °F, %...)
- an additional actual value, the setpoint value or the controller output value Y
- or the additional actual value only when the key is pressed.
Alternative type:
switch over the upper display to the several actual values by pressing the key,,
the lower display shows the number of the attendant measuring input.
Setpoint value setting:
press - key shortly (do not hold down)
The upper display shows the abbreviation of

the activated setpoint adjustment mode,
the lower display shows the adjusted value.
The indicated value can now be changed by the (lower) and (higher) -keys..
Each variation of the set value is immediately active, without any more operating steps.
The arrow keys have a built-in accelerator mode:
longer pressing causes faster alterations.
Return to operating level:

Press - key shortly (or automatically after 30 seconds without any key-action)
optional: Press - key shortly again: *SP =set values of further control loops (*=no.) /
SP* =further set values of the control loop / SPE =external setpoint (display mode only);
flashing display signifies that the function is not active at the moment.
Manual operation: (optional)
Hold down - key and press - key, then release both keys..
(optional: switch on and off using separate - key)
(for multi-channel controllers first enter the channel number*,
and press - key, then:)
The lower diplay shows „H *“ and - if activated - the output position.

The upper display still shows the actual value. The automatic control is interrupted.
Manual control is now possible using the ... - keys..
Return to operating level only by pressing the - key (if present: the - key) .
(no automatic return from the manual mode)
optional: starting the self adaptation (ref. to chapter Optimization):

On manual operation level - key >5 sec ;
the lower display indicates „-Ad-“.
Cancel: - key >5 sec again
data subjects to alteration 9_E2.DOC /0010803

Parameter level Page 4 of 8
Access from operating level.
Unlock the access first:

Turn the switch on the rear panel of the controller to position „U“ = unlocked
(Lock access after the adjustments: Switch position to „L“ = locked).
After the parameter level (refer to the instructions to each level ) has been invoked,
the first setting is shown and can be modified.
It is not possible to invoke the parameter level when the switch is locked .
In this case the display shows the abbreviation of the configured controller type.
Confirm the entry and / or move on to next parameter:

press the -key briefly
Settings in detail:
(not available on all types)
Level 1: Invoke: Hold down the - key for more than 5 sec.
until the display changes factory setting: notes:
CH channel selection (no.) for multi-channel controller (only)

*P proportional range Xp (%) (ref. to chapter „Optimization“) 25,0 ___
*I integral action time Tn (min) (ref. to chapter „Optimization“) 7,0 ___
*d rate time Tv (min) (ref. to chapter „Optimization“) 0,2 ___
*Sh sensitivity of response Xsh (%) 0,1 ___
*SA.. switching interval (absolut value) for following (additional) contact no... 5,0* ___
SP.. set point for independent additional contact no... 0,0 ___
*Sd.. switching difference for additional contact no... 3,0 ___
(*201,701/SA3:10,0)
Return to operating status:
Briefly press the - key (or automatically after 30 sec.)
Level 2: Invoke: Hold down - key and press - key, y,

hold down both keys for more than 5 sec. until display changes.
Unit switch-over the displayunit (°C / °F) C ___
*bLo/*bHI start / end of display range for voltage- / current -input (only) # ___
*ELo/*EHI start / end of range for external setpoint (only), referring to signal # ___
*SLo/*SHI start / end of range for signal output (only), referring to signal # ___
nSt modification of decimal point characters (0 / 1 / 2) 0 ___
*Lo / *HI start / end of setpoint range (°C /°F or value) # ___
dSPL select display function for lower display (AUS / SP / Y / IST2) AUS ___
(AUS = off, SP = setpoint, Y = output, Ist2 = actual value of channel / measuring input 2)
Return to operating status:
Briefly press the - key (or automatically after 30 sec.)
* = channel no. in case of multiple measuring inputs or control loops. # = acc. to range
data subjects to alteration 9_E4.DOC / 9910414

Optimization Page 5 of 8
1. manual optimization
An optimum adaptation of the control parameters (P,I,D) is necessary in order to balance
an appearing deviation as quickly, non-oscillating and exactly as possible,
according to the given operating conditions.
Generally these adjustments require a lot of professional knowledge that cannot be replaced
by this brief information.
The following informations are for help purpose only:
P = proportional band Xp (%):
lower value = longer impulses, more sensitive reaction
higher value = shorter impulses, less sensitive reaction
Examples: - Oscillating temperature without distinct initial overshot: Xp too low;
- The setpoint is reached very slowly after initial exceeding: Xp too high.
I = integral action time Tn (min):
lower value= shorter impulse gaps, faster balancing
higher value= longer impulse gaps, slower balancing
Examples: - the set value is reached very slowly without overshooting: Tn too high;
- high initial overshot followed by fading oscillation: Tn too low.
D = rate time Tv (min):
increases the controller reaction in case of fast actual value or setpoint alterations
(adjust only if necessary). Higher values cause higher increase.
2. Self-adaptation
The self-adaptation is an automatic procedure that determines and self-adjusts
the optimum control parameters Xp, Tn and Tv.
Operation, if contained in supply schedule:
(Parameter-safety-switch on the rear panel of the controller has to be unlocked: position „u“)
Check starting assumptions:
Actual value at least 20% below the adjusted set value,(e.g.:heating phase), otherwise first:
Lower actual value adequately by manual operation (position of final control element) (quick circuits)
or increase setpoint adequately, if admissible. (faster procedure for slower circuits)
Call manual operation level: Press - key plus - key (optional: seperate key).
Check controller output: must not be higher than 85% , reduce if necessary.
Start self-adaptation: Hold down - key for more than 5 sec. on manual operation level.
During operation the lower display shows: „-Ad-“,
the upper display still shows permanently the actual value.
Information about computer operation: First the self-adaptation program waits for stabilization
of the actual value according to the given controller output (actual value alteration < 0,1% / min),
then it increases the output signal about 10% or, in case of three- point- step controller operation,
it triggers an output impulse with about 10% of the adjusted regulating time.
The optimum parameters are computed according to the unit- step response.
Cancel: Press - key for more than 5 sec. = return to manual operation level
After successfully finishing the procedure the controller will return automatically
to operating level.
Unsuccessful adaptation ( Display shows error code, ref.to chapter error messages):
Press - key again: Return to manual operation level
eliminate the indicated error
start adaptation again: - key > 5 sec.
or return to operating level: - key shortly

Configuration Page 6 of 8
Access from the operating level.

Unlock the access first: Turn the switch on the rear panel of the controller to position „U“
(= unlocked). It is not possible to configure the controller with locked switch.
(Lock access after the adjustments: Switch position to „L“= locked)
Hold down the - key and press the - key,
y,
hold down both keys for more than 5 sec. until the display changes
Enter the code number (password) ... (1...9999), factory setting: 1

move on to next input: briefly press - key
y
Alternatively: Hold down key after entering code for more than 10 sec.
Possibility to modify code number (optional)
Select control function (type dependent): the displayed ID number for the configured
control function can be changed by pressing the - key..
(Example Type 930K31: choose (92..) 200, 201, 700, 701)
Return to operating level: briefly press the - key

y
or
move on to following adjustments: hold down - key for more than 5 sec.
Note: when switching is continued after a function has been changed, the display will first
flash for several seconds, only then will the controller return to the selected level.
Configurations are displayed in succession (type and design dependent)
and can be changed: ...
(move on to next input: press - key shortly)
factory setting
Ist* correction value to change the controller display (+ / -) 0.0
EinG type of measuring input Pt 100 / DC-signal: „rtd / Iu“ rtd
Ain* type of DC signal for input No.*:rtd/ 0/4-20mA/ 0/2...10V 4...20 mA
(observe different terminal connection I/U) (91..:rtd)
SP 2/E kind of 2nd/ external setpoint: Add/ Sub/ AbS AbS
(adding / subtracting / absolute)
*Y’ ‘ travel time of the actuator „6...600“ (sec.) 60 sec.
*cy’ ‘ switching frequency for 2-point controllers: „2...120“ (sec.) 20 sec.
*out adjusting kind of output signal „0...20/ 4...20(mA)/ 0...10/ 2..10(V)” 4...20 mA
*out adjusting output characteristics direct / inverted „di / in“ in
(for 2 output signals:“in in / in di / di in / di di“)
*td for 2 output signals: deadpoint between output 1 and 2 „0...10%“ 0
AP correction of the output signal operation position 50%
FG A/E automatical adjustment for teletransmitter input (ref. sheet 99ar)
Sou* adjusting type of information signal „0..20/4..20(mA)/0..10/2..10(V)“ 4...20 mA
Sou* adjusting kind of information signal „Ist/Soll..“ (actual/ setp.value) 4...20 mA
(*Sout= signal 1, Sou2= signal 2)
*Y_S behaviour of the output in case of measuring line fault:
relay position:“rel1 / rel2 / AUS“ ( AUS = relays off) rel2(70.),rel1(20.)
continuous output position: „0...100“ (%) 0
reL.. function selection for add. switching contacts :
add. contact 1 (relay-no.*) SoA(701),StA(201)
add. contact 2 (relay-no.*) Su A
select the corresponding measuring input / control circuit CH 1
relay condition in case of measuring line fault: „SiE/SiA“(on/off) Si A
Adr bus adress (adress no.) (for interface equipment only) 5
Return to operating level: briefly press the - key
y again
* = In case of multiple measuring inputs or control loops: relay- or channel number

Facilities for Setting Supplementary Contacts Page 7 of 8
Selectable switching functions (depending on version):

For setting please refer to configuration level under „reL...“
Switching functions for trailing contacts: on
off
Sd Sd
LC A Break contact on either side of setpoint SA SA
(Limit comparator). Relay drops out as
deviation increases (Aus = off) on
of f
LC E Make contact on either side of setpoint Sd
SA SA
Sd
(Limit comparator). Relay picks up as

deviation increases (Ein = on) on
of f
Su A Break contact below setpoint. Relay drops Sd
SA
out as actual value decreases ( Aus = off)
on
Su E Make contact below setpoint. Relay picks of f

Sd
SA
up as actual value decreases ( Ein = on)
on
So A Break contact above setpoint. Relay drops of f
Sd
out as actual value increases ( Aus = off) SA
on
So E Make contact above setpoint. Relay picks
of f
up as actual value increases ( Ein = on) SA
Sd
St A Heating stage below setpoint. Relay on
drops out actual value increases ( Aus = of f

Sd
SA actual v alue
off) SP
(s etpoint)
Switching functions for independent contacts: on
of f
US A Relay drops out with increasing actual Sd
value (Aus = off) on
of f
US E Relay picks up with increasing actual Sd
actual value
value (Ein = on) SP
Switching point
Service function:
Ein/Aus contact is constantly switched on ( Ein) or
off (Aus) respectively
Only for units with program option

Pr A Relay switched off (aus) during SP program level, otherwise switched on
Pr E Relay switched on (ein) during SP program level, otherwise switched off
Special function:
SF6 as SoA but switching point at setpoint, control output around SA below
In each case additional settings follow under "rEL." after the selection is acknowledged (P key)
(depending on version):
Ist./ Y assigned value: actual value no. ... or Y (actuating signal)
CH../.SP.(only) for trailing contacts: assigned control circuit / channel (no.) or
assigned setpoint (1SP., rSP, SP.1, ..)
for independent contacts: assignment of parameter input (channel no..)
"Safety" shut down (in case of measuring line fault):
SI E Relay for "Safety" behaviour in event of measuring circuit error: relay on
SI A Relay for "Safety" behaviour in event of measuring circuit error: relay off

Industry controller 92 E
Technical data Page 8 of 8
Characteristics: stage controller (invers)

Adjustment on parameter level, with lock switch, K2 K1
on
pre adjusted on customer´s demand.
off Sd2 Sd1 actual value
(parameters depending on sub type:)
SA2
Proportional band Xp: 0,1...999,9 % SP
Integral action time Tn: 0,0...999,9 min three- point- step- controller (invers)
Rate time Tv: 0,0...99,9 min K1(+) K2(-)
Sensitivity of response Xsh: 0,1...1,0 % on
Travel time of the actuator Tm: 6...600 sec off actual value
Sh
Switching frequency cy: 2...120 sec
SP
Function characteristics: direct / inverted
Switching interval SA (add. contacts): 0..100,0 K continuous controller
Switching difference Sd: 0,1...100,0 K single output double output
100% Y1
Additional contact functions: AP
in in..
Y2
di di..
As switching interval above and below setpoint or 0%
P ..di
independent adjustable with own setpoint and -100% P1 td td P2
..in
measuring input, switching function adjustable l92-d4990419

(ref. to chapter additional switching contacts)
Other data:
Installation dimensions:
Housing for panel mounting, 96 x 96 mm (type 92..,
93..) or 72 x 144 mm (type 94)
L Power supply: 230VAC +/- 10 %, 48...62Hz
alternative 115 VAC, 48 VAC, 24 VAC, 24 VDC
B +0,8
Power consumption: approx. 14 VA
Protective system DIN 40050: IP54 (terminals IP20)
H +0,8
Permissible ambient temperature: 0...60°C
Nominal temperature: 20°C
Climatic category: KUF to DIN 40050
Relative humidity <= 75 % yearly average,
Form 96x96: L= 150mm, B= 92mm H=92mm no condensation
Form 72x144: L= 170mm, B=168mm H=139mm EMC: refer to EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
Wiring diagram:
(Example, depending on sub type some details can be missed
valid for each delivered controller is the wiring diagram on its casing only)
A927_e59710718
controller electronics
fu se: (+) (-)
2 4 V :T 0 ,5 A
1 1 5 V :T 0 ,2 A
2 3 0 V :T 0 ,1 A
18V / external digital power control logic signal
40mA analog inputs set value inputs supply output outp. output relay outputs
Ist 3 Ist 4 dig 3 dig 4 Y 2 log 2 Sout 2 Rel 5 Rel 6 Rel 7 Rel 8
7 8 9 10 11 12 23 24 25 26 32 31 37 36 41 31 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73
U+ Ist 1 Ist 2 SPE dig 1 dig 2 Y 1 log 1 Sout 1 Rel 1 Rel 2 Rel 3 Rel 4
99 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14 15 19 20 21 22 27 28 29 30 31 35 36 40 31 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
I U L N + + + (protect relay outputs py external fuse 2A)
(L+) (L-)
wiring examples (for input 1 each)

Pt100 Pt100 standard signal "e" standard signal "q" external set value connecting-example
3 wire 2 wire 0/4..20mA 0/2..10V 0/4..20mA 0/2..10V 0/4..20mA 0/2..10V actuator
a92zu_60311202
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 10 3 11 3 13 15 14 15 50 51 52 53 54 55
L
+ - + - + - + - + - + - M
~
open close N
thermo- feedback standard signal incl. feed voltage switch-over optional:

"e" "q" SP active SP2/SPE
couple device power selection 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 1 2 3 99 1 99 10 19 20 19 20 a b c d
- + A S E
230V 1 2 3 4 5
+ - + -
115V RS 232 / 485
data subjects to alteration 9_e8.doc / 0510422

For Sejin Industries,
Danfoss Pressure Switch Model ; KPS 35
Data sheet
Pressure switches and thermostats, type KPS
Description
KPS units are pressure-controlled switches. The KPS series covers most outdoor as well as indoor
The position of the contacts depends on the application requirements.
pressure in the inlet connection and the set KPS pressure switches are suitable for use in alarm
scale value. In this series, special attention has and regulation systems in factories, diesel plant,
been given to meeting important demands compressors, power stations and on board ship.
for:
• a high level of enclosure,
• robust and compact construction,
• resistance to shock and vibration.
Contents Page
KPS pressure switches, description .............................................................................................................................1
Approvals .................................................................................................................................................................................2
Ship approvals ........................................................................................................................................................................2
Survey ........................................................................................................................................................................................2
ISO 9001 quality approval ..................................................................................................................................................2
Technical data and ordering..............................................................................................................................................3
Terminology ........................................................................................................................................................................3-4
Installation ...............................................................................................................................................................................5
Function ....................................................................................................................................................................................6
Dimensions and weight ......................................................................................................................................................7
Accessories ..............................................................................................................................................................................8
KPS thermostats, description .........................................................................................................................................9

Approvals .................................................................................................................................................................................9
Ship approvals ........................................................................................................................................................................9
Technical data and ordering..............................................................................................................................................9
Function ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Electrical connection......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Examples ............................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Dimensions and weight ................................................................................................................................................... 12
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................................... 13
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Data sheet Pressure switches and thermostats, type KPS
Approvals EN 60 947-4-1 Underwriters Laboratories Inc., USA

EN 60 947-5-1 CCC, China Compulsory Certificate
Ship approvals American Bureau of Shipping Registro Italiano Navale, Italy

Germanischer Lloyd, Germany RMRS, Maritime Register of Shipping, Russia
Bureau Veritas, France Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Japan
Includes thermostats with fixed sensor CCS, China Classification Society
and pressure controls with armoured
capillary tube.
Survey Type KPS pressure switches

1. Standard pressure switches
Range Type Further
Pe information
-1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 bar bar page
0 - 2.5 KPS 31 3
0 - 3.5 KPS 33 3
0-8 KPS 35 3
6 - 18 KPS 37 3
10 - 35 KPS 39 3
2. Type KPS pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media
Range Type Further
Pe information
-1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 bar bar page
1 - 10 KPS 43 3
4 - 40 KPS 45 3
6 - 60 KPS 47 3
Range Type Further

Pe information
-50 0 50 100 150 200 200 °C bar page
-10 - 30 KPS 76 9
20 - 60 KPS 77 9
50 - 100 KPS 79 9
70 - 120 KPS 80 9
60 - 150 KPS 81 9
100 - 200 KPS 83 9
ISO 9001 quality approval Danfoss A/S is certificated by BSI in accordance

with international standard ISO 9001. This means
that Danfoss fulfils the international standard in
respect of product development, design, produc-
tion and sale. BSI exercises continuous inspection
to ensure that Danfoss observes the requirements
of the standard and that Danfoss’ own quality
assurance system is maintained at the required
level.
2 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Technical data and ordering 1. Pressure switches

When ordering, please state Setting range Adjustable/ Permissible Max. test
type and code number Pe fixed operating pressure Pressure
Code no. Type
differetial pressure Pe connection
[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]
0 - 2.5 0.1 6 6 G 1/4 060-311066 KPS 31
0 - 2.5 0.1 6 6 G 3/8 A 060-310966 KPS 31
0 - 3.5 0.2 10 10 G 1/4 060-310466 KPS 33
0 - 3.5 0.2 10 10 G 3/8 A 060-310366 KPS 33
0-8 0.4 - 1.5 12 12 G 1/4 060-310566 KPS 35
0-8 0.4 - 1.5 12 12 G 3/8 A 060-310066 KPS 35
0-8 0.4 12 12 G 1/4 060-310866 KPS 35
KPS 31, 33 6 - 18 0.85 - 2.5 22 27 G 1/4 060-310666 KPS 37
6 - 18 0.85 - 2.5 22 27 G 3/8 A 060-310166 KPS 37
10 - 35 2.0 -6 45 53 G 1/4 060-310766 KPS 39
10 - 35 2.0 - 6 45 53 G 3/8 A 060-310266 KPS 39
2. Pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media

Setting Adjustable Permissible Max. test Min. burst
range Pe diff. see also overpres- pressure pressure Pressure
Code no. Type
figs. 1, 2, sure connection
[bar] and 3 [bar] [bar] [bar]
1 - 10 0.7 - 2.8 120 180 240 G 1/4 060-312066 KPS 43
4 - 40 2.2 - 11 120 180 240 G 1/4 060-312166 KPS 45
6 - 60 3.5 - 17 120 180 240 G 1/4 060-312266 KPS 47
KPS 35, 37, 39
Terminology Max. test pressure
Range setting The highest pressure the unit may be subjected
The pressure range within which the unit will give to when, for example, testing the system for leak-
a signal (contact changeover). age.
Therefore, this pressure must not occur as a
Differential recurring system pressure.
The difference between make pressure and break
pressure (see also fig. 8, page 6). Min. bursting pressure
The pressure which the pressure-sensitive
Permissible overpressure element will withstand without leaking.
The highest permanent or recurring pressure the
KPS 43, 45, 47 unit can be loaded with.
A: Range setting
B: Differential scale
C: Obtained
differential
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 3
Switch Ambient temperature

Single pole changeover (SPDT) KPS 31 - 39: –40 to +70 °C
Contact material: Gold-plated silver contact KPS 43 - 47: –25 to +70 °C
Contact load Temperature of medium
(when Au surface is burnt away) KPS 31 - 39: –40 to +100 °C
1. Alternating current: KPS 43 - 47: –25 to +100 °C
Ohmic: 10 A, 440 V, AC-1 For water and seawater, max. 80°C.
Inductive: 6 A, 440 V, AC-3
4 A, 440 V, AC-15 Vibration resistance
Starting current max. 50 A (locked rotor) Vibration-stable in the range 2-30 Hz,
amplitude 1.1 mm og 30-300 Hz, 4 G.
2. Direct current: 12 W, 220 V, DC-13
See curve, fig. 4 Enclosure
IP 67 to IEC 529 and DIN 40050.
The pressure switch housing is enamelled
pressure die cast aluminium (GD-AlSi 12). The
cover is fastened by four screws which are
anchored to prevent loss.
The enclosure can be sealed with wire.
Cable entry
Pg 13.5 for cable diameters from 5 to 14 mm.
Identification
The type designation and code no. of the unit is
stamped in the side of the housing.
Scale accuracy
KPS 31: ±0.2 bar KPS 39: ±3.0 bar
KPS 33: ±0.3 bar KPS 43: ±1.0 bar
KPS 35: ±0.5 bar KPS 45: ±4.0 bar
KPS 37: ±1.0 bar KPS 47: ±6.0 bar
Mean value of snap point variation after
400 000 operations
KPS 31: ±0.1 bar KPS 39: ±0.7 bar
KPS 33: ±0.2 bar KPS 43: ±0.2 bar
KPS 35: ±0.3 bar KPS 45: ±1.0 bar
Fig. 4. d.c.-load KPS 37: ±0.4 bar KPS 47: ±1.5 bar
Curve A gives the maximum load.
Hatched area B: Acceptable load for the gold plating
of the contact.
Materials in contact with the medium
KPS 31, 33 Bellows capsule: Deep-drawn plate, material no. 1.0524 (DIN 1624)
Bellows: Stainless steel,material no. 1.4306 (DIN 17440)
Pressure connection: Steel C20, material no. 1.0420 (DIN 1652)
KPS 35, 37,39 Bellows: Stainless steel, material no. 1.4306 (DIN 17440)
Pressure connection: Brass,W.No. 2.0401 (DIN 17660)
KPS 43, 45, 47 Diaphragm capsule: Nickel-plated brass, DIN 50 968 Cu/Ni 5 (DIN 1756)
Diaphragm: Nitrile-Butadien rubber
4 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Installation Installation Setting

KPS pressure switches are fitted with a 3 mm steel When the pressure switch cover is removed, and
mounting plate. The units should not be allowed the locking screw (5) is loosened, the range can
to hang from the pressure connection. be set with the spindle (1) while at the same time
the scale (2) is being read. In units having an ad-
Pressure connection justable differential, the spindle (3) must be used
When fitting or removing pressure lines, the to make the adjustment. The differential obtained
spanner flats on the pressure connection should can be read direct on the scale (4) or, with types
be used to apply counter-torque. KPS 43, 45, 47, can be determined by reading the
scale value and using the nomograms in figs. 1, 2,
Steam plant 3 (page 3). The working line for determining the
To protect the pressure element from excessive differential must not intersect the shaded areas in
heat, the insertion of a water-filled loop is the nomograms.
recommended. The loop can, for example, be
made of 10 mm copper tube as shown in fig. 5.
1. Range spindle
2. Range scale
3. Differential spindle
4. Differential scale
Fig. 6 5. Locking screw
Selection of differential
To ensure that the plant functions properly, a
suitable differential pressure is necessary.
Fig. 5 Too small a differential will give rise to short
running periods with a risk of hunting. Too high
a differential will result in large pressure
Water systems oscillations.
Water in the pressure element is not harmful, but
if frost is likely to occur a water-filled pressure Electrical connection
element may burst. To prevent this happening, KPS pressure switches are fitted with a
the pressure control can be allowed to operate Pg 13.5 screwed cable entry that is suitable for
on an air cushion. cable diameters from 5 to 14 mm.
Contact function is shown in fig. 7.
Media-resistance
See table of materials in contact with the
medium, page 4. If seawater is involved, types
KPS 43, 45, 47 are recommended.
Pulsations
If the pressure medium is superimposed with
severe pulsations, which occur in automatic
sprinkler systems (fire protection), fuel systems
for diesel motors (priming lines), and hydraulic
systems (e.g. propeller systems), etc., types Fig. 7
KPS 43,45,47 are recommended. The maximum
permissible pulsation level for these types is
120 bar.
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 5
Function 1. KPS 31 I. Alarm for falling pressure given at the set

Contacts 1-2 make and contacts 1-4 break when range value.
the pressure falls under the set range value. The II. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set
contacts changeover to their initial position when range value plus the differential.
the pressure again rises to the set range value
plus the differential (see fig. 8).
Scale setting
Mechanical
differential
Fig. 8
2. All other KPS pressure switches I. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set
Contacts 1-4 make and contacts 1-2 break when range value.
the pressure rises above the set range value. The II. Alarm for falling pressure given at the set
contacts changeover to their initial position when range value minus the differential.
the pressure again fails to the range value minus
the differential (see fig. 9).
Scale setting
Mechanical
differential
Fig. 9
Example 1 Choose a KPS 45 (range 4 to 40 bar).

An alarm must be given when the lubricating oil The range value must be set at 36 bar.
pressure in a motor fails below 0.8 bar. The alarm is The differential of 6 bar must be set in accordance with
in the form of a lamp. the nomogram, fig. 10, at approx. 2 on the differential
Choose a KPS 31 (range 0 to 2.5 bar). scale.
The minimum permissible lubricating oil pressure of The required start function is obtained by connection to
0.8 bar must be set on the range spindle. terminals 1 and 2 in the pressure control.
The differential is fixed at 0.1 bar, i.e. the alarm will
not cut out before the pressure rises to 0.9 bar. The
lamp must be connected to terminals 1 and 2 in the
pressure control.
Example 2
An alarm must be given by a bell when the pressure
in a boiler rises to 10 bar. The normal operating pres-
sure is 9 bar.
Choose a KPS 36 (range from 6 to 18 bar).
The range value of the pressure control must be set
at 10 bar, the differential at 1 bar.
The bell must be connected to terminals 1 and 4.
Example 3
The pressure in a start air reservoir must be
regulated with a compressor controlled by a KPS
pressure switch so that it lies between 30 and 36 bar.
6 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Dimensions and weight
Weight:
KPS 31 - 39 approx. 1.0 kg
KPS 43 - 47 approx. 1.3 kg
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 7
Accessories Part Description Code no.

G 3/8 connector, nipple and washer
Connector with
(10 mm) o.d. x 6.5 mm i.d.), for braz- 017-436866
nipple
ing
Connector with G 3/8 connector, nipple and washer
017-422966
nipple (10 mm o.d. x 6.5 mm i.d.) for welding
G 3/8 x 7/16 - 20 UNF (1/4 flare)

Reducer 017-420566
reduction with washer
Adapter G 3/8 x 1/8 - 27 NPT with washer 060-333466
Nipple G 3/8 o.d x 7/16 - 20 UNF (1/4 flare) 060-324066
Nipple G 3/8 A - 1/4 NPT with washer 060-333566
Adapter G 3/8 x 1/4 - 18 NPT with washer 060-333666
G 1/4 A x G 3/8 A 060-333266

Nipple
G 1/4 A x o.d. M10 x 1 with washer 060-333866
Damping coil with 1/4 flare
connectors and 1 m copper capillary
tube. Damping coils used for applica-
060-007166
Damping coil tions with 3/8 RG
connector requires the use of reducer.
For informations about capillary tube
lengths, please contact Danfoss
Damping coil with G 3/8 connectors 060-104766

Damping coil
and 1.5 m copper capillary tube
Damping coil with G 3/8 connectors

Armoured and 1 m armoured copper capillary
060-333366
damping coil tube.
Standard washers included.
8 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Thermostats KPS thermostats are temperature-controlled The KPS series covers most outdoor as well as
switches. The position of the contacts depends indoor application requirements.
Description on the temperature of the sensor and the set
scale value. In this series, special attention has KPS thermostats are suitable for use in monitoring,
been given to meeting demands for : alarm and regulation systems in factories, diesel
• a high level of enclosure, plant, compressors, power stations and on board
• robust and compact construction, ship.
• resistance to shock and vibration.
Approvals EN 60 947-4-1 CCC, China Compulsory Certificate

EN 60 947-5-1 Underwriters Laboratories Inc., USA
Ship approvals Det norske Veritas, Norway Registro Italiano Navale, Italy
American Bureau of Shipping RMRS, Maritime Register of Shipping, Russia
Lloyds Register of Shipping, UK Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Japan
Germanischer Lloyd, Germany CCS, China Classification Society
Bureau Veritas, France
Includes thermostats with fixed sensor and
pressure controls with armoured capillary tube.
Technical data and ordering When ordering, please state type and code number
Setting Mech. Max. Suitable sensor length Cap. Code no.
range diff. sensor see also “Accessories” tube
adjust- temp. length
able/
fixed
Type
°C °C °C mm m
-10 - 30 3 - 10 80 65 75 110 160 2 060L311266 060L311366 KPS 76
20 - 60 3 - 14 130 - 75 - - - 060L311866 KPS 77
20 - 60 3 - 14 130 - - 110 - - 060L310066 KPS 77
20 - 60 3 - 14 130 - - - 160 - 060L313666 KPS 77
20 - 60 3 - 14 130 65 75 110 160 2 060L310166 060L310266 KPS 77
20 - 60 3 - 14 130 - - 110 160 5 060L311966 060L312066 KPS 77
KPS with rigid sensor 50 - 100 4 - 16 200 - 75 - - - 060L312166 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 - - 110 - - 060L310366 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 - - - 160 - 060L313766 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 65 75 110 160 2 060L310466 060L310566 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 - - 110 160 5 060L312266 060L312366 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 - - 110 160 8 060L312466 060L312566 KPS 79
50 - 100 4 - 16 200 65 75 110 160 3 060L314366 KPS 79
50 - 100 9 200 - 75 - - - 060L3141661) KPS 79
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - 75 - - - 060L312666 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - - 110 - - 060L312766 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - - - 160 - 060L313866 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - - - 200 - 060L315766 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 65 75 110 160 2 060L312866 060L312966 KPS 80
KPS with remote sensor 70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 65 75 110 160 3 060L315666 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - - 110 160 5 060L313066 060L313166 KPS 80
70 - 120 4.5 - 18 220 - - 110 160 8 060L313266 060L313366 KPS 80
60 - 150 5 - 25 250 65 75 110 160 2 060L310666 060L310766 KPS 81
60 - 150 5 - 25 250 - - 110 160 5 060L313466 060L313566 KPS 81
60 - 150 5 - 25 250 - - 110 160 8 060L311166 KPS 81
60 - 150 5 - 25 250 - - 200 - - 060L311066 KPS 81
100 - 200 6.5 - 30 300 65 75 110 160 2 060L310866 060L310966 KPS 83
100 - 200 18 300 65 75 110 160 2 060L3139661) KPS 83
1)
Thermostat with max. reset
KPS with remote sensor and

armoured capillary tube
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 9
Contact load (Alternating current):

(when Au surface is burned away)
Ohmic: 10 A, 440 V, AC-1
Inductive: 6 A, 440 V, AC-3
4 A, 440 V, AC-15
Starting current max. 50 A (locked rotor)
Ambient temperature –40 to +70 °C
Vibration resistance
Vibration-stable in the range 2-30 Hz, amplitude
1.1 mm og 30-300 Hz, 4 G.
Enclosure
IP 67 to IEC 529 and DIN 40050.
The thermostat housing is enamelled pressure
die cast aluminium (GID-AlSI 12). The cover is
fastened by four screws which are anchored to
prevent loss.
The enclosure can be sealed with fuse wire.
Cable entry
Pg 13.5 for cable diameters from 5 to 14 mm.
Identification
The type designation and code no. of the unit is
stamped in the side of the housing.
Fig. 1
Curve A gives the maximum load.
Hatched area B: Acceptable load for the gold Scale accuracy
plating of the contact.
KPS 76: ±3 °C KPS 80: ±3 °C
KPS 77: ±3 °C KPS 81: ±6 °C
Switch KPS 79: ±3 °C KPS 83: ±6 °C
Single-pole changeover switch (SPDT).
Contact material: Gold-plated silver contact. Snap point variation after 400 000 operations.
Direct current: 12 W, 220 V, DC-13 – See fig. 1 KPS 76-83: max. drift 2 °C.
Function Selection of differential The thermal differential is always greater than

To ensure that the plant functions properly, a the mechanical differential and depends on three
suitable differential is necessary. Too small a dif- factors:
ferential will give rise to short running periods 1) the flow velocity of the medium,
with a risk of hunting. Too high a differential will 2) the temperature change rate of the medium,
result in large temperature variations and
3) the heat transmission to the sensor
Differentials
The mechanical differential is the differential that Thermostat function
is set by the differential spindle in the thermostat. Contacts 1-4 make while contacts 1-2 break when
The thermal differential (operating differential) is the temperature rises above the scale setting. The
the differential the system operates on. contacts changeover to their initial position when
the temperature falls to the scale setting minus
the differential. See fig. 6.
I. Alarm for rising temperature

given at range setting value.
II. Alarm for falling temperature
given at range setting value
minus the differential.
Scale setting
Mechanical
differerential
Fig. 6
10 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Installation Installation Flow velocity of the medium is also of signifi-

Location of unit: KPS thermostats are designed to cance. (The optimum flow velocity for liquids is
withstand the shocks that occur, e.g. in ships, on about 0.3 m/s).
compressors and in large machine installations. For permissible media pressure see fig. 2.
KPS thermostats with remote sensor are fitted
Brass Stainless steel
with a base of 3 mm steel plate for fixing to
bulkheads, etc. KPS thermostats with bulb sensor
are self-supporting from the sensor pocket.
Resistance to media
Material specifications for sensor pockets:
Sensor pocket, brass

The tube is made of Ms 72 to DIN 17660, the
threaded portion of So Ms 58Pb to DIN 17661.
Fig. 2. Permissible media pressure on the
sensor pocket as a function of temperature
Sensor pocket, stainless steel 18/8
Material designation 1.4305 to DIN 17440. Setting
When the thermostat cover is removed, and the
Sensor position locking screw (5, fig. 3) is loosened, the range can
As far as possible the sensor should be positioned be set with the spindle (1) while at the same time
so that its longitudinal axis is at right angles to the scale (2) is being read.
the direction of flow. The active part of the sensor In units having an adjustable differential, the
is Ø13 mm x 50 mm long on thermostats with spindle (3) can be used while the scale (4) is
rigid sensors and 2 m capillary tube. The active being read.
length on the other thermostats is 70 mm (5 m
and 8 m capillary tubes). 1. Range
spindle
The medium 2. Range
The fastest reaction is obtained from a medium scale
having high specific heat and high thermal 3. Differential
spindle
conductivity. It is therefore advantageous to use
4. Differential
a medium that fulfills these conditions (provided scale
there is a choice). 5. Locking
screw
Fig. 3
Scale correction
The sensor on KPS thermostats contains an Scale deviation factor
adsorption charge. Therefore function is not affected
whether the sensor is placed warmer or colder than
the remaining part of the thermostatic element
(bellows and capillary tube). However, such a charge
is to some extent sensitive to changes in the
temperature and bellows and capillary tube.
Under normal conditions this is of no importance, Relative
but if the thermostat is to be used in extreme scale
setting
ambient temperatures there will be a scale
in %
deviation. The deviation can be compensated for as
follows:
Scale correction = Z x a
Z can be found from fig. 4, while a is the correction
factor from the table below.
Regulation Correction factor a

range for thermostats
Type with rigid with 2 and with 8 m
sensor 5 m cap. cap. tube Fig. 4
°C tube
KPS 76 -10 - +30 1.1
KPS 77 20 - 60 1.0 1.4
KPS 79 50 - 100 1.5 2.2 2.9
KPS 80 70 - 120 1.7 2.4 3.1
KPS 81 60 - 150 3.7
KPS 83 100 - 200 6.2
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 11
Electrical connection KPS thermostats are fitted with a Pg 13.5 screwed

cable entry suitable for cables from 5 to 14 mm.
Contact function is shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 5
Examples Example 1 Example 2

A diesel engine with cooling water temperature Find the necessary scale correction for a KPS 80
of 85 °C (normal). An alarm must be triggered if set at 95 °C in 50 °C ambient temperature.
the cooling water temperature exceeds 95 °C.
Choose a KPS 80 thermostat (range 70 to 120 °C). The relative scale setting Z can be calculated
Main spindle setting: 95 °C. from the following formula:
Differential spindle setting: 5 °C.
The required alarm function is obtained by Setting value – min. scale value x 100 = %
connecting to thermostat terminals 1-4. After max. scale value – min. scale value
the system has been in operation, assess the
operating differential and make a correction if Relative scale setting: 95 – 70 x100 = 50%
necessary. 120 – 70
Factor for scale deviation Z (fig. 4 page 11),

Z ≅ 0.7
Correction factor a (table under fig. 4
page 11) = 2.4
Scale correction = Z × a = 0.7 × 2.4 = 1.7 °C

The KPS must be set at 95 + 1.7 = 96.7 °C
Dimensions and weight
Sensor pocket Sensor

length “A” length ” L”
75 105
110 138
160 190
200 230
KPS with remote sensor KPS with remote sensor and armoured KPS with rigid sensor
Weight: ca 1.2 kg capillary tube Weight: ca 1.0 kg
(incl. 2 m capillary tube) Weight : ca 1.4 kg (incl. 2 m capillary tube)
12 IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981
Accessories: Sensor pockets Sensor A Thread Code no. Sensor A Thread Code no.
for KPS thermostats pocket mm B pocket m B
Brass 65 1/2 NPT 060L326566
Brass 75 1/2 NPT 060L326466 Steel 18/8 75 G 1/2A 060L326766
75 G 1/2 A 060L326266
75 G 3/8 A 060L326666
75 G 1/2 A (ISO 228/1) 060L328166
Brass 110 1/2 NPT 060L328066 Steel 18/8 110 G 1/2 A 060L326866
110 G 1/2 A 060L327166 110 1/2 NPT 060L327066
110 G 1/2 A (ISO 228/1) 060L340666
110 G 3/4 A (ISO 228/1) 060L340366
Brass 160 G 1/2 A 060L326366 Steel 18/8 160 G 1/2 A 060L326966
160 G 3/4 A (ISO 228/1) 060L340566
Brass 200 G 1/2 A 060L320666 Steel 18(8 200 G 1/2 A 060L323766
200 G 1/2 A (ISO 228/1) 060L340866 200 G 3/4 A 060L323866
200 G 3/4 A (ISO 228/1) 060L340266
Brass 250 G 1/2 A 060L325466
Supplied without gland nut, Brass 330 G 1/2 A 060L325566
gaskets and washer
Brass 400 G 1/2 A 060L325666
Part Description Code no.
For KPS thermostats with remote

Clamping band 017-420466
sensor (L = 392 mm)
For KPS thermostats with sensor fitted in a sensor pocket. Compound for
Heat-conductive
filling sensor pocket to improve heat transfer between pocket and sensor.
compound 041E0114
Application range for compound:between pocket and sensor.
(4.5 cm2 tube)
Application range for compound: –20 to +150 °C, momentarily up to 220°C.
Gasket set For KPS thermostats without armoured capillary tubes 060L327366
Gasket set For KPS thermostats with armoured capillary tubes 060L036666
® Danfoss A/S 05-07/ AC-DSL/mr
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to products
already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed.
All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
IC.PD.P10.C2.02 - 520B2981 13
Ins. No. L-740-14-E
ALTI mass
■ Type U/Sophisticated models: CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA006, CA010, CA015,
CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080, CA100, CA150
■ Type S/Straight tube models: CS010, CS015, CS025, CS040, CS050, CS080
■ Type B/Low price, general purpose models:
CB006, CB010, CB015, CB025, CB040, CB050
■ Transmitter: PA0K
Type U Type S Type B
Type U Type U Type U Separately mounted

Extra low flows Low flows Large size transmitter
Every OVAL product is fabricated, tested, and inspected under stringent quality control before it
leaves our factory.
To derive maximum benefit from the product, we recommend you to be well familiar with the
information and instructions given in this manual before you place it in service and retain this
manual at the field location for ready reference.
1
L--740--14--E
CONTENTS
1. BEFORE YOU BEGIN ............................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Confirming the Tag Information ............................................................................................. 5
1.2 Transportation Guidelines ..................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Storage Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 6
1.4 Precautions for Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 6
1.5 Precautions for Installation Location ..................................................................................... 6
1.6 Returning Equipment ............................................................................................................. 6
2. GENERAL AND FEATURES ................................................................................................ 7
2.1 General Description ............................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Features ................................................................................................................................ 7
3. SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE ........................................................................ 7
3.1 Sensor Unit General Specifications ........................................................................................ 7
3.1.1 Type U sensor unit general specifications ....................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Type S sensor unit general specifications ..................................................................... 11
3.1.3 Type B sensor unit general specifications ..................................................................... 11
3.1.4 Transmitter general specifications .................................................................................. 12
3.2 General Performance ........................................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Type U general performance .......................................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Type S general performance ........................................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Type B general performance ........................................................................................... 16
3.3 Display .................................................................................................................................. 17
3.4 Pressure Losses .................................................................................................................... 18
3.4.1 Type U pressure losses .................................................................................................. 18
3.4.2 Type S pressure losses ................................................................................................... 20
3.4.3 Type B pressure losses ................................................................................................... 21
4. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION..................................................................................... 22
4.1 Type U product codes............................................................................................................ 22
4.2 Type S product codes ............................................................................................................ 23
4.3 Type B product codes ............................................................................................................ 24
5. PART NAMES AND OUTLINE DIMENSIONS .................................................................. 25
5.1 Type U ................................................................................................................................... 25
5.1.1 CA00A, CA001 and CA003 (separately mounted models).............................................. 25
5.1.2 CA006 thru CA080 (integrally mounted models) ............................................................. 26
5.1.3 CA006 thru CA080 (separately mounted models) ........................................................... 28
5.1.4 CA100 and CA150........................................................................................................... 32
5.1.5 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models) ...................................... 32
5.2 Type S ................................................................................................................................... 34
5.2.1 Integrally mounted models .............................................................................................. 34
5.2.2 Separately mounted models ............................................................................................ 34
5.2.3 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models) ...................................... 35
5.3 Type B ................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.1 Integrally mounted models ............................................................................................. 36
5.3.2 Separately mounted models ........................................................................................... 37
5.4 Separately mounted Transmitter ........................................................................................... 38
6. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................... 38
6.1 Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 38
6.2 Physical Orientation .............................................................................................................. 39
6.2.1 Type U physical orientation ............................................................................................ 39
6.2.2 Type S physical orientation.............................................................................................. 40
6.2.3 Type B physical orientation.............................................................................................. 41
6.3 Installation Location ............................................................................................................... 42
6.4 Installation Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 43
6.4.1 Standard piping conditions .............................................................................................. 43
6.4.2 Influence of vibration and pulsation ................................................................................. 44
6.4.3 Prevention of cavitation ................................................................................................... 44
6.4.4 Prevention of excessive flows ......................................................................................... 42
6.4.5 Prevention of gas mixed flows ......................................................................................... 44
6.4.6 Keeping the sensor filled with process liquid ................................................................... 44
6.4.7 Bypass loop ..................................................................................................................... 45

L--740--14--E
6.5 Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 46

6.5.1 Flange type ...................................................................................................................... 46
6.5.2 Sanitary fitting type ......................................................................................................... 47
6.5.3 Screw-in type ................................................................................................................... 47
6.6 Installing Proper Pipe Supports ............................................................................................. 48
6.6.1 Type U pipe supports....................................................................................................... 48
6.6.2 Type S pipe supports ....................................................................................................... 49
6.6.3 Type B pipe supports ....................................................................................................... 49
6.7 Heat and Cold Retention Procedures .................................................................................... 50
6.7.1 Type U ............................................................................................................................. 50
6.7.2 Type S ............................................................................................................................. 51
6.7.3 Type B ............................................................................................................................. 51
6.8 A Boss for Pressure Relief Device - Its Use　 ....................................................................... 52
6.9 Separately mounted Transmitter Installation ......................................................................... 52
6.10 How to Change Transmitter Orientation .............................................................................. 53
6.11 How to Change Transmitter Display Orientation.................................................................. 55
7. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................... 56
7.1 Wiring Connections ............................................................................................................... 56
7.1.1 Cable lead-in .................................................................................................................. 56
7.1.2 Power and output signal connections (both integrally and separately mounted models) .... 57
7.1.3 Connections between separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter .......................... 58
7.2 Power Supply Lines and Ground Terminal ............................................................................ 58
7.3 Analog Output Wiring ............................................................................................................ 58
7.4 Pulse Output Wiring .............................................................................................................. 59
7.5 Status Output Wiring ............................................................................................................. 59
7.6 Status Input Wiring ................................................................................................................ 60
7.7 Communication Line Wiring (option) ..................................................................................... 60
7.8 Recommended Cables for Use in Output Signals ................................................................ 60
7.9 Terminal Identification of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit and Transmitter ......................... 60
7.10 Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................................... 61
7.10.1 Transmitter power and output signal wiring ................................................................... 61
7.10.2 Separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter wiring ................................................ 62
8. OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 64
8.1 Flushing the Piping Assembly ............................................................................................... 64
8.2 Confirming the Sensor Unit for Correct Installation ............................................................... 64
8.3 Leak Check ........................................................................................................................... 64
8.4 Supplying the Power ............................................................................................................. 64
8.5 Measurement Line Startup .................................................................................................... 64
8.6 Warm-up ............................................................................................................................... 64
8.7 Zeroing Procedure ................................................................................................................. 64
8.8 Readying for Operation ......................................................................................................... 64
9. DESCRIPTION OF INCORPORATED FUNCTIONS ....................................................... 65
9.1 Display ................................................................................................................................... 65
9.1.1 Description of display ..................................................................................................... 65
9.1.2 Switch operation .............................................................................................................. 66
9.1.3 Viewing the variables...................................................................................................... 67
9.2 Viewing the Parameters and Description .............................................................................. 69
9.2.1 Viewing the setup menu .................................................................................................. 69
9.2.2 Transition chart of view (1) .............................................................................................. 72
9.3 Parameter Value Entry .......................................................................................................... 82
9.4 Parameter Selection .............................................................................................................. 83
9.5 Password Function ................................................................................................................ 84
9.5.1 Password function setup ................................................................................................. 84
9.6 Self-diagnostic Capabilities ................................................................................................... 85
9.6.1 Probe check..................................................................................................................... 85
9.6.2 Drive coil check ............................................................................................................... 86
9.6.3 Transmitter check ............................................................................................................ 87

L--740--14--E
9.6.4 Pipeline oscillation check (at zero flow) ........................................................................... 88

9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (normal flow) ........................................................................... 89
9.7 Simulated Signal Input/Output Capabilities ........................................................................... 90
9.7.1 Analog output .................................................................................................................. 90
9.7.2 Pulse output.................................................................................................................... 91
9.7.3 Status output ................................................................................................................... 92
9.7.4 Status input...................................................................................................................... 93
9.8 Zeroing Function ................................................................................................................... 94
9.8.1 Through LCD display switches ........................................................................................ 94
9.8.2 Through status input signal ............................................................................................. 95
9.8.3 Through Link Top communication .................................................................................... 95
9.9 Analog Trim Function ............................................................................................................. 96
9.10 Reset Function .................................................................................................................... 97
9.11 View Variables Screen Setup .............................................................................................. 98
9.12 Pulse Output Function ......................................................................................................... 99
9.12.1 Pulse output 1................................................................................................................ 99
9.12.2 Pulse output 2................................................................................................................ 99
9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output ............................................................................................ 100
9.12.4 Double pulse input ....................................................................................................... 101
9.13 Analog Output Function ..................................................................................................... 102
9.14 Status Output Function ...................................................................................................... 103
9.14.1 Status output (Error Status) ......................................................................................... 103
9.14.2 Bidirectional flow direction output (Bi Direction) .......................................................... 103
9.14.3 H/L alarm output (H/L Alarm) ...................................................................................... 104
9.14.4 No assignment (No Function) ..................................................................................... 104
9.15 Status Input Function ........................................................................................................ 104
9.15.1 Pulse/analog output fixed at 0% (0% Sig Lock) .......................................................... 104
9.15.2 Zero adjustment (Auto Zero) ...................................................................................... 105
9.15.3 Totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 1 and 2) ................................................. 105
9.15.4 Totalizer 1 reset (Reset Total 1) .................................................................................. 105
9.15.5 Totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 2) .................................................................................. 106
9.16 High/Low Alarms Function ................................................................................................. 106
9.17 Gas Mixed Flow Alarm ...................................................................................................... 110
9.18 Setup Units List ................................................................................................................. 110
10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................................111
10.1 Error Messages ..................................................................................................................111
10.2 A List of Status Messages ................................................................................................. 112
10.3 Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................ 113
11. EX-INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 113
11.1 Nameplates........................................................................................................................ 113
11.2 System Block Diagram (Control Drawing) ......................................................................... 115
■ Shipping Parameters ................................................................................................................ 116
■ Safety Statement of Returned Goods ....................................................................................... 118
■ Repair Request Sheet............................................................................................................... 119
CONVENTIONS
The signal words NOTE, CAUTION, and WARNING shown below are used throughout this manual
to draw your attention to specific items:
NOTE: Notes are separated from the general text to bring the user's attention to
important information.
CAUTION: Caution statements signal the user about hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage.
WARNING: Warning statements signal the user about hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in severe personal injury or death.

L--740--14--E
1. BEFORE YOU BIGIN

When you received, the sensor and transmitter should be thoroughly inspected for any sign of damage
in appearance by rough handling during transit. Necessary handling precautions are explained in this
section; read the instructions carefully.
For any inquiries, call the sales office from which you purchased the product, or contact
the nearest OVAL representative in our customer service network.
1.1 Confirming the Tag Information

Product code and major ratings appear on the nameplate attached on the side of transmitter. Make sure
that the product you received complies with the specifications in your order.
● Information stated on the product tag

Item Description
MODEL Product model
SERIAL NO. Serial No.
MAX. PRESS. Max. operating pressure
MAX. TEMP. Max. operating temperature
FLOW RANGE Flow range
POWER Power
TAG NO. Instrument No. (only when specified)
BORE Nominal flange size
DATE Date of manufacture
◆ Reminder ◆
When you make inquiries, include the product name, model No., serial No. and other pertinent
information.

L--740--14--E
1.2 Transportation Guidelines

(1) To prevent unexpected problems, transport the product to the installation site using the original
,
manufacturer s packing for shipment if circumstances permit.
(2) Use care to avoid impact shocks, rain and water during transportation.
1.3 Storage Guidelines

If this product is to be stored for long periods of time upon receipt before installation, unexpected
problems can arise. So when long-term storage is anticipated, it is suggested that the following
precautions be taken:
,
(1) Store your product in the manufacturer s original packing used for shipping if possible.
(2) Place of storage should conform to the following requirements:
● Free from rain and water.
● Free from vibration and impact shock.
● At room temperature with minimal temperature and humidity variation.
1.4 Precautions for Operating Conditions

In order to maintain the design metering accuracy and long service life, it is essential that the ratings,
such as the flowrate, pressure, and temperature be held within the specified limits. These operating
conditions are stated in Sections "3. SPECIFICATIONS and PERFORMANCE" (pages 7 thru 16) and "4.
PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION" (pages 22 thru 24) of this manual. Do not fail to make sure of them
before placing the meter in service.
・ If the process fluid is corrosive, the meter materials must be considered for compatibility.
・ Cleanse the interior of flow tube thoroughly after use for measuring fluids that tend to deposit
solids. A flow tube with solid deposits adhering to it can affect the meter accuracy.
・ If you want a change in operating conditions, consult the factory.
・ Some gas-mixed flows that are not homogeneous are not measurable. Consult the factory for
technical assistance in such applications.
1.5 Precautions for Installation Location

CAUTION
To ensure accurate and consistent measurement, the Coriolis flowmeter should be
installed in a location where pipeline oscillation will not exceed 0.3G.
1.6 Returning Equipment

If the meter must be returned to OVAL for any reason, follow these steps to ensure the most efficient
processing.
(1) Clean the unit and flush out the tubes without fail and pack the sensor unit carefully. Fully document
the fluid. Inadequate information will delay handling of the meter. (⇒ Fill in the forms prepared on
pages 118 and 119.)
(2) Enclose complete information about the material being returned including model and serial
number, the reason for return, return address, and full documentation of the type of fluid.
(3) Pack the equipment carefully, using the original packing if possible.
(4) Return the complete flowmeter, including the separately electronics unit with all of the circuit boards
and associated parts.
Remove the conduit connections and all other parts not originally shipped with the meter.
(example: wiring connections)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to remove the accumulation of foreign matter on the inner walls of the sensor
unit completely. Because the sensor unit cannot be disassembled, OVAL will not be
able to handle residue inside the tubes and service your meter.

L--740--14--E
2. GENERAL AND FEATURES

2.1 General Description
The ALTImass series, consisting of a high performance model Type U, a straight-tube model Type S, and
a low-cost, general purpose model Type B, are Coriolis flowmeters capable of measuring mass flows
directly at a high degree of accuracy. Equipped integrally or separately from the sensor unit is a highly
sophisticated transmitter (self diagnosis feature, large size display, and field reconfiguration capability
using a touch panel).
2.2 Features
1. Increased self-diagnostic capabilities: checking for cable faults, pipeline vibration, and monitoring
transmitter temperatures, to name a few.
2. You can reconfigure transmitter parameters using a finger touch on the touch panel (also through
communication).
3. Further improved zero stability over previously offered models.
4. Accurate liquid density: ±0.0005 g/mL (CA003 to CA080).
5. Fast response: 10 times rise over conventional transmitter.
6. Display: Two LCDs (128×64 dots each) with 2 LEDs.
7. Increased availability of output signals
Pulse output (dual outputs), current output (dual outputs), and status output (single output).
8. Enhanced maintenance functions
Error logging, storing factory shipping data, and downloading programs.
9. Readily expandable for additional applications
(Improved communication capability, comprehensive maintenance capability, and enhanced expandable
functions.)
3. SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

3.1 Sensor Unit General Specifications
3.1.1 Type U sensor unit general specifications
● CA00A, CA001 and CA003　　　
Item Description
Model CA00A CA001 CA003
Nominal flange size 1/4" 10mm, 3/8" (※1), DN15
Wetted parts SUS316L SUS316L, SUS316L + Alloy C, Alloy C (※2)
Materials Housing SUS304
O-rings Fluorine rubber (Viton) —
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150,
Process connection R 1/4 300, 600 RF / DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF (※3),
IDF ferrule (※4), screw-in
Acceptable fluids Liquid and gas
Density range 0 to 2.0 g/mL
Temperature range －200 to ＋200° C
Tube withstands (at 20° C) — Wetted parts materials:：SUS316L 10MPa max.
Max. operating Liquid 15MPa at 20°
C ：Alloy C 15MPa max.
pressure Gas 0.98MPa (Varies according to process connection.)
Sensor housing withstands (MPa) (※5) — 7.2
Flow direction Forward / Reverse
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T3, T4 ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T2, T3, T4 Gb
Explosionproof configuration
KOSHA Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 KOSHA Ex ib ⅡB T2, T3, T4
Dusttight, waterproof configuration IP66 / 67
NOTES ※1: 1/2" for ASME and JPI flanges.
※2: When wetted parts are made from Alloy C, only screw type connection is adopted as standard.
※3: DIN franges are available only to meters of the wet part material, "SUS316L"and"SUS316L+Alloy C".
※4: For application to foods, this product does not comply with CE marking.
※5: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 the pressure of breakdown
test pressure (four-fold breakdown test), allowing for a distorted enclosure, or the data obtained from the
FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer). It represents in practice the withstanding pressure below 1/4 the
breakdown pressure.
※ : For the product compliant with High Pressure Gas Safety Act or CE marking, consult us.
(High Pressure Gas Safety Act is not applicable to CA00A and CA001.)
※ : Only separately mounted transmitter is applicable.

L--740--14--E
● CA006 to CA080
Item Description
Model CA006 CA010 CA015 CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
10mm, 3/8"(※1), 25mm, 1", 40mm, 1・1/2", 50mm, 2", 80mm, 3",
Nominal flange size 15mm, 1/2", DN15
DN15 DN25 DN40 DN50 DN80
Wetted parts SUS316L, SUS316 + Alloy C, Alloy C
Materials
Housing SUS304
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF
Process connection
DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF(※2), IDF ferrule (※3), screw-in
Temperature range －200 to ＋200°
C (※6)
Tube withstands (at 20°
C) 9.4MPa
Max. operating pressure 9.4MPa max. (Varies according to process connection.)
Sensor housing withstands
3.8 3.0 2.2 1.6 1.8 1.4
(MPa). (※4)
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T2, T3, T4 (※5)
Explosionproof
ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T2, T3, T4 Gb
configuration
KOSHA Ex ib ⅡB T2, T3, T4
Dusttight, waterproof
IP66 / 67
configuration
NOTES ※1: 1/2" for ASME and JPI flanges.

※2: DIN franges are available only to meters of the wet part material, "SUS316L"and"SUS316L+Alloy C".
※4: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 the pressure of breakdown
test pressure (four-fold breakdown test), allowing for a distorted enclosure, or the data obtained from the FEM
analysis, whichever is lower (or safer). It represents in practice the withstanding pressure below 1/4 the breakdown
pressure.
※5: Temperature grades T2 and T3 apply only to the separate type or CA006 to CA080. For integral type, temperature
grade T4 applies.
※6: In case of TIIS explosionproof model, the integrally mounted type can support -20 to +80℃ (ATEX approved
integral types : -40℃ to +80℃). In case of non-explosionproof type, the maximum measurement temperature is
130℃. However, the product must be used within the maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
※: For availability of high pressure gas safety regulation compliant and CE mark compliant products, consult the
factory.
● CA100 and CA150

Item Description
Model CA100 CA150
Nominal flange size 100mm, 4", DN100 150mm, 6", DN150
Wetted parts SUS316L
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30, 40K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF/ DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluid Liquid
Density range 0.3 to 2.0 g/mL
Viscosity range 1000mPa・s max.
C
Tube withstands (at 20°
C) 13.56MPa (For reference purpose only: 9.39MPa at 200°
C)
Max. operating pressure Varies according to process connection.
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T3, T4
Explosionproof configuration ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T2, T3, T4 Gb
NOTES ※: For high pressure gas safety regulation compliant products, consult the factory.
※: Only separately mounted transmitter is applicable.

L--740--14--E
● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

Item Description
Model CA010 (high pressure service) CA015 (high pressure service)
Wetted parts Flow tube: Alloy C, Manifold: Equivalent to Alloy C (CX2MW)
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection Screw-in Rc 3/8 Screw-in Rc 3/4
Temperature range Integrally mounted type: －20 to ＋90°
C; Separately mounted type: －200 to ＋200°
C
Max. operating pressure 36MPa at room temperature 43MPa at room temperature
Sensor housing withstands (※1) 3.0MPa 2.2MPa
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T2, T3, T4 （※2）
Explosionproof configuration ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T2, T3, T4 Gb
NOTES ※1: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 the pressure
of breakdown test pressure (four-fold breakdown test), allowing for a distorted enclosure, or the data
obtained from the FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer). It represents in practice the withstanding
pressure below 1/4 the breakdown pressure.
　　　　　 ※2: Temperature grades T2 and T3 are for separate type only. For integral type, only temperature grade T4 applies.
※ : For availability of high pressure gas safety regulation compliant and CE mark compliant products, consult
the factory.
● Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080)

Item Description
Model CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Nominal flange size 25mm, 1", DN25 40mm, 1・1/2", DN40 50mm, 2", DN50 80mm, 3", DN80
Wetted parts SUS316L, SUS316L+Alloy C, Alloy C
Materials
Housing SUS304
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF
Process connection (※1)
DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF (※2), IDF ferrule (※3)
Temperature range －200 to ＋50℃ (Separately mounted type)
Tube withstands (at 20℃) 9.4MPa
Sensor housing withstands (※4) 1.6MPa 1.8MPa 1.4MPa
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T5
ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T5 Gb
NOTES ※1: When "SUS316L" or "SUS316L + Alloy C" is selected for the materials of wetted parts, the flange material
is "SUS316".
※2: For the material of DIN flange, you cannot select "Alloy C".
※4: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 the pressure of
breakdown test pressure (four-fold breakdown test), allowing for a distorted enclosure, or the data obtained
from the FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer). It represents in practice the withstanding pressure
below 1/4 the breakdown pressure.
※ : For the product compliant with High Pressure Gas Safety Act or CE marking, consult us.

L--740--14--E
● High temperature service models (CA025 to CA080)

Item Description
CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Model
(high temperature service) (high temperature service) (high temperature service) (high temperature service)
Nominal flange size 25mm, 1", DN25 40mm, 1・1/2", DN40 50mm, 2", DN50 80mm, 3", DN80
SUS316L
Wetted parts SUS316L SUS316L＋Alloy C
Materials Alloy C
Housing SUS304
Process connection （JPI）
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME 150, 300, 600 RF / DIN PN10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluids Liquid
Temperature range (※1) －40 to ＋350℃
Sensor housing withstands (※2) 1.6MPa 1.8MPa 1.4MPa
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T1
Heat Tracer Specifications (CA025 to CA080 Option)

Acceptable fluids Hot water, Saturated steam, Overheated steam
Heat retention fluid max. output pressure 0.98MPa
Joint port for heat retention fluid φ10 stainless tube
Recommended joint Tube joint manufactured by Swagelok Company
NOTES ※1: Allowable ambient temperature permitted for the sensor unit is up to 50℃.
※2: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 the pressure
of breakdown test pressure (four-fold breakdown test), allowing for a distorted enclosure, or the data
obtained from the FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer). It represents in practice the withstanding
pressure below 1/4 the breakdown pressure.
※ : For availability of high pressure gas safety regulation compliant and CE mark compliant products, consult
the factory.
※ : Only separately mounted transmitter is applicable.
● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

Item Description
Model CA100 (high temperature service) CA150 (high temperature service)
Nominal flange size 100mm, 4", DN100 150mm, 6", DN150
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection （JPI）
JIS 10, 20, 30K RF / ASME 150, 300, 600 RF / DIN PN10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluids Liquid
Viscosity range 10000mPa・s max.
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T1
NOTES ※: For high pressure gas safety regulation compliant products, consult the factory.
10
L--740--14--E
3.1.2 Type S sensor unit general specifications

Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CS080
Nominal flange size 15mm or 1/2" 15mm or 1/2" 25mm or 1" 40mm or 1・1/2" 50mm or 2" 80mm or 3"
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20K RF / ASME (JPI) 150 RF, IDF ferrule
C (※3)
Density measurement range 0.5 to 1.0 g/mL, 0.7 to 1.3g/mL, 1.0 to 1.5g/mL (※1)
Max. operating pressure 2.45MPa max. (Varies according to process connection.)
Sensor housing withstands 2.8MPa
ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 Gb (※2)
KOSHA Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (※2)
NOTE ※1: Density range varies with the fluid used.

※2: Integral type corresponds to temperature grade T4.
※3: In case of ATEX explosionproof model, the integrally mounted type can support -40 to +80℃.
Except -20 to +80℃ or CS080.
In case of non-explosionproof type, the maximum measurement temperature is 130℃. However, the product
must be used within the maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
3.1.3 Type B sensor unit general specifications

Item Description
Model CB006 CB010 CB015 CB025 CB040 CB050
Nominal flange size 10mm 15mm 15mm 25mm 40mm 50mm

or 1/2" or 1/2" or 1/2" or 1" or 1・1/2" or 2"
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30K / ASME (JPI) 150, 300 RF, IDF ferrule fitting
C (※2, 3)
Max. operating pressure 7.9MPa max. (room temp.) Varies with the process conn. rating and T/P ratings.
TIIS Ex ibⅡB T3, T4
Explosionproof configuration ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 Gb (※1)
KOSHA Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (※1)
NOTE ※1: Integration type corresponds to temperature grade T4.

※2: In case of explosionproof model, the integrally mounted type can support -40 to +80℃ (+70℃). In case
of non-explosionproof model, up to 125℃ is permitted. However, the product must be used within the
maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
※3: CIP (cleaning in place) is permitted within the temperature range.
11
L--740--14--E
3.1.4 Transmitter general specifications

Item Description
Model PA0K
Power source 85 to 264VAC, 50 / 60Hz or 20 to 30VDC
Power consumption 15W max.
Ambient temperature －40 to ＋55° C (※1)
Type U 200 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable) (※2)
Transmission length
Type S
(separately-located type) 5 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable)
Type B
Applicable EU directive EMC Directive：2004/108/EC, ATEX Directive：94/9/EC
EMC：EN55011：1998/A1：1999/A2：2002 Group 1, Class B EN61000-6-2：2001/EN061326-1：2006
Applicable EN standards ATEX：EN60079-0：2009 EN60079-1：2007 EN60079-11：2011
IECEx：IEC60079-0：2011 IEC60079-1：2007 IEC60079-11：2011
TIIS Ex d［ib］ⅡB T4：Integrally mounted, Ex d ［ib］ⅡB T6：Remotely mounted
Explosionproof configuration ATEX / IECEx Ⅱ2G Ex d ibⅡC T4 Gb：Integrally mounted, Ⅱ2G Ex d［ib］ⅡC T6 Gb：Remotely mounted
KOSHA Ex d ib ⅡB T4：Integrally mounted, Ex d［ib］ⅡB T6：Remotely mounted
Transmitter construction Integrally mounted or separately mounted
Finish Body: Munsell 10B8/4 Covers (front and rear): Munsell 2.5PB4/10
LCD display (128×64 dots) backlit (white and orange)
Display 2 infrared optical sensors and 2 LEDs (green and red)
Weight Integrally mounted type 3.6 kg; Separately mounted type 5.0 kg
Bell 202 (under HART protocol) (※3)
Option : RS-485 Modbus protocol, Baudrate : 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Communication interface Transmission mode : RTU or ASCII, Response time : 25 to 50 ms
Note : In Modbus communication, set SW3-4 on the maintenance board to ON
(only Bell 202 is valid with SW3-4 set to OFF).
RS-485 Modbus is non-explosionproof.
}
Damping (default) Flowrate 0.8 sec, density 4 sec, temp. 2.5 sec
Type U 0.6%
or less of maximum
Low flow cutoff (default) Type S 1.5% normal flowrate
Type B 1.0%
Open collector output (10V min. to 30V max, 50mADC) or
Voltage pulse (Low level: 1.5V max., High level: 15V min.
Pulse output
Output impedance: 2.2kΩ)
Setting range: 0.1 to 10000Hz (Max. output 11000Hz)
Type U
4 to 20mADC Max. load 600Ω
Analog output Type S
Select 2 outputs from instant flowrate (mass or volume), temp., and density.
Type B
Open collector output (30V, 50mADC max.)
Status output
Select one from error (※4), flow direction, and high/low alarm (default is error).
Contact-closure input (Form "a" input) Short: 200Ω max. Open: 100kΩ min.
Status input Select one from separately zero, total reset, 0% signal lock, and function OFF
(default is function OFF).
NOTES ※1: Below －20° C, the display and infrared optical sensor may exhibit a slow response.
※2: If signal cable length exceeds 200 meters, consult the factory.
※3: Only analog output 1 is compatible with Bell 202.
※4: Of error outputs, "zero is in progress" status output can also be set up.
※: Because a circuit protecting device is incorporated to conform to EMC requirements, insulation
　　resistance and dielectric strength testing are unacceptable.
※: Non-explosionproof transmitter does not comply with CE marking.
12
L--740--14--E
3.2 General Performance

3.2.1 Type U general performance
● Standard (CA00A, CA001 and CA003)
Item Description
Model CA00A CA001 CA003
Max. service range 0 to 2.4 kg/h (0 to 40 g/min) 0 to 9 kg/h (0 to 150 g/min) 0 to 72 kg/h
Max. allowable range 0 to 3.6 kg/h (0 to 60 g/min) 0 to 13.5 kg/h (0 to 225 g/min) 0 to 144 kg/h (180※1)
Min. setting range 0 to 0.12 kg/h (0 to 2 g/min) 0 to 0.45 kg/h (0 to 7.5 g/min) 0 to 3.6 kg/h
Guar. min. meas. rate 0.024 kg/h (0.4 g/min) 0.09 kg/h (1.5 g/min) 0.72 kg/h
Flowrate Factory calibration Liquid [±0.2% ± Zero stability error] of reading [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading
acc. Gas [±0.5% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Liquid [±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Reproducibility
Gas [±0.25% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability 0.00036 kg/h (0.006 g/min) 0.00135 kg/h (0.0225 g/min) 0.0018 kg/h
Density Measuring range 0.3 to 2 g/mL
(liquid) Factory calib. acc. (opt) ±0.003 g/mL ±0.0005 g/mL
Analog output accuracy 0.1% of full scale for respective accuracy
NOTES ※1: When the maximum allowable range greater than 144 kg/h and less than 180 kg/h is applied,
the product is treated as option. The maximum assurable range is 1:200. Accordingly, when the
maximum allowable range of 180 kg/h is adopted, the lower limit of flowrate will be 0.90 kg/h.
● Standard (CA006 to CA150), Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080)
Item Description
Model CA006 CA010 CA015 CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080 CA100 CA150
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 360 0 to 1200 0 to 3600 0 to 10800 0 to 39000 0 to 120000 0 to 342000
Max. allowable range (kg/h) 0 to 720 0 to 2400 0 to 7200 0 to 21600 0 to 78000 0 to 240000 0 to 372000
Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 18 0 to 60 0 to 180 0 to 540 0 to 1950 0 to 6000 0 to 17100
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 3.6 12 36 108 390 1200 3420
Flowrate Factory Liquid [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading
calibration acc. Gas [±0.5% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Reproducibility
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.036 0.12 0.18 0.54 1.95 6 34.2
Density Measuring range 0.3 to 2g/mL
(liquid) Factory calib. acc. (opt) ±0.0005g/mL ±0.001g/mL
Zero stability
Zero stability error = ×100%
Flowrate at the time of testing
※: Measurement unit of zero stability and flowrate at the time of testing must be the same.
CAUTION: 1. For applications of volume flow measurement subject to taxation or in

transactions, consult the factory.
2. In gas measurement, the maximum permissible flow velocity varies with the kind
of gas and certain gases may be unacceptable for measurement. In such a case,
consult the factory.
13
L--740--14--E
● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

Item Description
Model CA010 (high pressure service) CA015 (high pressure service)
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 840 0 to 2550
Max. allowable range (kg/h) 0 to 1680 0 to 5100
Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 120 0 to 390
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 24 78
Flowrate Factory calibration Liquid [±0.2% ± Zero stability error] of reading
accuracy Gas [±0.5% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Reproducibility
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.21 0.636
(liquid) Factory calib. acc. (opt) ±0.004g/mL
Zero stability

14
L--740--14--E

Item Description
CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Model (High temp. service) (High temp. service) (High temp. service) (High temp. service)
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 10800 0 to 39000 0 to 120000

Max. allowable range
0 to 21600 0 to 78000 0 to 240000
(kg/h)
Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 540 0 to 1950 0 to 6000
Flowrate Guar. min. meas. rate
(liquid) 108 390 1200
(kg/h)
Factory calibration acc. [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Reproducibility [±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 1.08 3.9 12
● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

Item Description
Model CA100 (High temp. service) CA150 (High temp. service)
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 342000
0 to 372000
(kg/h)
Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 17100
Flowrate Guar. min. meas. rate
(liquid) 3420
(kg/h)
Zero stability (kg/h) 34.2
Zero stability

15
L--740--14--E
3.2.2 Type S general performance

Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CS080
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 720 0 to 2400 0 to 7200 0 to 18000 0 to 36000 0 to 72000
0 to 1080 0 to 3600 0 to 10800 0 to 27000 0 to 54000 0 to 108000
(kg/h)
Flowrate Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 72 0 to 240 0 to 720 0 to 1800 0 to 3600 0 to 7200
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.36 1.2 3.6 9 18 36
※: Density measurement is an optional feature. Contact OVAL representative.

Zero stability
3.2.3 Type B general performance

Item Description
Model CB006 CB010 CB015 CB025 CB040 CB050
Max. service range (kg/h) 0 to 600 0 to 1920 0 to 4800 0 to 14400 0 to 48000
0 to 1200 0 to 3840 0 to 9600 0 to 28800 0 to 96000
(kg/h)
Min. setting range (kg/h) 0 to 60 0 to 192 0 to 480 0 to 1440 0 to 4800
Flowrate Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 24 76.8 192 576 1920
Factory calibration acc. [±0.2%±Zero stability error] of reading
Reproducibility [±0.1%±1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.09 0.288 0.72 2.16 7.2
Metering range 0.3 to 2 g/mL
Density Factory calib. accuracy
±0.003 g/mL
(Option)
Zero stability
16
L--740--14--E
3.3 Display
● Type U
Display modes
①Mass instant flowrate
②Volume instant flowrate
③Density
④Temperature
⑤Total 1 (mass or volume) (has no units)
⑥Total 2 (mass or volume) (has no units)
⑦Total 1 (mass or volume) (has units)
⑧Total 2 (mass or volume) (has units)
⑨Analog 1 (% instant)
⑩Analog 2 (% instant)
⑪Status information
LED (GRN)
⑫Mode select (parameter setup)
LED (RED)
A touch of a finger on the touch panel through the
※ LCD backlight comes in two colors: white and front glass (infrared optical sensor) selects the
orange. Color changes according to the status of mode.
flowmeter.
Backlight usually comes off automatically if the
optical sensor does not respond for some time.
Fig. 3.1
● Type S
Display modes
②Vol. instant flowrate (fixed dens. cal.) (※1)
③Density
④Temperature
⑤Total 1 (has no units)
⑥Total 2 (has no units)
⑦Total 1 (has units)
⑧Total 2 (has units)
LED (GRN) ⑪Status information
※1: Indicated only when volume output by fixed
density calculation is selected in the output
LED (RED) specification.
A touch of a finger on the touch panel through the

※ LCD backlight comes in two colors: white and front glass (infrared optical sensor) selects the
orange. Color changes according to the status of mode.
flowmeter.
Fig.3.2
17
L--740--14--E
● Type B
Display modes
②Vol. instant flowrate (fixed dens. cal.) (※1)
③Density
④Temperature
⑤Total 1 (has no units)
⑥Total 2 (has no units)
⑦Total 1 (has units)
⑧Total 2 (has units)
LED (GRN) ⑪Status information
※1: Indicated only when volume output by fixed
density calculation is selected in the output
LED (RED) specification.
A touch of a finger on the touch panel through

※ LCD backlight comes in two colors: white and the front glass (infrared optical sensor) selects
orange. Color changes according to the status of the mode.
flowmeter.
Fig.3.3
3.4 Pressure Losses

3.4.1 Type U pressure losses
CA00A CA001
100 100
10 10
1 1 1000mPa・s
Pressure loss coeff., C
1000mPa・s
0.1 0.1 10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01 10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001 0.001 1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
0. 01mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1.0 10 100 1 10 100 1000
Flowrate (g/min) Flowrate (g/min)
CA003 CA006
100 100
10 10
1 1
0.1 1000mPa・s 0.1

1000mPa・s
0.01 10 0 mPa・s 0.01

10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1 10 100 1000 1 10 100 1000
Flowrate (kg/h) Flowrate (kg/h)
CA010 Fig.3.4 CA015

10 10
,
1 1 Cont d on next page
ure loss coeff., C
ure loss coeff., C
0.1 0.1
18 0.01
1000mPa・s
0.01
1000mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 0.001
0.01 10 0 mPa・s 0.01
Pressure los
Pressure los
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

1mPa・s L--740--14--E
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1 10 100 1000 1 10 100 1000
CA010 CA015
10 10
1 1

0.1 0.1
1000mPa・s 1000mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 0.001
10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
1 10 100 1000 10000 1 100 1000 10000
CA025 CA040, CA050

10 10
1 1

0.1 0.1
0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01

1000mPa・s
0.001 10 0 mPa・s 0.001

10 0 mPa・s
0.0001 10 mPa・s 0.0001

10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 100 1000 10000 100000
CA080 CA100, CA150

10 1
1 0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01 1000mPa・s
1000mPa・s 0.001
0.001
10 0 mPa・s 10 0 mPa・s
0.0001
0.0001
10 mPa・s 10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.00001
0.00001 0. 01mPa・s 1000 10000 100000 1000000
Flowrate (kg/h)
0.000001
100 1000 10000 100000 1000000
Flowrate (kg/h)
◎ How to determine pressure loss

(1) Seeing the graph of the type of flowmeter to be (2) For high-viscosity liquids not shown in the graphs, calculate
used, find the pressure loss coefficient C from the the pressure loss by the following equation:
flowrate (g/min. or kg/h) and viscosity (mPa・s).
μ2 1
Dividing this value C by specific gravity d (1 for ΔP2 = C× －
－
μ－ ×－
－－
1 d
water) gives the pressure loss, or
where ΔP2: Pressure loss of high-viscosity liquid (MPa)
C
ΔP = －
－－－ (MPa) μ 1: Maximum viscosity shown in the graph (mPa・s)
d
μ2: Viscosity of high-viscosity liquid (mPa・s)
d: Specific gravity of high-viscosity liquid (1 for water)
C: Pressure loss coefficient found from the maximum
viscosity curve at a given flowrate
(g/min. or kg/h)
Fig.3.5
19
L--740--14--E
3.4.2 Type S pressure losses
CS010 CS015
10 10
5 0 0 mPa・s
1 1 2 0 0 mPa・s

10 0 mPa・s
0.1 5 0 0 mPa・s 0.1

2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01 5 0 mPa・s 0.01
5 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s 10 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
0.001 1mPa・s 0.001 5 mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100 1000 10000
CS025 CS040
1 1
0.1

0.1
5 0 0 mPa・s 5 0 0 mPa・s
2 0 0 mPa・s 2 0 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s 5 0 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
5 mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.001 0.001
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
100 1000 10000 100000 100 1000 10000 100000
CS050 CS080
1 1
1mPa・s
0.1 0.1
5 0 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01
2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001 5 mPa・s 0.001
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
100 1000 10000 10000 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000

μ2 1
－
μ－ ×－
－－
1 d
C
ΔP = －
－－－ (MPa) μ 1: Maximum viscosity shown in the graph (mPa・s)
d
(g/min. or kg/h)
Fig.3.6
20
L--740--14--E
3.4.3 Type B pressure losses
CB006 CB010
100 10
10
1

1
1000mPa・s 1000mPa・s
0.1
0.1
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01
0.01
10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001
0.001
1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 10 100 1000 10000
CB015 CB025
10 10
1 1

0.1 0.1
1000mPa・s
1000mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 10 100 1000 10000 100000
CB040, CB050
10
1
0.1
1000mPa・s
0.01
10 0 mPa・s
0.001
10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000
Flowrate (kg/h)

μ2 1
－
μ－ ×－
－－
1 d
C
ΔP = －
－－－ (MPa) μ1: Maximum viscosity shown in the graph (mPa・s)
d
(g/min. or kg/h)
Fig.3.7
21
L--740--14--E
4. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION

4.1 Type U product codes
Product Code
Item ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ Description Selector Chart
Model C A ALTImass Type U
High temp. service: CA025, CA040, CA050 (below 350℃)
Low temp. explosionproof service: CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080

CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080
High temp. service: CA100, CA150 (below 350℃)

High temp. service: CA080 (below 350℃)
0 0 A 1/4˝ connection
0 0 1 1/4˝ connection
0 0 3 10mm connection (3/8˝)
CA00A, CA001
CA010, CA015
CA100, CA150
CA003
CA006
Nominal 0 1 5 15mm connection (1/2˝)
size 0 2 5 25mm connection (1˝)
0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2˝)
0 5 0 50mm connection (2˝)
L Liquid service ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fluid category
G Gas service ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○
1 Standard (below 130° C) × × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
2 Standard (below 200° C) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × ×
Temp. category (※1)
3 High temperature service (below 350° C) × × × × × × ○ ○ ○ ×
4 Low temperature explosionproof service (－200° C to ＋50℃) × × × × ○ × × × × ×
1 Standard ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pressure category
2 High pressure service (※2) × × × ○ × × × × × ×
S SUS316L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Major parts material M SUS316L ＋ Alloy C × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × ×
H Alloy C (※3) × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × ×
A Screw-in ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
B Ferrule × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
C JIS 10K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D JIS 20K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
E JIS 30K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F JIS 40K × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ × ○
G JIS 63K × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ × ○
H ASME 150 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
J ASME 300 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Process connection
K ASME 600 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L JPI 150 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M JPI 300 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
N JPI 600 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
P DIN PN 10 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Q DIN PN 16 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R DIN PN 25 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
S DIN PN 40 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Z Other than above × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Integrally mounted × × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
Transmitter construction (※4)
2 Separately mounted ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
2 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz
A Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Density
C Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Temperature
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (true density)
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (fixed density)
Analog output Output 1: Density Output 2: Temperature
F
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: Dens (true density)
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Density
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: temperature
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Temperature
A Output 1: Mass flow
B Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Single pulse
C Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density)
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
E Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (true density)
Pulse output Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (fixed density)
F
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (true dens.) Double pulse
H Output 1: Vol. flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (fixed dens.)
J Output 1: Volume flow (true dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
1 Open collector pulse (standard)
Pulse output type Voltage pulse
2
1 Hybrid communication (Bell 202 under HART protocol)
Communication interface MODBUS communication RS-485 Modbus protocol (explosionproof in preparation)
4
0 Non-explosionproof
1 TIIS (※5)
Explosionproof rating 2 ATEX / IECEx
3 KOSHA (※5)
7 NEPSI In preparation
Sensor unit: Temp. class T1, separate transmitter only,
1 CA025 to CA150 (high temp. service model) only
Explosionproof temperature class 2 Sensor unit: Temp. class T2, separate tr. only, CA006 to CA080 only
3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only
4 Sensor unit: Temp. class T4
5 Sensor unit: Temp. class T5, (－200℃ to +50℃),CA025 to CA080(Low temp. explosionproof service) only
NOTES ※1: Explosionproof specification has restrictions on temperature class.

※2: If "High pressure service" in pressure category is selected, "Screw-in" process connection applies.
※3: When major part material code“H”(Alloy C) is selected, the connection standard for CA003 is“screw-threaded connection”
.
Only loose flange is adopted for CA006 through CA080 flange connections.
※4: If fluid temperature exceeds 90° C, only "Separately mounted" transmitter construction is applicable.
※5: Modbus is not supported.
22
L--740--14--E
4.2 Type S product codes

Product Code
Item Description
① ② ③④⑤ ⑥⑦ ⑧⑨⑩⑪ ⑫⑬⑭⑮ ⑯⑰⑱
Model C S ALTImass Type S
0 1 0 15mm connection (1/2")
0 2 5 25mm connection (1")
Nominal size
0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2")
H High density liquid (1.0 to1.5g/ml)
Fluid category M Ordinary density liquid (0.7 to 1.3g/ml)
L Low density liquids (0.5 to 1.0g/ml)
Temp. category (※1) 1 Standard (below 130° C)
Pressure category 1 Standard
Major parts material S SUS316L
B Ferrule
C JIS 10K
D JIS 20K
Process connection
H ASME 150
L JPI 150
Z Other than above
1 Integrally mounted
2 Separately mounted
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
2 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz
A Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
C Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Temperature
Analog output
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (fixed density)
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Temperature
Single pulse
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
Pulse output
F Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (fixed density)
Double pulse
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Volume flow (fixed dens.)
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Mass flow
Pulse output type
2 Voltage pulse
Communication interface
4 MODBUS communication RS-485 Modbus protocol (explosionproof in preparation)
2 ATEX / IECEx
Explosionproof rating
3 KOSHA (※3)
Explosionproof temperature class 3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only

※2: If fluid temperature exceeds 90℃, only "Separately mounted" transmitter construction is applicable.
23
L--740--14--E
4.3 Type B product codes

Product Code
Item Description
① ② ③④⑤ ⑥⑦⑧ ⑨⑩⑪⑫ ⑬⑭⑮⑯ ⑰⑱
Model C B ALTImass Type B
Nominal size
0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2")
Fluid category L Liquid service
Temp. category (※1) 1 Standard (below 125° C)
Pressure category 1 Standard
Major parts material S SUS316L
B Ferrule
C JIS 10K
D JIS 20K
E JIS 30K
Process connection H ASME 150
J ASME 300
L JPI 150
M JPI 300
Z Other than above
1 Integrally mounted
2 Separately mounted
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
2 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz
A Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Mass flow
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Density
C Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Temperature
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (true density)
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (fixed density)
Analog output (※4)
F Output 1: Density Output 2 : Temperature
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Density (true density)
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Density
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Temperature
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Temperature
B Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Single pulse
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Mass flow
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (true density)
Pulse output (※4)
F Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (fixed density)
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2 : Vol. flow (true dens.) Double pulse
H Output 1: Vol. flow (fixed dens.) Output 2 : Vol. flow (fixed dens.)
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Mass flow
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Mass flow
Pulse output type
2 Voltage pulse
Communication interface
4 MODBUS communication RS-485 Modbus protocol (explosionproof in preparation)
1 TIIS (※3)
Explosionproof rating 2 ATEX / IECEx
3 KOSHA (※3)
Explosionproof temperature class 3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only

※2: If fluid temperature exceeds 90°C, only "Separately mounted" transmitter construction is applicable.
※4: In case of measurement tax products or liquor tax products, do not select the mass flowmeter output.
24
L--740--14--E
5. PART NAMES AND OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

5.1 Type U
5.1.1 CA00A, CA001 and CA003 (separately mounted models)
Dimensions in millimeters
52
Ground screw
Terminal box
98
Flow direction
30 R1/4 Process connection 37
Flow direction arrow
63
16
Cable entry
G3/4
Main body (G1/2 : TIIS)
143
175
φ107
210 179
4-φ9 Fitting hole 230 237
(Fits M8 bolt.)
Cable entry
L
Fig. 5.1 Outline Dimensions
G 3/4of Sensor Unit (CA00A and CA001) Approx. weight: 9 kg
107 98
Cable entry
G 3/4（G1/2：TIIS） L
107 98
109
Screw-in type
φD
h1
L
109
10
A W
Ground screw Model
Screw conn.
L
App. Weight
Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
CA003 Rc3/8 332 4.5
h1
※: This table is applied to material

10
A W
Ground screw code S and M. In case of code H,
Flange please consult our representative.
L H h1 A W
App. Weight
※: Flange size for model CA003 is
Model
Nom. size Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
JIS 10K 275 1/2" in case of ASME or JPI.
JIS 20K 275 ※: As long as flange O.D. and bolt
10 JIS 30K 293
holes remain the same while flange
JIS 40K 293
rating may differ, the flange
JIS 63K 313
CA003 230 67 89.1 192 5.0 thickness with the higher rating is
ASME, JPI 150 301
1/2″ ASME, JPI 300 310 chosen in the above.
ASME, JPI 600 322 ※: DIN flanges are available only to
PN 10, 16 275 meters of the material code, "S"
DN15
PN 25, 40 281 and "M".
Fig. 5.2 Outline Dimensions of Sensor Unit (CA003)
25
L--740--14--E
5.1.2 CA006 thru CA080 (integrally mounted models)

230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
Flow direction
H
h1
10
W
A Ground screw L
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W kg (JIS 10K)
Nom. size Flange rating
JIS 10K 242
JIS 20K 242
10 JIS 30K 260
JIS 40K 260
JIS 63K 280
CA006 424 180 53 148 7.8
ASME, JPI 150 268
3/8˝ ASME, JPI 300 277
ASME, JPI 600 289
PN 10, 16 241
DN15
PN 25, 40 247
JIS 10K 256
JIS 20K 256
15 JIS 30K 276
JIS 40K 276
JIS 63K 294
CA010 462 218 53 163 7.8
ASME, JPI 150 282
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 291
ASME, JPI 600 303
PN 10, 16 256
DN15
PN 25, 40 261
JIS 10K 299
JIS 20K 299
15 JIS 30K 319
JIS 40K 319
JIS 63K 343
CA015 512 268 65 205 8.8
ASME, JPI 150 325
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 334
ASME, JPI 600 347
PN 10, 16 299
DN15
PN 25, 40 305
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
JIS 40K 400
JIS 63K 422
CA025 580 329 83 262 13.3
ASME, JPI 150 411
1˝ ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
NOTE: Approximate weights in the table above are of JIS 10K. For specifications of other flange
,
ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer s acceptance specification).
Fig. 5.3 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model (1/2)
26
L--740--14--E
Screw-in type
Screw conn. App. Weight

Model L
Connection （kg）
CA006 Rc3/8 296 5.7
CA010 Rc3/8 312 6.3
CA015 Rc3/4 382 7.1
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
JIS 40K 541
JIS 63K 585
CA040
ASME, JPI 150 547
1・1/2" ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
710 452 121 385 25.8
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
JIS 40K 561
JIS 63K 595
CA050
ASME, JPI 150 550
2" ASME, JPI 300 563
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
JIS 40K 725
JIS 63K 771
CA080 880 602 174 510 48.8
ASME, JPI 150 699
3" ASME, JPI 300 717
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
,
Fig. 5.4 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model (2/2)
27
L--740--14--E
5.1.3 CA006 thru CA080 (separately mounted models)
Terminal box
φ107 L
98
Cable entry G3/4 (G1/2 : TIIS)
H
Flow direction
h1
Flange
10
Ground screw
A W
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg（JIS10K）
JIS 10K 242
JIS 20K 242
10 JIS 30K 260
JIS 40K 260
JIS 63K 280
CA006 368 180 53 148 4.0
ASME, JPI 150 268
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 277
ASME, JPI 600 289
PN 10, 16 241
DN15
PN 25, 40 247
JIS 10K 256
JIS 20K 256
15 JIS 30K 276
JIS 40K 276
JIS 63K 294
CA010 406 218 53 163 4.7
ASME, JPI 150 282
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 291
ASME, JPI 600 303
PN 10, 16 256
DN15
PN 25, 40 261
JIS 10K 299
JIS 20K 299
15 JIS 30K 319
JIS 40K 319
JIS 63K 343
CA015 456 268 65 205 5.6
ASME, JPI 150 325
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 334
ASME, JPI 600 347
PN 10, 16 299
DN15
PN 25, 40 305
,
Fig. 5.5 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit (1/2)
28
L--740--14--E
Screw-in Type
L
Screw conn. App. Weight

Model L （kg）
Connection
CA006 Rc3/8 296 2.8
CA010 Rc3/8 312 3.4
CA015 Rc3/4 382 4.2
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W kg (JIS10K)
Nom. size Flange rating
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
JIS 40K 400
JIS 63K 422
CA025 524 329 83 262 10.4
ASME, JPI 150 411
12 ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
JIS 40K 541
JIS 63K 585
CA040 19.8
ASME, JPI 150 547
1・1/2" ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
654 452 121 385
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
JIS 40K 561
JIS 63K 595
CA050 20.2
ASME, JPI 150 550
2" ASME, JPI 300 563
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
JIS 40K 725
JIS 63K 771
CA080 824 602 174 510 53.6
ASME, JPI 150 699
3" ASME, JPI 300 717
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
,
Fig. 5.6 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Model (2/2)
29
L--740--14--E

Transmitter separately mounted type/Flange connection type (CA0250, CA040, CA050, CA080)
L
A1 Lh
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry
G3/4
(G1/2 : TIIS) Heat retention fluid inlet Heat retention fluid outlet
φ10 stainless pipe φ10 stainless pipe
H
For holding heat tracer
M6 bolt
h2
h1
10
A Ground screw W Ah Wh
Sensor Unit Sensor Unit with Heat Tracer

JIS ASME, JPI DIN With Heat Tracer
App.
Nom. PN PN Weight
Model 10K 20K 30K 40K 63K 150 300 600 H h1 A W Weight
size 10, 16 25, 40 kg Lh h2 Ah A1 Wh
(JIS 10K) kg
L
25
CA025 380 380 400 400 422 411 424 437 376 380 638 329 83 262 10.9 254 340 106 56 268 16.9
（1″）
High temp. service models
40
CA040 513 513 541 541 585 547 560 575 507 513 20.3 31.8
（1・1/2″）
768 452 121 385 376 464 144 70 390
50
CA050 513 523 561 561 595 550 563 582 513 519 20.7 32.2
（2″）
80
CA080 657 675 725 725 771 699 717 737 659 675 960 602 174 510 54.1 501 612 198 110 545 75.1
（3″）
Transmitter separately mounted type/Flange connection type (CA100, CA150)

L
Flange App.
φ107 98
Terminal box Model Nom.
Flange rating
L Weight
size kg
Ground
Cable entry G3/4 screw
JIS 10K 992 231
(G1/2 : TIIS) 100 JIS 20K 1006 235
JIS 30K 1016 241
Flow ASME, JPI 150 1018 237
direction CA100
4″ ASME, JPI 300 1036 245
Flange ASME, JPI 600 1082 255
660
PN 10, 16 968 231

1387
DN100
PN 25, 40 994 241
1015
JIS 10K 1300 246

150 JIS 20K 1320 253
Boss JIS 30K 1330 265
Rc1/4 ASME, JPI 150 1318 248
CA150
6″ ASME, JPI 300 1338 265
ASME, JPI 600 1388 292
PN 10, 16 1140 246
300 810 15 DN150
PN 25, 40 1290 265
Fig. 5.7 Outline Dimensions of High Temperature Service Models Sensor Unit
30
L--740--14--E
● Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080)

L
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry G3/4 (G1/2 : TIIS)
Flow direction
H
Flange
h1
10
A Ground screw W
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. sizeFlange rating kg（JIS 10K）
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
CA025 JIS 40K 400
（Low temp. JIS 63K 422
660 329 83 262 10.9
explosionproof ASME, JPI 150 411
service models） 1″ ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
CA040 JIS 40K 541
790 452 121 385 20.3
service models） 1・1/2″ ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
CA050 JIS 40K 561
790 452 121 385 20.7
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
CA080 JIS 40K 725
960 602 174 510 54.1
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
,
Fig. 5.8 Outline Dimensions of Low Temperature Explosionproof Sensor Unit
31
L--740--14--E
5.1.4 CA100 and CA150

L Dimensions in millimeters
φ107 80 98 Flange App.
Terminal box Model L Weight
Ground Nom.
Flange rating
screw size kg
Cable entry G3/4 JIS 10K 992 231
(G1/2 : TIIS)
100 JIS 20K 1006 235
Flow JIS 30K 1016 241
direction
ASME, JPI 150 1018 237
660
CA100
Flange
1251
4″ ASME, JPI 300 1036 245
ASME, JPI 600 1082 255
1015
PN 10, 16 968 231
DN100
PN 25, 40 994 241
Boss
JIS 10K 1300 246
Rc1/4
150 JIS 20K 1320 253
JIS 30K 1330 265
ASME, JPI 150 1318 248
CA150
300 810 15 6″ ASME, JPI 300 1338 265
ASME, JPI 600 1388 292
PN 10, 16 1140 246
DN150
PN 25, 40 1290 265
Fig. 5.9 Outline Dimensions of Sensor Unit
5.1.5 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models)

● Integrally mounted type
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
φD
Flow direction
H
Ferrule
h1
10
W
A Ground screw L
Ferrule fitting App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W φD
Nom. size Connection kg
CA006 10 Ferrule 10A 231.5 424 180 53 148 34 5.7
CA010 15 Ferrule 15A 256 462 218 53 163 34 6.3
CA015 15 Ferrule 15A 289 512 268 65 205 34 7.1
CA025 25 Ferrule 25 (ISO) 370 580 329 83 262 50.5 10.7
IDF 1S
Ferrule 38 (ISO)
CA040 40 IDF 1.5S 50.5
493 710 452 121 385 19.2
CA050 50 Ferrule 51 (ISO) 64
IDF 2S
Ferrule 76.1 (ISO)
CA080 80 IDF 13S 658.5 880 602 174 510 91 50.8
NOTE: CA003 is of separately mounted type. Process connection: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.10 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted, Ferrule Type Sensor Unit
32
L--740--14--E
● Separately mounted type

Cable entry G 3/4
Terminal box φ107 L L
（G1/2：TIIS）
98 φ107 98
Cable entry G3/4

(G1/2 : TIIS)
109
H
H
φD
Flow direction
φD
Ferrule
h1
h1
10
A W
10
Ground screw
A W Ground screw
Ferrule fitting App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W φD kg
Nom. size Connection
CA003 10 Ferrule 10A 265 230 67 89.1 192 34 4.5
CA006 10 Ferrule 10A 231.5 368 180 53 148 34 2.8
CA010 15 Ferrule 15A 256 406 218 53 163 34 3.4
CA015 15 Ferrule 15A 289 456 268 65 205 34 4.2
CA025 25 Ferrule 25 (ISO) 370 524 329 83 262 50.5 7.8
IDF 1S
CA040 40 Ferrule 38 (ISO) 50.5
IDF 1.5S
493 654 452 121 385 16.3
CA050 50 Ferrule 51 (ISO) 64
IDF 2S
CA080 80 Ferrule 76.1 (ISO) 658.5 824 602 174 510 91 47.9
IDF 13S
Process connection: S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.11 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type Sensor Unit
● CA025 to CA080 Ferrule fitting type（Low temp. explosionproof service models）

L
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry G3/4（G1/2：TIIS）
Flow direction
φD
Ferrule
h1
10
A Ground screw W
Ferrule fitting
Model L H h1 A W φD App. Weight
kg
Nom. size Connection
Ferrule 25（ISO）
service models
Low temp. explosionproof
CA025 25 IDF 1S 370 660 329 83 262 50.5 8.3
CA040 40 Ferrule 38（ISO） 493 790 452 121 385 50.5 16.8
IDF 1.5S
Ferrule 51（ISO）
CA050 50 IDF 2S 493 790 452 121 385 64 16.8
CA080 80 Ferrule 76.1（ISO） 658.5 960 602 174 510 91 48.4

IDF 3S
Process connection: S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.12 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type（Low temp. explosionproof service models）Sensor Unit
33
L--740--14--E
5.2 Type S
5.2.1 Integrally mounted models
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
Pipe stand
G3/4
H
C
Flow direction
φF E
φG L
JIS ASME/JPI
Nom. App. Weight
Model 10K 150 H C φF φG E
size kg (JIS 10K)
L L
CS010 15（1/2˝） 426 458 390 340 5 16.8 69 12
CS015 15（1/2˝） 464 496 390 340 7.4 16.8 80 12
CS025 25（1˝） 529 570 423 353 12.4 26.6 88 18
CS040 40（1・1/2˝） 716 749 439 359 17.8 40.4 112 28
CS050 50（2˝） 882 919 474 372 26.4 52.6 153 38
CS080 80（3˝） 1032 1073 510 392 38 77.8 176 69.2
Fig. 5.13 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model
5.2.2 Separately mounted models
Cable entry
Terminal box φ107 G3/4
Adapter
C
Flow direction
φF E
φG
L
JIS ASME/JPI
Nom. App. Weight
Model 10K 150 H C φF φG E
size kg (JIS 10K)
L L
CS010 15（1/2˝） 426 458 246 197 5 16.8 69 7
CS015 15（1/2˝） 464 496 246 197 7.4 16.8 80 9
CS025 25（1˝） 529 570 280 210 12.4 26.6 88 16
CS040 40（1・1/2˝） 716 749 296 216 17.8 40.4 112 25
CS050 50（2˝） 882 919 332 229 26.4 52.6 153 35
CS080 80（3˝） 1032 1073 367 249 38 77.8 176 66
Fig. 5.14 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit
34
L--740--14--E
5.2.3 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models)

● Integrally mounted type
Cable entry
C
H
G3/4
Ferrule fitting
φD
Flow direction
E
Model Nom.size L H C E φD App. Weight (kg)
CS010 15A 426 390 340 69 34 9
CS015 15A 464 390 340 80 34 10
CS025 1・1/2S 529 423 353 88 50.5 16
CS040 2S 716 439 359 112 64 24
CS050 2・1/2S 882 474 372 153 77.5 34
CS080 Optionally available. Consult the factory.
Nominal dimensions: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.15 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted, Ferrule Type
● Separately mounted type

Cable entry
φ107 G3/4
Terminal box
Adapter
Ferrule fitting
H
C
H
C
φD
Flow direction
E
Model Nom.size L H C E φD App. Weight (kg)
CS010 15A 426 246 197 69 34 6
CS015 15A 464 246 197 80 34 7
CS025 1・1/2S 529 280 210 88 50.5 13
CS040 2S 716 296 210 112 64 21
CS050 2・1/2S 882 332 229 153 77.5 31
CS080 Optionally available. Consult the factory.
Nominal dimensions: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.16 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type
35
L--740--14--E
5.3 Type B
5.3.1 Integrally mounted models
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
Flange
Ferrule fitting
h2
H
φD
Flow direction
h1
（h1）
Ground screw
（H）
A L L
※: Dotted lines show sensor unit envelops of CB040 and 050.
JIS ASME/JPI App. Weight
Model Nom. size 10K 20K 30K 150 300 H h1 h2 A kg
L L （JIS 10K）
CB006 10（1/2˝） 343 343 361 369 378 344 94 192 59 7.3
CB010 15（1/2˝） 380 380 400 406 415 341 94 189 59 7.6
CB015 15（1/2˝） 486 486 506 512 521 432 168 206 91 11.6
CB025 15（1˝） 569 569 589 601 613 426 175 194 91 14.2
CB040 40（1・1/2˝） 626 626 654 660 673 578 323 197 125 32.8
CB050 50（2˝） 626 636 674 663 676 578 323 197 125 33.2
Ferrule fitting
Model App. Weight
Process connection L φD (kg)
CB006 Ferrule 10A 333 34 5.2
CB010 Ferrule 15A 380 34 6.1
CB015 Ferrule 15A 476 34 9.9
CB025 Ferrule 25 (ISO), IDF 1S 559 50.5 11.1
CB040 Ferrule 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S 606 50.5 29.3
CB050 Ferrule 51 (ISO), IDF 2S 606 64 29.3
Process connection: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.17 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model
36
L--740--14--E
5.3.2 Separately mounted models
φ107
Terminal box
98
Flange
Cable entry Ferrule fitting
G3/4
H
φD
Flow direction
（h1） h1
（H）
Ground screw
A L L
※: Dotted lines show sensor unit envelops of CB040 and 050.

JIS ASME/JPI App. Weight
Model Nom. size 10K 20K 30K 150 300 H h1 A kg
L L （JIS 10K）
CB006 10（1/2˝） 343 343 361 369 378 301 94 59 4.7
CB010 15（1/2˝） 380 380 400 406 415 298 158 59 5.0
CB015 15（1/2˝） 486 486 506 512 521 389 168 91 9.0
CB025 15（1˝） 569 569 589 601 613 384 175 91 11.6
CB040 40（1・1/2˝） 626 626 654 660 673 535 323 125 30.2
CB050 50（2˝） 626 636 674 663 676 535 323 125 30.6
Ferrule fitting
Model App. Weight
Process connection L φD (kg)
CB006 Ferrule 10A 333 34 2.6
CB010 Ferrule 15A 380 34 3.5
CB015 Ferrule 15A 476 34 7.3
CB025 Ferrule 25 (ISO), IDF 1S 559 50.5 8.5
CB040 Ferrule 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S 606 50.5 26.7
CB050 Ferrule 51 (ISO), IDF 2S 606 64 26.7
Process connection: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.18 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit
37
L--740--14--E
5.4 Separately mounted Transmitter

● Stanchion mounting
230
344 127 103
70 233 120
20 61.7 171.5 74
φ134
124
160
67
Cable entry G3/4
60 64
Cable entry G3/4 125
※ Hold-down hardware are supplied as standard accessories, but the customer is to furnish the stanchion.
Fig. 5.19 Outline Dimensions of Transmitter
6. INSTALLATION
6.1 Installation Guidelines
(1) Select a location easy to access for inspection and maintenance.
(2) Avoid a location subject to excessive temperature variation and vibration.
(3) Avoid direct exposure to the sun. (Provide a sunshade or similar protection to keep the meter out of
exposure to direct sunlight if necessary.)
(4) Avoid a location where immersion in water is a possibility.
(5) Select a location free from an atmosphere of corrosive gases.
(6) Location should be free from dust and mist.
(7) Separate at least one meter from sources of electromagnetic induction, such as large transformers
and motors.
(8) To ensure consistent and accurate measurement, adhere to the instructions in 6.2 Physical
Orientation, 6.3 Installation Location, 6.4 Installation Guidelines, and 6.6 Installing Proper Pipe
Supports.
(9) The Coriolis flowmeter requires an installation location where pipeline oscillation is held below 0.3G
to ensure consistent and accurate measurement.
(10) Locate the control valve downstream of the flowmeter.
Where cavitation is likely to occur, install the flowmeter at least five meters away.
38
L--740--14--E
6.2 Physical Orientation

6.2.1 Type U physical orientation
(1) The sensor may be installed either in a horizontal run or vertical run. The following physical
orientations are suggested, depending on the type of process fluid. [Orientation (2) shows the
typical orientation for liquids.]
(2) If cable entry points upwards, there must be adequate provisions for sealing off or preventing
rainwater and other moisture from entering the meter.
● CA003 thru CA150

Horizontal pipeline
Vertical pipeline
(1) (2)
Physical orientation
Applicable
● Gas ● Liquid ● Liquid

fluids
● Slurries ● Gas
(If deposit buildup is likely.) ● Liquids that require cleansing
● Liquids that tend to foam
Fig. 6.1
(3) Transmitter orientation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
Fig. 6.2
(4) For the orientation of separately mounted transmitter, see 6.8 Separately Mounted Transmitter
Installation.
39
L--740--14--E
● CA00A and CA001

Installation on a bench or wall are acceptable. We recommend the following orientations:
◆ Installation on a bench ◆ Installation on a wall
4-φ9 Fitting hole
(Fits M8 bolt.)
Fig. 6.3
NOTE: For wall mounting, secure the body with bolts, making use of sensor unit fitting holes.
6.2.2 Type S physical orientation

(1) The flowmeter may be installed either
in a horizontal line or a vertical line. Horizontal line Vertical line
OUT
(2) Where cleansing is required or where
air bubble entrapment is likely, we
suggest installation in a vertical run.
(3) If cable entry points upwards, take
necessary measures to prevent rain
and water from entering the meter.
IN OUT
IN
Fig. 6.4
(4) Transmitter installation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
View from side View from bottom View from top
Fig. 6.5
Installation.
40
L--740--14--E
6.2.3 Type B physical orientation

(1) The flowmeter may be installed either
Horizontal line Vertical line
in a horizontal line or a vertical line.
OUT
(2) Where cleansing is required or where
air bubble entrapment is likely, we
suggest installation in a vertical run.
(3) If cable entry points upwards, take
necessary measures to prevent rain
IN OUT
and water from entering the meter.
IN
Fig. 6.6
(4) Transmitter installation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
View from side View from bottom View from top
Fig. 6.7
Installation.
41
L--740--14--E
6.3 Installation Location

Because air bubbles in the flow tube produce a loss of meter accuracy, avoid the following installation or
practice.
● Locating the sensor at the highest point in the piping system.
● In a vertical piping system, directly discharging the metered fluid from the piping system without the
provision of a valve or similar controlling device.
(While Type U meter is used in the installation examples below, the same applies to Types S and B.)
① Avoid installing on the suction side of pump. ④ In a vertical line, avoid routing the outlet line like the
one shown (it may create air bubble pockets.)
Isolate
sufficiently
from pump
vibration.
P Pump
② Avoid installing at the highest point of the process.
⑤ Where hydrostatic head is used.
Take precaution
against bubble
entrapment when
liquid level is low.
③ Avoid installing at the outlet which is open to the

atmosphere.
Do not allow air
bubbles.
Orifice Keep filled with liquid.
Pressure control, full-

liquid control valve
Open !!
Fig. 6.8
42
L--740--14--E
6.4.1 Standard piping conditions

(1) A Coriolis mass flowmeter is unaffected by the flow pattern of process fluid. Basically, therefore, it
does not require any flow straightener. However, connection with a deformed piping should be done
using a concentric reducer or tapered pipe.
(2) Locate the meter sufficiently away from sources of vibration and pulsations.
(3) For use in zeroing, a valve that can shut off the process flow completely should be provided
downstream of the meter. (Provide another upstream of the meter as necessary.)
(4) Avoid giving pipe stress on the sensor.
Type U standard piping conditions

(While Type U meter is used in the installation examples below, the same applies to Types S and B.)
Flow direction arrow

Valve Valve
Flow direction
Fig.6.9
CAUTION: This meter is designed for flange mounting. It should be supported on the part
of the pipeline. Do not support the sensor body.
43
L--740--14--E
6.4.2 Influence of vibration and pulsation

Generally, Coriolis mass flowmeters can best perform in measurements with least pipeline vibration and
pulsation. In applications where vibration and pulsation are not negligible, the following considerations
must be taken into account:
(1) Locate the meter sufficiently away from the sources of vibration and pulsation.
(2) Provide attenuators, such as flexible tubes and chambers.
(3) Close shutoff valves upstream and downstream of the meter at process flow shutdown. (This is
to prevent erratic signal generation at shutoff. Bear in mind, however, to prevent pressure buildup
inside from exceeding the max. allowable pressure of the meter.)
(4) If meters of the same kind are to be installed in the same pipeline, locate them sufficiently apart (at
least five times the face-to-face dimension of the meter).
6.4.3 Prevention of cavitation

Cavitation can cause a loss of meter accuracy in measurement. Maintain line pressures that will not cause
cavitation upstream and downstream of the meter for this reason. Avoid making such an arrangement
as to open the line to the atmosphere immediately downstream of the meter. Care must be exercised
particularly in handling liquids of high steam pressure.
In practice, recommended minimum backpressure (downstream pressure) of the meter is calculated by
the formula:
Pd = 3ΔP + 1.3Pv
where 　Pd: Downstream pressure (MPa [absolute])
ΔP: Pressure loss across the flowmeter (MPa)
Pv: Steam pressure of the liquid at the temperature of measurement (MPa [absolute])
6.4.4 Prevention of excessive flows

CAUTION: Exceeding the meter's maximum flowrate will not significantly reduce the
meter's long term durability. Bear in mind, however, that the output will be
clamped at 110% of the allowable full scale flowrate.
6.4.5 Prevention of gas mixed flows

Slug flows (gases exist in the process liquid) are generally not measurable at a high degree of accuracy.
It also causes erratic pulse generation at shutdown of the flow.
This transmitter is capable of detecting gas mixed flows. On finding the result of densitometer
measurement exceeding 0.3 to 2g/mL (default), the meter interprets it as a slug flow and reduces the
instant flowrate to zero, interrupting the flow output.
If it is desired to make a gas flow measurement, disable the gas mixed flow detection function (see 9.17
Gas Mixed Flow Alarm).
6.4.6 Keeping the sensor filled with process liquid

CAUTION: The sensor must be filled with the process fluid during measurement.
A partially filled meter results in large errors particularly at zeroing.
[The information below is for reference purpose only.]
When CA100 or CA150 is installed in a horizontal line, it is difficult to wash away air bubbles in the flow
tube at flowrates lower than 500kg/min (water used as the metered fluid). In a case like this, good practice
is to run a flow greater than 500kg/min once and then adjust the flowrate to the required rate. (With this
flowmeter, the minimum flow range that can be set up is 285kg/min and the lower limit flowrate is 57kg/
min.)
Even with an inrush flow greater than 500kg/min, e.g., 600kg/min, it will take about 40 seconds to
completely fill the flow tube from the empty state (water used as the metered fluid).
44
L--740--14--E
6.4.7 Bypass loop

To facilitate maintenance and servicing, it is good practice to provide a bypass loop
● Type U (CA003 to CA150), Type S, and Type B
Flow direction Valve Valve
Bypass loop Valve
Fig. 6.10
● Type U (CA00A and CA001)

Flow direction
Valve Valve
Bypass loop Valve
Fig. 6.11
45
L--740--14--E
6.5.1 Flange type

(1) In order to avoid strains on sensor flanges, be sure to correct the flange face-to-face dimension, tilt
and concentric alignment of pipes immediately before and after the sensor.
(2) Make sure of the flow direction by referring to the flow direction plate.
(3) Align the sensor flange O.D. with the flange O.D. of the pipeline, install gaskets, and tighten hex
bolts evenly.
CAUTION: Remove, before installation, protective seals on sensor flanges that are
attached before shipment from factory.
Gasket Gasket
IN OUT
Hex Bolt Flow Direction Arrow
※ While Type U meter is used in the figure, the same applies to Types S and B.
Fig.6.12
CAUTION
CA100 and CA150 weigh about 240kg each (4˝ JIS
10K flange connection). Obviously, there is high Eyebolt Eyebolt
risk with installation (removal) of this equipment.
, IN OUT
Therefore, we suggest you, for safety s sake,
to leave this work to authorized personnel
experienced in sling work and crane operation
(observing applicable regulations).
Shown in Fig. 6.13 is the center of gravity of
equipment. When working with a vertical run
in particular, carefully review proper slinging Center
position, etc. with its weight and center of gravity of gravity
in mind.
Incidentally, two M16 eyebolts (made of SUS304)
are installed in the housing of sensor unit (two
places). Since eyebolts can become loose and
come off with time due to vibration, it is good Fig. 6.13
practice to retighten firmly or remove upon
installation in the piping assembly.
46
L--740--14--E
6.5.2 Sanitary fitting type

The sanitary fitting type is of clamp connections.
Using pipe fittings (option), install according to the Clamp
procedure given below.
Gasket ※
(1) Welding the companion sleeve (weld ferrule)
Weld the companion sleeves furnished to the Butt Weld
piping. Pay attention to the perpendicularity of Sensor
Body
ferrule end face and difference in height at the
weld.
As piping material, use JIS G 3447 "Stainless
Steel Sanitary Tubes".
(2) Installation Piping
Companion
Sandwich the gasket between the sensor and Sleeve
(weld joint ferrule)
ferrule and tighten with the clamp. Be sure to
※ Option
install the gasket in line with the groove in the
ferrule end face before tightening up. Fig.6.14
6.5.3 Screw-in type

(1) CA00A and CA001
Install a screw fitting (R1/4) onto the piping, fit an O-ring between the end of piping and the gland of
sensor unit, and then tighten them firmly.
Inlet (outlet)
Piping
Gland flat
R1/4
Piping Screw fitting
Nut
O-ring
Gland union
Gland union body Gland union detail

Sensor unit
Fig.6.15
CAUTION 1. Be careful to avoid damaging the gland flat and the protrusion of flow inlet
(outlet).
2. Exercise care not to overtighten the nut. Overtightening it can damage the
gland flat.
(2) CA003 to CA015

O-ring
Sandwich an O-ring between the probe and
Gland Union fitting
union fitting and tighten.
Body
Fig.6.16
47
L--740--14--E
6.6 Installing Proper Pipe Supports

If pipeline oscillation is large or for accurate measurement on low flows, take into account the following:
(1) Provide pipe supports in the range shown below preferably with pipes clamped arranged
symmetrically both upstream and downstream of the sensor.
(2) Clamp the pipeline securely without using rubber bushings or similar cushioning material intended
for the absorption of shock and vibration.
(3) While it is necessary that the rigidity of clamps supporting upstream and downstream piping,
pedestal, floor, etc. that hold individual supporting members be sturdy enough to bear their weight,
it is more important to secure and maintain the overall rigidity of the entire structure. In large sized
installations in particular, changes in the spring elements present in the area surrounded by dot lines
in Fig. 6.18 due to exposure to thermal stress, line pressure, shocks, aging, and other contributing
factors can cause zero shifts.
CAUTION: Support the pipeline with hold-down clamps; never hold down the sensor unit.
6.6.1 Type U pipe supports

● CA003 to CA080 D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 20D 3 to 20D
Pipe support Pipe support
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.17
● CA100 and CA150 D: Nominal pipe size
1.5 to 10D 1.5 to 10D

Valve
IN OUT
High rigidity of structure

in the area surrounded Pedestal or floor
by dot lines is desirable.
Fig.6.18
48
L--740--14--E
6.6.2 Type S pipe supports
D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 10D 3 to 10D
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.19
6.6.3 Type B pipe supports
D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 10D 3 to 10D
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.20
49
L--740--14--E
6.7 Heat and Cold Retention Procedures

When the fluid to be measured requires temperature retention at low or high temperature, you can keep
the sensor unit at high or low temperature. Here, correct heat retaining and cold retaining methods are
described.
(1) When installing heat retaining or cold retaining material on the sensor unit, apply heat retention or
cold retention to only main body. As the fluid passes through the sensor case, heat retention or
cold retention on the mounting tube and terminal box has no effect. Especially, in the case of high
temperature type and low temperature explosionproof type, do not install heat retaining or cold
retaining material within a distance of 20mm from the mounting tube so that the terminal box is
protected against heat (heat and cold) (see Fig. 6.22).
(2) For easy maintenance, a simplified heat retaining system is recommended on the sensor unit.
(3) When covering the heat insulating material with outer sheath for heat retention or cold retention,
if the natural frequency of the outer sheath is close to the frequency of the tube oscillating in the
sensor unit (140 to 170Hz), it may possibly cause some effect on the measurement.
(4) Careful attention should be paid to the maximum permissible temperature when steam trace is
applied. Trace temperature should be the same as that of the metered fluid. (⇒ See 3.1 Sensor
Unit General Specifications).
(5) If you plan to spirally wind copper tubing or similar around the sensor unit, secure the copper tubing
with pipe retainers shown in Figs. 6.21 through 6.25 - and spot weld the copper tubing to the sensor
unit.
(6) Use of heat tracer is recommended for CA025, CA040, CA050, and CA080 of TypeU.
NOTE: Vibrating copper tubing caused by the flowmeter in operation can produce zero shifts. In such
a case, increasing the number of fixed points is one solution that will work.
NOTE: To minimize transmission of oscillation to the sensor, the spirally wound copper tubing should
start and end at the manifold of flanged sensor housing.
NOTE: Sudden temperature change may damage the performance of the flowmeter. Keep the
temperature change of the fluid within ±12℃ /min. for both heating and cooling.
CAUTION: 1. Do not use electric heaters which could be a source of noises.
2. If ambient temperature around the transmitter is expected to exceed 55°
C,
separately mounted type is recommended.
6.7.1 Type U
● CA00A, CA001 and CA003
Terminal box
Piping
Copper tubing Steam Spot weld
Copper tubing
Pipe retainer (material SUS strip)

Sensor unit
〔CA00A, CA001〕〔CA003〕
Fig.6.21
50
L--740--14--E
● ● High temperature service models

CA006 to CA080
CA025 to CA080
● Low temperature explosionproof service models
Transmitter
Manifold 　CA025 to CA080
Piping
Spot weld Do not apply heat retention to terminal box
and mounting tube.
20mm min.
Copper
tubing
Pipe retainer
Apply heat retention only to the
(material SUS strip)
main body.
Manifold
Fig.6.22
● CA100 and CA150

Terminal box
Adapter Piping
Manifold Spot weld

Copper tubing
Manifold Pipe retainer (material SUS strip)
Sensor unit
Fig.6.23
6.7.2 Type S 6.7.3 Type B
Transmitter Piping Transmitter Piping

Spot weld
Spot weld
Copper tubing
Copper Sensor unit
tubing
Pipe retainer
Pipe retainer (material SUS
(material SUS strip) strip)
Manifold Manifold
Horn Sensor unit Horn
Fig.6.24 Fig.6.25
51
L--740--14--E
6.8 A boss for pressure relief device － its use

ALTImass Type U for high pressure service is
provided with a boss (Rc 1/4) to house a pressure
relief device. Intended to release internal pressure
on a rare occasion of tube rupture caused by a
,
process pressure buildup exceeding the tube s
permissible pressure (Fig. 6.26).
Since the permissible pressure the sensor housing
can withstand is lower than that of the tube, should
an emergency occur with tube rupture, the housing
of sensor unit might eventually be damaged
depending on the process conditions. Boss
Prior to shipment from the factory, a hex socket
head plug (R 1/4) is screwed in the female taper
pipe thread (Rc 1/4) of the boss. You may, for Fig.6.26 A boss to house a pressure
added security to protect the housing against relief device
damage, install a pressure switch or relief valve in
the boss.
WARNING: The housing of sensor unit is filled with an inert gas; do not attempt to
remove the hex socket head plug unless it is absolutely necessary.
6.9 Separately Mounted Transmitter Installation

(1) The maximum transmission cable length varies with the type of sensor unit: locate the transmitter
within this range.
(2) Secure the transmitter to a horizontal or vertical steel pipe 2 inches in nominal size using the U-bolts
furnished as standard accessories.
(3) Installation location should be accessible for maintenance and in good environment.
(4) The customer to furnish the stanchion (steel pipe).
CAUTION
Avoid installation in such location as
① Difficult to access for maintenance and servicing.
② Excessive temperature changes and vibration.
③ Potential immersion in water.
Installation on a vertical pipe Installation on a horizontal pipe

U-bolt
(2˝×2) ※ Bolt (M6×4)
U-bolt Hold-down hardware ※
Hold-down hardware ※
(2˝×2) ※
Stanchion
(2˝ steel pipe)
※: U-bolts, hold-down hardware and bolts are standard accessories.

Fig.6.27 Fig.6.28
52
L--740--14--E
6.10 How to Change Transmitter Orientation
WARNING: Be sure to turn off power before you start working.
To change transmitter orientation, follow the steps given below:

(1) Turn off power.
(2) Make preparations for conduit and cable so that they will by no means cause you any trouble while
changing transmitter orientation.
Work on a level plane with the transmitter up and the sensor secured so that loosening bolts will not
cause the transmitter to come off.
(3) Loosen bolts holding the transmitter adapter with hex wrench. See Fig. 4.10 (M8 hex socket head
screws at four places).
WARNING: Never loosen the hex socket head screws located on the
transmitter body.
WARNING: You may loosen bolts but never separate the transmitter from
the sensor unit.
(4) Rotate the transmitter to the desired position and secure it with setscrews (four places).
Transmitter rotatable over an arc of 180°max.
Loosen four hex socket head screws (M8) at the

adapter and change the transmitter orientation.
M8 Setscrew
Never loosen these screws (4 places)
located on the transmitter body.
Fig.6.29
CAUTION
The transmitter may be rotated over an 180°arc as shown in Fig. 6.29. But rotating it
beyond 180°will twist the harness from the sensor unit to the extent the equipment is
damaged.
(5) Confirming that the transmitter is secured in place, make conduit and wiring connections.
(6) Verify that the flowmeter operates properly.
53
L--740--14--E
WARNING: With CS sensor unit, do not attempt to adjust orientation with hex
socket head bolts shown in the figure below, or its functions as a
flowmeter will be lost.
Do not remove socket

head bolts.
Fig.6.30
6.11 How to Change Transmitter Display Orientation

The transmitter display may be rotated through 360 in steps of 90°within the housing.
WARNING: Be sure to turn off power and discharge your static electricity before you
work.
① Using a flat tool 10mm wide approx., turn the display ② Disengage the hooks (3 places).
lid counterclockwise to loosen, and loosen further by (Recommended tool: Precision flathead screw-driver)
hand. (Be careful so as not to damage the finish.)
Fig.6.31 Fig.6.32
54
L--740--14--E
③ Loosen display unit fitting screws (3 places) with ④ Separate the display unit.
precision flathead screwdriver. "Set washers" to
prevent screws from falling out are attached on the
back of display; do not completely remove screws.
Fig.6.33 Fig.6.34
LCD fitting screws

Set washers (3 places) (M2.6, 3 places)
Fig.6.35
⑤ For the display unit that has just been removed, it is necessary to take off fitting screws once, adjust the
orientation and re-install them. Shown below are the location of screw holes for different orientations.
A B
C
C
A.B A
A B C
Liquid service, Vertical run Gas service,
horizontal run horizontal run
B.C
Fig.6.36
55
L--740--14--E
Connector
pins Display unit
through holes
⑥ Align connector pins (male) on the transmitter with ⑦ Tighten screws (3 places) at new screw holes and re-
mating through holes (female) in the display unit. install into the original position.
Fig.6.37 Fig.6.38
CAUTION: When tightening the display lid, tighten securely using a flat tool or similar
instrument. Insufficient tightening can affect gas-tightness and sensitivity of
,
display s optical switch.
7. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
7.1 Wiring Connections
7.1.1 Cable lead-in
With TIIS ex-proof models
(1) This instrument is designed for use with a flameproof external lead-in, conforming to the IEC
compatibility requirements for lead-in fittings. Accordingly, do not attempt to use lead-in fittings other
than those furnished.
To accommodate varying finished O.D. of the cable, five different rubber glands are furnished.
Select one that best fits your application. (Of the rubber glands, φ11, φ12, and φ13.5, a φ13.5
rubber gland is factory installed in place.)
Table 7.1 Applicable Cable O.D 　　　　 Units in mm
Gland code Gland I.D. Cable O.D.
11 φ11 φ10 to φ11
12 φ12 φ11.1 to φ12
13.5 φ13.5 φ12.1 to φ13.5
ATEX and KOSHA rated models

(1) Lead-in fitting and glands are not supplied with non-explosionproof models (because pressuretight
gland is not listed under coverage of certification). If the customer furnishes pressuretight glands,
select glands that meet the following requirements:
Ex-proof code: Exd II CU
Protection class: IP66 or better
Nominal size: G3/4
(2) The following pressuretight glands are available as an option. Select and install the rubber gland
that best fits the cable O.D. of cable used.
Table 7.2 Applicable Cable O.D. Units in mm
Gland I.D. Cable O.D.
φ12 φ11 to φ12
φ13 φ12 to φ12.9
φ14 φ13 to φ13.9
NOTE: ※ In case of ATEX explosionproof, make sure to use EX certified component.

※ In case of KOSHA explosionproof, make sure to use certified component with KCS mark.
56
L--740--14--E
◆Precautionary Notes on Cable Lead-in (pressuretight gland)◆

Be aware of the following for both non-explosionproof and explosionproof types.:
1. Use a pressuretight gland that fits the finished cable O.D.
2. Tighten up positively to allow no clearance between the pressuretight gland and cable.
3. If you do not use a pressuretight gland, apply some waterproof treatment to preclude any chance of
moisture getting into the equipment.
7.1.2 Power and output signal connections (both integrally and separately mounted models)
(1) Terminals for wiring connections are found at the back of transmitter housing. Remove the cover
and make wiring connections.
① Using hex wrench, take off latch fitting screw (M3 hex ② Using a flat tool, slowly turn the terminal box lid
socket head). counterclockwise to loosen and then loosen by hand.
Use care to avoid damaging the finish.
Fig.7.1 Fig.7.2
Status input/output
terminal block Power terminal block
(M4 screws)
Analog output and pulse

Communication signal output terminal block (M3
terminal block screws)
Fig.7.3
③ Removing the terminal box cover provides access to the cable entry and the power board
holding the power and output signal terminal blocks. The customer is to furnish crimp style
terminals required for power and output signal wiring connections.
Power terminal block for crimp terminals: Round shaped 8.1mm max. O.D. for M4
Output signal terminal block for crimp terminals: Round shaped 7.2mm max. O.D. for M3
Status in/out terminal block and communication signal terminal block are of screwless type
and require no crimp style terminals.
Acceptable wire size: 0.16 sq. to 1.25 sq.
57
L--740--14--E
7.1.3 Connections between separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter

Terminals for wiring connections with the sensor unit are found on the side of transmitter housing.
Remove the cover and make wiring connections.
① Using a flat tool, loosen the separately mounted ② Separating the separately mounted sensor cover
sensor cover by slowly turning it counterclockwise provides access to the terminal block (screwless
and further counterclockwise by hand until it comes terminal block) for the sensor.
off. (Be careful to avoid damaging the finish.)
Fig.7.4 Fig.7.5
NOTE: About jumper on sensor terminal block in Fig. 7.5.
J1-1 and J1-2 are jumpers used for switching

NOL
between Enable and Disable of coupling capacitor※.

J2
C1
COUP: Enable
NOL: Disable (Factory setting)
J1-2
J1-1
Be sure to set J1-1 and J1-2 at the same position.

COUP
※: When using the sensor in a place where noise proof environment is extremely degraded,
set the coupling capacitor to COUP (Enable) using the switching jumper.
Note that, however, the coupling sensor shall be set to NOL (Disable) in normal
environment because it could affect the maximum length of cable available for connection
between the sensor and converter.
7.2 Power Supply Lines and Ground Terminal

(1) Power source primary lines are connected to
terminals L (＋) and N (－).
(2) Connection to earth ground terminal:
Connect only to FG on the power terminal
block or external ground terminal. External ground
terminal
CAUTION: Supply voltage must be within
the range shown in the
product nameplate attached
to the housing. Fig.7.6
7.3 Analog Output Wiring

When analog output (4 to 20mA) is to be connected to a receiving instrument, Analog Output 1 has
terminals A1 (＋) and terminal A1 (－) while Analog Output 2 has terminal A2 (＋) and terminal A2 (－).
Maximum load resistance is 600Ω. Analog output setup procedure appears in 9.7.1 Analog output
functions.
58
L--740--14--E
7.4 Pulse Output Wiring

When pulse output is to be connected to a receiving instrument, Pulse Output 1 has terminals P1 (＋) and
terminal P1 (－) while Pulse Output 2 has terminal P2 (＋) and terminal P2 (－).
If voltage pulse signal is your option, signal transmission length has restrictions on output frequency.
Output frequency Max. transmission length ※

10kHz 10m
1kHz 100m
100Hz 1000m
※ Values are based on wire material 0.75 sq in cross section.

To change from voltage pulse output to open collector pulse output, or vice versa, remove the front lid
and select jumper positions at right of the display.
JP3 Pulse output 1 jumper

OPEN: Open collector pulse
CLOSE: Voltage pulse
JP4 Pulse output 2 jumper

OPEN: Open collector pulse
CLOSE: Voltage pulse
Fig.7.7
Pulse output setup procedure appears in 9.7.2 Analog output.
7.5 Status Output Wiring

Status output appears across terminals S.O. (＋) and S.O. (－).
Status output setup procedure appears in 9.7.3 Status output.
CAUTION: Pulse outputs 1 and 2 and status output common of this product are not
isolated. Therefore, when connecting external device to each output terminal,
connecting a load (resistance) to the minus side, no correct output will
be obtained. Please be sure to let the load be on the plus side as shown
in Figure 1. Connecting the load to the minus side as shown in Figure 2
may not result in the breakage of the product but no correct output will be
available.
(Figure 1) With load connected to plus side (Figure 2) With load connected to minus side
Load
ALTImass ALTImass
P1
（＋）P2（＋） P1
（＋）P2（＋）
Pulse output or Pulse output or
circuit P1
（−）P2（−） circuit P1
（−）P2（−）
Load
Load
S.0（＋） S.0（＋）
Status output Status output

S.0（−） S.0（−）
Load
59
L--740--14--E
7.6 Status Input Wiring

Status input appears across terminals S.I. (＋) and S.I. (－).
Status input setup procedure appears in 9.7.4 Status input.
7.7 Communication Line Wiring (option)

For communications (option), use terminals I/O. (＋) and I/O. (－).
CAUTION: 1. Signal for Bell 202 communication is superimposed over analog output 1,
not over this terminal.
2. Modbus communication terminal: For wiring example, refer to“Modbus-
based ALTImass Series Communication Manual L-740CM” .
7.8 Recommended Cables for Use in Output Signals

Depending on the number of output signals used, selection for the right cable material must be made
referring to the table below.
No. of conductors
12, 10 8 6 4 2
Output signal
Recommended 0.75 to 0.9sq 1.25sq 1.25 to 2.0sq 2.0sq
conductor area
Pressuretight φ13.5 φ11.0 to φ12.0 φ11.0
gland I.D.
NOTE: 1 . Use shielded cables.

2 . Modbus communication recommended wiring: Twisted pair, cable cross section area
　0.65 to 0.75 sq, finished outer diameter greater than φ10.1.
3. In case of TIIS explosionproof type used under the ambient temperature of 45℃ or higher,
use a cable resistant to the temperature of 75℃ or higher.
7.9 Terminal Identification of Separately Mounted Transmitter

Terminal Terminal Terminal
Item Description
name No. color
1AB BRN
Flow tube drive output
Sensor unit to transmitter
TB20 2AB RED

(200 meters max.) ※1
BRN/RED, GRN/WHT, BLU/GRY, PUR/ORG/YEL shielded wires

3AB BLK bundled
interconnect cable
1AB PUR Temperature input (inner)

2AB ORG Temperature input (outer)
3AB YEL Temperature input
TB21 4AB BLU
Right position pickoff sensor input
5AB GRY
6AB WHT
Left position pickoff sensor input
7AB GRN
NOTE: ※: With sensor Types S and B, the maximum length is 5 meters.
60
L--740--14--E
7.10 Wiring Diagram

7.10.1 Transmitter power and output signal wiring
Power terminals
Status in/out terminals
Ext. GND terminals
Analog and pulse

output terminals
Remote output terminals
● Terminal identification and description

Item Label Description Remarks
A1（＋） 1. Max. load resistance is 600Ω
Analog output 1 (4 to 20mA)
A1（－） for analog output 1 and 2.
A2（＋）
Analog output 2 (4 to 20mA) 2. Pulse output (voltage
A2（－） pulse) transmission length is
P1（＋） Pulse output 1 Max. 10m (at 10kHz)
P1（－） (voltage/open collector output) Max. 100m (at 1kHz)
Max. 1km (at 100Hz)
P2（＋） Pulse output 2
Signal finished O.D: 0.75sq
P2（－） (voltage/open collector output)
3. In case of TIIS explosionproof
S.I.（＋）
Status input (contact input) 　 type used under the ambient
S.I.（－） temperature of 45℃ or higher,
S.O.（＋） use a cable resistant to the
Status output (open collector output)
S.O.（－） temperature of 75℃ or higher.
I/O（＋） Expanded in/out Modbus communication:

I/O（－） (Modbus communication, etc.) Max. 1km at 0.65sq
L（＋） Power (with DC power: +)
Power FG Earth ground
N（－） Power (with DC power: –)
Fig.7.8
Conduct earth grounding work at external ground terminal or "FG" on the power terminal block (Grade D
grounding work).
61
L--740--14--E
7.10.2 Separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter wiring
● Wiring between Sensor Unit and Separately Mounted Transmitter
Transmitter
SEL CUR
Sensor terminal box
Interconnect cable (Max. 200m)

Type S, Type B (Max. 5m)
Barrier cover to be applied Cut off shield wires here except for the
Shield Type S, Type B (Max.5m)
Shield wires:Black
Brown Brown
Red Red
Green Green
White White
cut
Blue Blue
Grey Grey
cut
Purple Purple
Yellow Yellow
Orange Orange
Sensor terminal box cut

Shield Transmitter terminal box

2. Shield wire preparation シールド
(1) Transmitter end : （黒色チューブで保護）
As shown in the above figure,茶
bundle shield wires colored
茶
in brown/red, green/white,
赤
blue/grey, purple/yellow/orange, twist them, and cover the赤wires with a black tube. Then
connect only one wire to the terminal box (black) taking care to avoid potential contact
with the housing or conductive緑 parts. 緑
(2) Sensor end : 白白
カット
As shown in the figure, cover the brown/red shield wire with a black tube and connect it
青
to the terminal box taking care to avoid potential contact 青
with the housing or conductive
灰灰
parts. Clip all shield wires
カット except brown/red as shown in the above figure.
　　　 3. Recommended cable end treatment:紫紫
黄
Use of a stick type crimp terminal is not necessary. 黄
橙橙
9mm
カット
Fig.7.9
62
L--740--14--E
High temperature service models (CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080)
Transmitter
SEL CUR
Sensor terminal box
Interconnect cable (Max. 200m)
Cut off shield wires here except for the

Barrier cover to be applied
Shield
Shield wires Brown Brown

Red Red
Black Brown
Red
Red 緑
Green Green 白
Black White
灰
Orange White 青
（Narrow Line）
Orange
黄
Yellow Yellow cut 橙
紫
Green Green
Blue Blue
Blue
Blue 黒
Grey Grey 赤
Transparent
Purple 茶
Grey Grey
cut
White White Purple Purple
Yellow Yellow
Orange Orange
Sensur end Interconn. cable end
cut
Sensor terminal box Shield Transmitter terminal box

2. Shield wire preparation
(1) Transmitter end :
As shown in the above figure, bundle shield wires colored in brown/red, green/white,
blue/grey, purple/yellow/orange, twist them, and cover the wires with a black tube. Then
connect only one wire to the terminal box (black) taking care to avoid potential contact
with the housing or conductive parts.
(2) Sensor end :
As shown in the figure, cover the brown/red shield wire with a black tube and connect it
to the terminal box taking care to avoid potential contact with the housing or conductive
parts. Clip all shield wires except brown/red as shown in the above figure.
　　　 3. Recommended cable end treatment:
Use of a stick type crimp terminal is not necessary.
9mm
Fig.7.10
63
L--740--14--E
8. OPERATION
8.1 Flushing the Piping Assembly

If scale and sludge are expected to be left in the piping assembly, particularly in a new piping assembly,
flush the assembly prior to sensor unit installation.
8.2 Confirming the Sensor Unit for Correct Installation

,
For safety s sake, confirm connecting bolts to tightness and gaskets for condition. Make certain of flow
direction at the same time.
8.3 Leak Check

Fill the sensor tube completely with process fluid and check for any leak from connections.
8.4 Supplying the Power

Upon completion of checks for correct wiring connections, supply power. The LCD will show the following
information:
Corporate logo is shown.
Self diagnostics begins.

If nothing unusual is found, "OK" appears at right of
each item, bringing up the next window.
(If NG appears, running a check on that item is
required.
See 9.6.3 Transmitter Check, correct the condition, and
turn on power again.)
Variable view and measurement begins.
8.5 Measurement Line Startup

By starting up the pump, opening valves, etc., carefully allow the process fluid to flow.
8.6 Warm-up
,
To ensure stability of the measuring conditions of equipment, provide about 20 minutes warmup period.
(A message "WARMUP 20" stays on after startup. The number shows remaining time (min).)
8.7 Zeroing Procedure

On seeing that the measuring conditions have come to an equilibrium, shut off the downstream valve
completely. Make a zeroing adjustment under these conditions (see the topic under 9.8 Zeroing).
8.8 Readying for Operation

Now preparation for operation is complete. Initiate measurement.
64
L--740--14--E
9. DESCRIPTION OF INCORPORATED FUNCTIONS

9.1 Display
9.1.1 Description of display
②
③
RED LED LED GRN LED
"SEL" switch "ENT" switch
(1) LCD top row (①)

Shows measurements. Other variables also can be shown with switches. (An example at above shows
instant mass flowrate and instant volume flowrate. For details of displayed variables, see 9.1.3 View
variables.)
(2) LCD middle row (②)

Shows an error / status message.
For error messages, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages. If more than two messages
exist, they are shown one after another.
(3) LCD bottom row (③)

In the view variables screen, an arrow appears, pointing to the direction of scroll. By reversing the
arrow direction, you can reverse the direction of scroll. (For details, see 9.1.3 View variables.)
A black circle ● may blink on and off at right of arrow. (It indicates that the number of running hours
has exceeded 100,000. For necessary treatment, see 10.2 Status Messages.)
(4) Red LED and green LED

Similar to messages, these LED show the status of flowmeter.
In normal operation, red LED stays off; green LED stays on.
Anything else is indicative of occurrence of something erratic.
See 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.
(5) "SEL" and "ENT" switches

An infrared switch. Responds to a finger held close to it.
For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switch operation.
65
L--740--14--E
9.1.2 Switch operation

The transmitter has two infrared switches: "SEL" and "ENT". Operation of these switches is described
here. For information about parameter configuration and other functions, see the respective sections.
(1) "ENT" operation
This switch is used for scrolling the display, scrolling the cursor, etc.
Here we cover "ENT" operation as an example of switching variables view screens.
① Touch ENT key at lower right of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a down arrow ▼ appears at lower right of
screen (surrounded by a dotted circle) where nothing was found
as shown in the next screen.
② After down arrow comes on for 0.5 sec, arrow ▼ is highlighted as

shown in the following screen.
③ While the highlighted arrow stays on (0.5s), remove your finger.
Arrow ▼ goes out and the screen changes.
(With your finger held on, you can continue "ENT" operation. It is
beneficial for fast scroll.)
④ End of "ENT" operation
The next screen appears.
(2) "SEL" operation

This operation is used to switch screen direction, increasing the number, parameter select, etc. Here
we cover "SEL1" operation as an example of switching screen direction.
① Touch SEL key at lower left of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a letter S appears at right bottom of
screen (surrounded by a dotted circle) where nothing was found
as shown in the next screen.
② After letter S comes on for 0.5 sec, the letter S appears highlighted
as shown in the following screen.
③ While the highlighted S stays on (0.5s), remove your finger.

Letter S goes out and arrow ↓at bottom left of screen changes to ↑.
(With your finger held on, you can continue "SEL" operation. It is
beneficial for quickly increasing the number.)
④ End of "SEL" operation
Arrow ↓ has changed to ↑.
Operating "ENT" in this state allows the screen to scroll in the
opposite direction.
66
L--740--14--E
(3) "SEL3" operation

This operation is used to finalize the numeric value that has been changed and activate it, etc.
Here we cover "SEL3" operation as an example of switching to MODE SELECT menu screen.
① Touch SEL key at lower left of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a letter S appears in the highlighted S3
area at lower right of screen.
(On certain screens, letter S3 may appear at lower center of
screen.)
② Hold you finger on.

After letter S comes on for 0.5 sec, the letter S appears highlighted
as shown in the following screen.
③ While holding your finger on, the screen repeats a change between
highlighted and unhighlighted.
On the third appearance of highlighted S (duration 0.5 sec),
remove your finger. A switch to MODE SELECT menu screen
takes place.
④ End of "SEL3" operation

A switch to MODE SELECT menu screen is complete.
9.1.3 View the Variables

(1) Description of displayed information
Shown below is a flow diagram with CA sensor (default settings).
At right of each screen is the description of information displayed in the screen.
The window changes from one screen to another with switch operation. Repeat touching the switch
until the desired screen appears.
…… ● Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate

Decimal point placement is alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-1].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-1-1].)
…… ● Vol Flow or Vol Flow(s): Instant volume flowrate
Decimal point placement is alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-2].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-1-2].)
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". If fixed density is your option, Vol Flow(s) appears.
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) Below 0.3g/m in density, volume flow is clamped to 0.
…… ● Density: Fluid density
Decimal point placement is alterable by configuration. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-3].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See 9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-1].)
…… ● Temp: Fluid temperature
Units of measure are alterable. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-3-1].)
Click "ENT". Click "ENT".
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● Counter 1: The number of counts of pulse output 1.
When reading exceeds "99999999", it resets to 0.
The reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 1 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No.3-5-1].)
……
If pulse output 1 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to 0.
● Counter 2: The number of counts of pulse output 2.
When reading exceeds "99999999", it resets to 0.
The reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 2 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-2].)
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) If pulse output 2 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to 0.
67
L--740--14--E
…… ● Totalizer 1: Total flow of pulse output 1

When reading exceeds the max. value, the counter resets to 0 with the next count.
Unit of measure keeps track of the flow unit assigned to pulse output 1.
Decimal point pos. is alterable by configuration (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-4].)
This reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 1 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-1].).
…… ● Shows Totalizer 2: Total flow of pulse output 2
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". When reading exceeds the maximum reading, it returns to 0 at the next count.
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) Unit of measure keeps track of the flow unit assigned to pulse output 2.
Decimal point pos. is alterable by configuration. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-5].)
This reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 2 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-2].).
When pulse output 2 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to "0".
…… ●
Ana. Output 1: % analog output 1
Measurement range: －10 to 110%
…… ● Ana. Output 2: % analog output 2
Measurement range: －10 to 110%

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● Status / error information
Not shown unless there are errors or status information.
For errors and status information, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● MODE SELECT screen: A screen to enter the setup screen.

Parameter configuration and utilizing various functions starts from this screen.

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
Back to the initial screen.
※1: Scroll direction can be changed by reversing the arrow direction at lower left with "SEL1".
(See "SEL1" operation in 9.1.2 Switch operation (2).)
(2) To change the style of view variables

・Display/hide of individual items and their priority can be changed.
(For details, see 9.11 Variables view screen setup.)
・Display font size can be changed.
In default setting, alphanumeric is displayed in large fonts; two items appear in one screen. By
selecting the standard font, it is possible to indicate 3 items in one screen.
(For details, see 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-3].)
68
L--740--14--E
9.2 View Parameters and Description

Numerous parameters and functions are incorporated in this transmitter.
In 9.2.1 Setup menu window, procedures to bring up MODE SELECT menu screen, the initial screen to
show menu items, are covered. For explanation of individual parameters, see 9.2.2 Transition chart.
9.2.1 View the setup menu

To reconfigure parameters, etc., it is necessary to bring up the MODE SELECT menu screen at first.
The following is the procedure:
(1) Bringing up "MODE SELECT" screen

Repeat "ENT" operation until "MODE SELECT" screen appears.
(For detail of operation, see 9.1.2 Switch operation.)
Shown at left is the "MODE SELECT" screen.
(2) Operation on menu view

Click "SEL3". A switch to "MODE SELECT menu" screen takes place.
(If password is enabled, a password setup screen appears.)
Operate "SEL3".
(See 9.5 Password Function which will guide you the rest of the way.)
★ Password is not set. ★ Password is set.
Password setup screen

For the rest of the way, see 9.5 Password
Functions.
3) "MODE SELECT" menu screen appears.

From this screen, you are ready to configure parameters and to run various
functions.
For view parameters and description, see the respective item in 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7
Transition charts.
To return to the normal screen without proceeding to setup process, operate

"ENT" 4 times and select Exit.
Operate "ENT" 4 times. Then, operate "SEL1" to return to the normal screen.
Operate "SEL1".
(4) Normal screen appears.
CAUTION: If no command arrives within 5 minutes at "Mode Select" menu screen, it

returns to the normal window.
69
L--740--14--E
9.2.2 Transition chart of view (1)

："SEL1" operation
MODE SELECT
："SEL3" operation (For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switching operation.)
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Password Set
2.Setup 2.Password
3.Diag/Service 3.Process Var. 1.Var. Priority
4.Maintenance 2.Refresh LCD
3.Font
4.Decimal Place 1.Mass Flow
2.Vol Flow
3.Density
4.Totalizer1
5.Totalizer2
Exit Exit
4.Back Light
Exit Exit
Process screen
70
L--740--14--E
No. Item Description Setup Default

Selects password active/inactive. With "ON" selected, entering a password is requested before entering
1-1 Password Set setup menu screen from "MODE SELECT" screen. This prevents unauthorized password change. See 9.4 Off
For details of password, see 9.5 Password Function.
Sets a password. To validate the setting, password function in [No. 1-1] requires to be turned "ON".
1-2 Password See 9.3 9999
A precaution to remember: If password is forgotten, there will be no way to change parameters.
Selects run indicator display/hide and priority of variables view.

1-3-1 Var. Priority See 9.11
For details, see 9.1.1 Variables view screen setup.
Changes LCD display refresh rate (ms). Select one from 1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 500ms, 4: 1000ms, or 5:
1-3-2 Refresh LCD 2000ms. Select a slower rate if the reading changes too fast, making it difficult to read; select a faster rate if See 9.4 500ms
prompt readout is desired.
Changes LCD font size.
1-3-3 Font 1: Double angle ⇒ Larger font, allowing 2 variables view in one screen. See 9.4 Double
2: Normal ⇒ Smaller font, allowing 3 variables view in one screen.
Changes dcml pt. pos. in LCD instant mass rate. Select one that matches instant mass rate used. Select
from 1: Auto ⇒ Auto (from 5th dcml. plc. to no fractions, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st decimal ⇒ to 1st
1-3-4-1 Mass Flow See 9.4 Auto
dcml place, 4: 2nd decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml plc., 5: 3rd decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml plc., 6: 4th decimal ⇒ to 4th
dcml plc.
Changes dcml pt. pos. in instant volume rate on LCD. Select one that matches instant mass rate used.
1-3-4-2 Vol Flow Select from 1: Auto ⇒ Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd See 9.4 Auto
decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml plc., 5: 3rd decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml plc., 6: 4th decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml plc.
Changes LCD decimal point position in density. Set to match the viscosity used. Selectable from 1: Auto ⇒
1-3-4-3 Density Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd Decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml See 9.4 4th Decimal
place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3 rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.
Changes LCD decimal point position in total flow 1. Set to match the total flow 1 used. Selectable from 1:
1-3-4-4 Totalizer1 Auto ⇒ Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd Decimal ⇒ to 2nd See 9.4 Auto
dcml place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.
Changes LCD decimal point position in total flow 2 on LCD. Set to match the total flow 1 used. Selectable
1-3-4-5 Totalizer2 from 1: Auto ⇒ Autmatic, 2: Integer ⇒ fractions eliminated, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd See 9.4 Auto
Decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3 rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.

Selects backlight mode. (In an erratic condition, it stays on or blinks depending on its nature.)
1: Off: Backlight stays off.
2: Sleep 5 min: Stays on for 5 min before it goes out. Sleep
1-4 Back Light 3: Sleep 10 min: Stays on for 10 min before it goes out. See 9.4
20min
4: Sleep 20 min: Stays on for 20 min before it goes out.
5: Sleep 30 min: Stays on for 30 min before it goes out.
71
L--740--14--E

："SEL1" operation
MODE SELECT ："SEL3" operation (For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switching operation.)
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Mass Unit
2.Setup 2.Vol Unit
3.Diag/Service 3.Flow Damp
4.Maintenance 4.Flow Cutoff
5.Flow Direct
Exit
2.Dens Param 1.Dens Unit
2.Dens Damp
3.Slug Low
4.Slug High
5.Slug Duration
6.Special Dens 1.Dens Compen
2.Std Temp
3.Exp Coef
4.Settled Dens
5.Dens Value
Exit Exit
3.Temp Param
1.Temp Unit
4.Outputs
2.Temp Damp
5.Status Input
Exit
6.H/L Alarm
Exit Exit
Process screen
72
L--740--14--E
2-1-1 Mass Unit Selects instant mass flowrate unit. For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 kg/min
Units of flowrate-related views and settings keep track of the units selected.
2-1-2 Vol Unit Selects unit of instant volume flowrate. For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 L/min
Flowrate-related units of measure and settings keep track of the units selected.
Changes instant flowrate damping factor (sec).

2-1-3 Flow Damp If flowrate fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value (0 See 9.3 0.8
to 200 sec).
Changes cutoff (%) of instant mass rate. With respect to the cutoff rate multiplied by max. allowable instant
mass rate and cutoff rate, instant rate is clamped at 0 within the range where － cutoff rate < instant mass
2-1-4 Flow Cutoff rate < ＋cutoff rate. If flowrate fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if measurement down to small See 9.3 0.3
flows is desired, select a smaller value (0 to 10%).
Changes flow direction.
1: Forward ⇒ ＋ flow when the fluid runs in the flow direction of sensor; － flow if the fluid runs opposite to
2-1-5 Flow Direct the flow direction of sensor. See 9.4 Forward
2: Reverse ⇒ － flow when the fluid runs in the flow direction of sensor; ＋ flow if the fluid runs opposite to
the flow direction of sensor.

Selects density unit.
2-2-1 Dens Unit For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 g/ml
The unit of density-related views and settings keep track of the unit selected.
2-2-2 Dens Damp Changes density damping factor (sec). See 9.3 4.0
If density fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value.
2-2-3 Slug Low Sets lower limit density (low end in normal density) for slug flow detection. See 9.3 0
Set a value smaller than expected flow density.
2-2-4 Slug High Sets higher limit density (high end in normal density) for slug flow detection. See 9.3 10
Set a value larger than expected flow density.
Sets the duration required for detecting slug flows. During the preset duration, if measured density falls
2-2-5 Slug Duration below lower limit density [No. 2-2-3] or exceeds upper limit density [No. 2-2-4], it is identified as slug flow to See 9.3 0
indicate an alarm.
Sets enable/disable of reference temp. conversion function on density.
1: Off ⇒ Reference temp. conv. function disabled. 2: On ⇒ Ref. temp. conv. function is activated based on
2-2-6-1 Dens Compen the following formula and the obtained dens. value is used in the view and output, etc. See 9.4 Off
Dens. after ref. temp. conv. = Measured dens. ＋ {ref. temp. conv. factor [No. 2-2-6-2]×(fluid temp. － ref.
temp. [No. 2-2-6-2])}
2-2-6-2 Std Temp Changes the ref. temperature (° C) of the ref. temperature conversion function. See 9.3 20.00
The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-1] of ref. temperature conversion function is active.
2-2-6-3 Exp Coef Changes ref. temp. conversion factor in the ref. temp. conversion function. See 9.3 0.00024
The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-1] of ref. temperature conversion function is active.
Sets enable/disable of fixed density function.

1: Off ⇒ Fixed density function is inactive.
2-2-6-4 Settled Dens 2: On ⇒ Irrespective of density measurement, the fixed density [No. 2-2-6-5] is used in the view See 9.4 Off
measurement and output, etc.
(With On selected, vol flow is suffixed with (s) to avoid confusion with true density volume output.
Changes fixed density (g/ml) of fixed density function.

2-2-6-5 Dens Value The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-4] of fixed density function is active. See 9.3 1.0000

Selects temperature unit of measure.
2-3-1 Temp Unit For available units, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 ℃
The unit of temperature-related views and settings keeps track of the unit selected.
2-3-2 Temp Damp Changes temperature damping factor (sec). See 9.3 4.0
If temperature varies widely, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value.
73
L--740--14--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Ana. Output1 1.Assign
2.Setup 2.Den Param 2.URV
3.Temp Param 3.LRV
4.Outputs 4.Lowcut
5.Added Damp
Exit
2.Ana. Output2 1.Assign
2.URV
3.LRV
4.Lowcut
5.Added Damp
Exit
3.Pls. Output1 1.Assign
2.Freq Factor
3.Rate Factor
4.Lowcut
Exit
4.Pls. Output2 1.Assign
2.Freq Factor
3.Diag/Service 5.Status Input 5.Status Output 3.Rate Factor
4.Maintenance 6.H/L Alarm 6.Error Output 4.Lowcut
Exit Exit Exit Exit
Process screen
74
L--740--14--E

Changes analog output 1 assignment. (See 9.13 Analog Output Function.)
2-4-1-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2], lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3], low cutoff [No. 2-4- See 9.4 Mass Flow
1-4], and damping factor [No. 2-4-1-5] for optimum settings.
Changes analog output 1 upper limit. A 20mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-1-2 URV A value smaller than lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3] and a value larger than max. allowable range are not See 9.3 180.000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 1 lower limit. A 4mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-1-3 LRV A value larger than upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 0.00000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 1 low cutoff (%).
2-4-1-4 Lowcut When low flow cutoff is greater than proportion of analog output where upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2] is set at See 9.3 0.0
100% and lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3] at 0%, analog output is clamped at 4mA.
Changes analog output 1 damping factor (sec).
2-4-1-5 Added Damp If analog output 1 fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller See 9.3 0.0
value.

Changes analog output 2 assignment. (See 9.13 Analog Output Function.)
2-4-2-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2], lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3], low cutoff [No. 2-4- See 9.4 Mass Flow
2-4], and damping factor [No. 2-4-2-5] for optimum settings.
Changes analog output 2 upper limit. A 20mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-2-2 URV A value smaller than lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 180.000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 2 lower limit. A 4mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-2-3 LRV A value larger than upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 0.00000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 2 low cutoff (%).
2-4-2-4 Lowcut When low flow cutoff is greater than proportion of analog output where upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2] is set at See 9.3 0.0
100% and lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3] at 0%, analog output is clamped at 4mA.
Changes analog output 2 damping factor (sec).
2-4-2-5 Added Damp If analog output 2 fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller See 9.3 0.0
value.

Changes pulse output 1 assignment. (For functions, see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.)
2-4-3-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure frequency at full scale [No. 2-4-3-2], full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3], See 9.4 Mass Flow
and low cutoff [No. 2-4-3-4] for optimum settings.
Changes the max. frequency of pulse output 1. An output is produced at the frequency (duty 50%) set at
2-4-3-2 Freq Factor full scale [No. 2-4-3-3]. Set up to match the measuring frequency range of instrument used for pulse output See 9.3 1000.0
measurement.
Changes pulse output 1 full scale flowrate.

2-4-3-3 Rate Factor See 9.3 180.000
An output is produced at the max. frequency [No. 2-4-3-2] when preset flowrate is reached.
Changes low cutoff (%) of pulse output 1.

2-4-3-4 Lowcut When proportion of flowrate falls below low cutoff where full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3] is set at 100%, the See 9.3 0.0
pulse output is clamped at 0.

Changes pulse output 2 assignment. (For functions, see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.)
2-4-4-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure frequency at full scale [No. 2-4-4-2], full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-4-3], See 9.4 Mass Flow
and low cutoff [No. 2-4-4-4] for optimum settings.
Changes the max. frequency of pulse output 2. An output is produced at the frequency (duty 50%) set at full
2-4-4-2 Freq Factor scale rate [No. 2-4-4-3]. (If double pulse output is your option at pulse output 2 assignment [No. 2-4-4-1], See 9.3 1000.0
this setting becomes invalid, however.)
Changes pulse output 2 full scale flowrate. An output is produced at max. freq. [No. 2-4-4-1] when preset
2-4-4-3 Rate Factor rate is reached. (If double pulse output is your option at pulse output 2 assignment [No. 2-4-4-1], this setting See 9.3 180.0
becomes invalid, however.)
Changes pulse output 2 low cutoff (%).
2-4-4-4 Lowcut When proportion of flowrate falls below low cutoff where full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3] is set at 100%, the See 9.3 0.0
pulse output is clamped at 0 (zero).
75
L--740--14--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Ana. Output1 1.Function
2.Setup 2.DensParam 2.Ana. Output2 2.Select 1.Sensor Fail
3.Temp Param 3.Pls. Output1 2.Txr Fail
3.Cal Fail
4.Outputs 4.Pls. Output2
4.Satura. Alm.
5.Status Output
5.Param Alm.
6.Txr Alm.
7.Slug Alm.
8.Cal in prog.
9.Fix Output
Exit
3.Mode
Exit
6.Error Output 1.Analog
2.Pulse
Exit Exit
5.Status Input 1.Function
2.Mode
Exit
6.H/L Alarm 1.Assign
2.H/L Alm. Type
3.High Alm. Po.
3.Diag/Service 4.Low Alm. Po.
5.H/L Alm. hys

4.Maintenance
Exit Exit
Exit
Process screen
76
L--740--14--E

No
2-4-5-1 Function Changes status output assignment. (For detail, see 9.14 Status Output Function.) See 9.4
Function
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Sensor Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-1 Sensor Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Sensor Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Txr Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-2 Txr Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Txr Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Calibration Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-3 Cal Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Calibration Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Saturated alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-4 Satura. Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Saturation alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Parameter alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-5 Param Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Parameter alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Txr alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-6 Txr Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Txr alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Slug alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-7 Slug Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Slug alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Cal in Progress state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-8 Cal in prog. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Cal in Progress, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Fix output state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-9 Fix Output No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Fix output, see 10.1 Error Messages.

1: Off Active⇒With Status output condition "ON", status output is turned off.
2-4-5-3 Mode See 9.4 Off Active
2: On Active⇒With Status output condition "ON", status output is turned on.

Selects analog output pattern when an alarm condition occurs (sensor failure, Txr failure, or parameter alarm).
2-4-6-1 Analog 1: Downscale ⇒ Produces 2.4mA, 2: Zero ⇒ Produces 4mA, 3: Hold ⇒ Produces analog value as it is in See 9.4 Downscale
an error, 4: Upscale ⇒ Produces 21.6mA.
Selects pulse output pattern in an error (sensor failure, Txr failure, or parameter alarm).
2-4-6-2 Pulse 1: Zero ⇒ Stops pulse output, 2: Hold ⇒ Produces pulse output value as it is in an error, See 9.4 Zero
3: Upscale ⇒ Produces an 11kHz output.
2-5-1 Function Changes status input assignment. (See 9.15 Status input functions.) See 9.4 No function
Selects status input operating conditions.

2-5-2 Mode 1: Short Active ⇒ Means that status input is shorted and action begins. See 9.4 Short Active
2: Open Active ⇒ Means that status input is open and action begins.

Changes H/L alarm assignment. (See 9.16 High low alarm functions.)
2-6-1 Assigh See 9.4 Mass Flow
To validate this setting, it is necessary that H/L alarm be selected at status output assignment.
Selects type of H/L alarm.

2-6-2 H/L Alm. Type 1: High alarm ⇒ High alarm is active, 2: Low alarm ⇒ Low alarm is active, See 9.4 High Alarm
3: H/L alarm ⇒ Both high and low alarms are active.
Changes high alarm setting. A value exceeding this setting activates high alarm; when it falls below this
2-6-3 High Alm. Po. setting by H/L alarm hysteresis [No. 2-6-5], high alarm condition is reset. A setting smaller than low alarm See 9.3 0.0
[No. 2-6-4] is not acceptable.
Changes low alarm setting. A value falling below this setting activates low alarm; when it exceeds this
2-6-4 Low Alm. Po. setting by H/L alarm hysteresis ]No. 2-6-5], low alarm condition is reset. A setting smaller than high alarm See 9.3 0.0
[No. 2-6-3] is not acceptable.
Changes high/low alarm hysteresis setting. Frequent annoying false alarms (repetitive alarm on/off in short
2-6-5 H/L Alm. hys duration) can be alleviated by choosing a larger value. To get an accurate picture of alarm condition, choose See 9.3 0
a smaller value.
77
L--740--14--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Test/Status 1.Self-Diag 1.Hardware
2.Setup 2.Drive coil Check
3.Diag/Service 3.Txr Condition
4.LCD Test 1.Back Light
2.LED
3.LCD
Exit Exit
2.Installation 1.Static
2.Dynamic
Exit
Exit
2.Loop Test 1.Fix Analog1
2.Fix Analog2
3.Fix Pulse1
4.Fix Pulse2
5.Status Output
6.Status Input
Exit
3.Calibration 1.Auto Zero
Exit
4.Trim Analog
4.Maintenance 5.Cnt/Ttl Reset
Exit Exit
Process screen
78
L--740--14--E

Runs a check for possible problems in the probe.
3-1-1-1 Hardware For details, see 9.6.1 Probe check. See 9.6.1 —
CAUTION: Be very careful as this check can stop outputs under certain circumstances.
Runs a check for an "open" in the drive coil.
3-1-1-2 Drive coil Check For details, see 9.6.2 Drive coil check. See 9.6.2 —
CAUTION: Be very careful as this check can stop outputs under certain circumstances.
Runs a check for possible problems in the transmitter.

3-1-1-3 Txr Condition See 9.6.3 —
For details, see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.
Tests backlight for possible problems by forcibly turning it on and off. While test continues, the LCD remains dead.
3-1-1-4-1 Back Light Performance test consist of WHT backlight lit (3 sec), ORG backlight lit (3 sec) and backlight unlit (3 sec) conducted See 9.4 —
twice one after the other (total of 18 sec) and ends automatically. After the test, the LCD restores normal illumination.
Tests LEDs for possible problems by forcibly turning them on and off. While test continues, the LCDs remain
3-1-1-4-2 LED dead. Performance test consist of RED LED lit (1.5 sec) and GRN LED lit (1.5 sec) conducted 6 times —
alternately (total of 18 sec) and ends automatically. After the test, the LCDs restore normal illumination.
Tests LCD for possible problems by illuminating and extinguishing all LCD dots. While test continues, the LCDs are
3-1-1-4-3 LCD forcibly switched in and out. Performance test consist of all dots lit (3 sec) and all dots unlit (3 sec) conducted twice —
alternately and ends automatically (a total of 12 sec). After the test, the LCDs restore normal illumination.

Runs a check for stability of sensor signal at zero flow.
3-1-2-1 Static See 9.6.4 —
For details, see 9.6.4 Pipeline oscillation check (zero flow).
Runs a check for stability of sensor signal while allowing the fluid.
3-1-2-2 Dynamic See 9.6.5 —
For details, see 9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (fluid flowing).

Produces a simulated output of analog output 1. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-1 Fix Analog1 associated equipment. See 9.7.1 —
For details, see 9.7.1 Analog output.
Produces a simulated output of analog output 2. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-2 Fix Analog2 associated equipment. See 9.7.1 —
For details, see 9.7.1 Analog output.
Produces a simulated output of pulse output 1. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-3 Fix Pulse1 associated equipment. See 9.7.2 —
For details, see 9.7.2 Pulse output.
Produces a simulated output of pulse output 2. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-4 Fix Pulse2 associated equipment. See 9.7.2 —
For details, see 9.7.2 Pulse output.
Produces a simulated output of status output. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-5 Status Output associated equipment. See 9.7.3 —
For details, see 9.7.3 Status output.
Monitors status input. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of associated equipment.
3-2-6 Status Input See 9.7.4 —
For details, see 9.7.4 Status monitor input.

Performs zeroing. When you perform zeroing, verify that the flow is at zero.
3-3-1 Auto Zero See 9.8 —
For details, see 9.8 Zeroing Function.
79
L--740--14--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Test/Status 1.Trim Analog1 1.4mA
2.Setup 2.Loop Test 2.20mA
3.Diag/Service 3.Calibration Exit
4.Trim Analog
2.Trim Analog2 1.4mA
2.20mA
Exit Exit
5.Cnt/Ttl Reset 1.Count/Total1
2.Count/Total2
Exit Exit
4.Maintenance 1.Input Signals
2.View History
3.Telop Info.
Exit Exit
Process screen
80
L--740--14--E

Trims 4mA analog output 1. It is factory adjusted and normally further adjustment is not required.
3-4-1-1 4mA However, if it is absolutely necessary, follow the procedure outlined. See 9.9 —
For details, see 9.9 Analog Output Trim.


Resets counter 1 and totalizer 1 reading to 0.
3-5-1 Count/Total1 See 9.10 —
For details, see 9.10 Reset Function.
Resets counter 2 and totalizer 2 reading to 0.

3-5-2 Count/Total2 See 9.10 —
For details, see 9.10 Reset Function.
4-1 Input Signals The screen is used for maintenance. View only —
Shows the number of running hours of transmitter.

4-2 View History Can be switched to calendar view. (Incorporated clock is maintenance oriented; No updating takes place if —
power to the transmitter is interrupted.)
When the number of running hours exceeds 100,000, a black circle "●" begins to blink at lower left of LCD
which can be canceled.
4-3 Telop Info. See 9.4 ON
1: Off ⇒ "●" stays off irrespective of elapsed hours. 2: ON ⇒ warning "●" begins to blink after 100,000
hours.
81
L--740--14--E
9.3 Parameter Value Entry

The procedure to enter a numerical data of parameters is described here. As an example, reconfiguring
the temperature damping factor from "4.0" to "4.2" is covered in this section. A similar procedure applies
to setting up other parameters.
(1) Bring up the parameter item subject to setup.
Operate the view until the desired item subject to setup appears.
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition chart.)
When the cursor is moved and located at the desired item, click "SEL1" to bring up the
temperature damping factor setup screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to modify this parameter or not.
Current setting is shown. If you want to modify it, click "SEL 3" to proceed to the next
screen.
If the current setting is OK, click "ENT" and then "SEL3" to return to the menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3". 　 Click "ENT"

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Numerical data adjustment

To move the cursor to the right, click "ENT".
(As scroll continues, a click next to the rightmost digit brings up a numerical data field
where all digits are highlighted [decision window]; clicking "ENT" further brings the cursor
to the leftmost digit.)
To increment the number, click "SEL1". To continually increment the number, hold "SEL1".
(The number changes in the order "0" ⇒ "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6" ⇒ "7" ⇒" 8"
⇒ "9" ⇒ "." ⇒ "-" ⇒ " ".)
Click "ENT" twice.
① Move the cursor to the digit of interest.
With a change from "4.0" to "4.2" in mind, move the cursor to the 1st decimal place subject
to data adjustment.
Click "ENT" twice. (The next screen appears.)
② Adjust the numerical value.

With a change from "4.0" to "4.2" in mind, adjust the number in the 1st decimal place from
"0" to "2".
Click "SEL1" twice. (The next screen appears.)
Click "SEL1" twice.
③ Bring up the state ready to finalize numerical value entry.
Click "ENT", readying for finalizing the entry.
(The next screen appears.)
Click "ENT" once.

④ Finalize the entry.
Confirm that the desired numerical value is indicated.
Click "SEL1" readying for final confirmation of entry.
Click "SEL1".
(4) Activate the data entry.
① If the setting "4.2" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
Setting is now complete. The previous data 4.0 is replaced by 4.2 and the window
returns to the initial menu select screen.
If you want to abort the setting process, click "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT". 　　　 Click "ENT".

② If you want to abort the setting process, click "SEL3".
A numerical value "4.0" remains unchanged and the window returns to the initial menu
select screen.
Click "SEL3".
82
L--740--14--E
9.4 Parameter Selection

The procedure to select a menu item of parameters is described here. As an example, selecting "Kelvin"
in temperature unit setting is covered in this section. A similar procedure applies to setting up other
parameters.
(1) Bring up the parameter item to be configured.
Operate the view until the desired menu item to be set up appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item, operate "SEL 1" to bring up temperature unit setup
screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to change this parameter or not.
If you want to modify the current parameter shown, operate "SEL 3" to proceed to
the next screen.
If the current setting is acceptable, click "ENT" and "SEL 3" to return to the menu
select screen.
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT".
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) A change in option select screen

① Click "ENT" twice to select the desired item (Kelvin).
(To continue scrolling, hold down "ENT" key.)
Click "ENT".
Click "ENT".
② Confirm that the desired item (Kelvin) is selected.
To activate this setting (Kelvin), click "SEL 1".
To abort setting, click "ENT" twice and select Exit.
(4) Finalizing the menu item.

① If the setting (Kelvin) is O.K., operate "SEL 3".
Setting is complete and it returns to the initial
Click "ENT". menu select screen.
To abort setting, click "ENT" twice. (The screen
below appears.)
Click "SEL3".
② To abort setting, click "SEL 3".

The unit remains unchanged and it returns to
the initial menu select screen.
To abort setting, click "ENT". (Next screen
appears.)
Operate "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
③ If it is desired to exit the unit select screen. click "ENT".

The window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "ENT".
83
L--740--14--E
9.5 Password Function

To safeguard transmitter signals and readings against unauthorized parameter modification, you can
configure the transmitter to request entering a password before bringing up the configuration screen.
9.5.1 Password function setup

To enable the password function, it is necessary that the following items be set up.
(1) Password function setting (Password Set) (See 9.2.2 Transition chart and description (1) [No. 1-1].)
To activate password function, select "ON" ; to deactivate it, select "OFF".
(2) Creating a password (Password) (See 9.2.2 Transition chart and Description (1) [No. 1-2].)
Enter a 4-digit login password of numerals.
Once these setting are activated, entering a password is asked before any request for password
modification. Use extra care in the setup process because if the user forgets his password, there
will be no way to get to the reconfiguration screen.
(1) Bring up "MODE SELECT" screen.

Repeat clicking "EXT" until "MODE SELECT" screen appears.
("MODE SELECT" screen is shown at left.)
(2) Proceed key operation to enter the setup sreen.
Click "SEL3" and the password setup screen appears.
Click "SEL3". (3) Decide whether to enter a password or not.
To enter a password, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
To exist the password entry process, click "ENT" and then click "SEL3"
to return to the normal screen.

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(4) Creating a password.

① Enter a numerical data.
Enter a password. (In the example at left, password is "1234".)
To increment the number, click "SEL1". To continually increment the
number, hold "SEL1". (Figure changes in the order "0" ⇒ "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒
"3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6" ⇒ "7" ⇒ "8" ⇒ "9".)
To move the cursor to the right, click "ENT". (As you scroll, a click next
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". to the rightmost digit brings up a numerical data field where all digits are
highlighted [decision window]; clicking "ENT" further brings the cursor to
the leftmost digit.)
② Bring up the state ready to finalize the numerical value entry.
(Next screen appears.)
A password value ("1234") is set up.
Click "ENT", readying for finalizing the entry.
Click "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
③ Finalize the entry.

Click "SEL1". The numerical data is finalized and a confirmation screen
appears.
Click "SEL1".
④ If "1234" in this password screen is definitely OK, press "SEL3".
If the password is valid, "MODE SELECT" menu screen appears.
If the password is invalid, a message "Input error" appears, bringing up
the password entry screen again.
To abort the setting process, press "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
⑤To terminate password entry, click
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". "SEL3" and the window returns to
the run screen.
Click "ENT".
＊ Invalid password
＊ Valid password
(5) Password entry is complete.
A setup menu view screen
appears.
84
L--740--14--E
9.6 Self-diagnostic Capabilities

Comprehensive self diagnostic capabilities are incorporated in this transmitter. To derive the maximum
benefit from the instrument, make full use of these functions during maintenance and inspection for early
identification of trouble or for investigation of the causes of trouble in a fault condition.
9.6.1 Probe check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the transmitter is free from any problem in the probe circuitry.
If an error is detected upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate
measurement. You are prompted to follow the instructions given at an NG sign.
(1) Bring up the item of function you want to use.

Firstly, scroll the menu downward until the probe check item (Hardware) appears. (For the
procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition chart.) When the cursor
is located at probe check (Hardware), press "SEL1" to bring up probe check start screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to activate the function or not.

If running a probe check is desired, perform it at zero flow.
To start a probe check, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to end the operation without running a check, press "ENT"
and then click "SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe (hardware) check function.

Run a hardware check screen appears with test results to be indicated at right.
(During the check, GRN LED blinks on and off.)
When test is completed on all items, confirm the results at right. An "NG" indicates possible fault.
If such is the case, take corrective action below:
Corrective action in case of NG

DSP Voltage: A fault in internal power supply is suspected; contact the factory for repair.
Results are indicated upon Input Freq: A fault in the frequency counter. Run a drive coil check (see 9.6.2 Drive coil check).
completion of individual If drive coil proves to be OK, a fault in circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
checks.
Input Phase D: A fault in the phase difference measuring circuit. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3
Transmitter check). If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the
factory.
Input Amp: A fault in the receiver circuit is suspected. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3 Transmitter
check). If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
Input Amp: A fault in the temperature sensor. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3 Transmitter check).
If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
(4) End of hardware check function

To terminate hardware check, press "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
85
L--740--14--E
9.6.2 Drive coil check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the drive coil is free from any problem. If an error is detected
upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate measurement. You are
prompted to follow the instructions given.

Firstly, scroll the menu downward until drive coil check item appears.
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition
chart.)
When the cursor is located at Drive Coil check, click "SEL1" to bring up
Drive coil check start screen.
Click "SEL1".

If running a drive coil check is desired, perform it at zero flow.
To start a drive coil check, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to end the check process without running a check, click
"ENT"and then click "SEL3". The window returns to the menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe (hardware) check function.

Run Drive coil check screen appears and count down begins.
(The check lasts in 30 sec. approx.)
★ Proved acceptable ★ Proved unacceptable
① Found to be OK
No problem is found in the drive coil.
To exit the drive coil check screen,
Click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the
window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
② An error is detected in diagnostics

A problem is found in sensor connections.
Verify the sensor for correct connections.
If connections appear to be OK and yet erratic condition persists,
an open sensor is a possibility. Contact the factory.
To terminate the drive coil check process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end the window returns to the initial
menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
86
L--740--14--E
9.6.3 Transmitter check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the transmitter is free from any problem. If an error is detected
upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate measurement. You are
prompted to follow the instructions given.
A precaution to remember: While the check is in progress, flowmetering is disabled with flowrate at 0
(zero).
Firstly, scroll the menu downward until transmitter check (Txr Condition) appears.
(2) Run the function

Place the cursor over transmitter check (Txr Condition) and click "SEL1".
Transmitter coil check begins and the next screen appears.
Click "SEL1".
(3) Description of transmitter check function
A check is conducted sequentially on individual items and results are
indicated at right.
① Diagnostic results are OK.

No problem is found in the trans-
mitter. A switch to menu select
screen takes place automatically.
★ All items found OK
★ Certain items found unusual.
② A problem is found in the diagnostic test.

A fault is in the transmitter.
Review the nature of item found to be NG and correct the conditions
according to the instructions below.
To exit the transmitter check process, click "ENT".
Corrective actions in case of NG

Failure Temp. Connect: A fault is found in temperature sensor connections. Verify
sensor connections. (See 7. Wiring Connections.)
Click "ENT". If erratic condition persists, contact the factory.
P.O.Connect: A fault is found in pickoff sensor connections. Verify sensor
connections. (See 7. Wiring Connections.)
If erratic condition persists, contact the factory.
EEPROM: Erratic data in EEPROM. A problem in operation is a
possibility; contact the factory. A problem in proper operation
is a possibility; contact the factory.
Date Update: Data error exists. A problem in proper operation is a
possibility; contact the factory.
Txr Temp: Internal temp. of transmitter is out of acceptable range;
continued operation in this condition will reduce life of parts.
Take necessary steps to lower temp.
If NG sign persists despite normal ambient temperature, a
defect in the transmitter is suspected; contact the factory.
③ A warning message upon detection of a fault.

Click "ENT".
④ A warning message upon detection of a fault.
The message tells the operator that correct measurement is no longer
warranted under the current conditions..
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu
select screen.
Click "ENT".
87
L--740--14--E
9.6.4 Pipeline vibration check (at zero flow)

This check diagnoses your flow measurement installation for condition － whether it is free from external
disturbances and noises resulting from pipeline vibration or other factors.
To be successful in obtaining accurate results, run the test at zero flow.
Upon completion of the check, diagnostic results will be indicated and you will be prompted to follow the
instructions given.
Firstly, proceed key operation to show Installation (pipeline vibration check) (zero
flow) screen.
When the cursor is placed over pipeline vibration check (Static), click "SEL1" to bring
up pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) start screen.
Click "SEL1". (2) Decide whether to activate the function or not.

If you want to run pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow), conduct it at zero
flow. To start Static check (zero flow), click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
To exit the check process without running a check, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".
(3) Description of probe check function

Run pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) start screen appears and count
down begins. (The check lasts in 30 seconds, approx.)
★ Best Condition
(4) Diagnostic results

① Best Condition is indicated.
Top rated condition, permitting accurate and satisfactory measurement. Use the
meter in this state.
To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3". Operation
is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Good Condition
② Good Condition is indicated.

Sufficient for flow measurement. Use the meter in this state.
To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3". Operation
is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Not so Good Condition

③ Not so Good Condition
Flow signal fluctuates. Verify influences of pump vibration or other disturbances.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor for
the flow. To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
② Bad Condition
Flow signal fluctuates excessively.
Inspect the pipeline for condition. (See 6.4 Piping Instructions.)
Verify influences of pump vibration or other disturbances.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor for
the flow. To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
88
L--740--14--E
9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (normal flow)

This check diagnoses your flow measurement installation for condition while allowing the fluid flow －
whether it is free from external disturbances and noises resulting from pipeline vibration or other factors.
Upon completion of the check, diagnostic results will be indicated and you will be prompted to follow the
instructions given.
During the process of diagnosis, analog output and pulse output operations are suspended.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show Installation (pipeline vibration check) screen.
When the cursor is placed over pipeline vibration check (Dynamic), click "SEL1" to
bring up pipeline vibration check (Dynamic) start screen.
Click "SEL1".

If you want to run pipeline vibration check (Dynamic), settle down the flow to a
steady state and then click "SEL3" to go to the next screen.
To exit the check process without running a check, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe check (Dynamic) function

Run pipeline vibration check (Dynamic) screen appears and countdown
begins.
(The check lasts in 30 seconds, approx.)
★ Stable flow
(4) Diagnostic results

① Stable flow
Stable flow signals. Satisfactory condition for measurement. Use the meter in
this state.
To end pipeline oscillation check, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to an end
and the window returns to initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Not so stable flow
② Not so stable flow

Flow signal fluctuates.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor
for the fluid flow.
To end pipeline oscillation check process, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to
an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Unstable flow
③ Unstable flow
Flow signal fluctuates excessively; Inaccurate measurement is a possibility.
We suggest to inspect the pipeline once for condition (zero flow). (See 9.6.4
Pipeline vibration check (zero flow).
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor
of flow.
To end pipeline oscillation check process, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to
an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
89
L--740--14--E
9.7 Simulated Signal Input/Output Capabilities

This transmitter features simulated output and input monitor functions. They are beneficial for running a
loop check after installation and for diagnosing erratic flow signals.
9.7.1 Analog output

An analog output is available at any current magnitude.
(The procedure to provide a 12.00mA simulated output of analog output 1 is described here in the
example below.)
(For key-in procedure, see 9.1.1 Key operation.)
Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of analog
output 1. (For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7
Transition chart.) When the cursor is placed over simulated output of analog
output 1 (Fix Analog 1), click "SEL1" to bring up the simulated output setup
screen for analog output 1.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of pulse output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the process without producing a simulated output, click "ENT" and
then click "SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Enter a simulated output value.

Set up a simulated current output current value desired.
For setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the following screen, a value 12.0000 is finalized.)
(4) Run a simulated output

① If a simulated output "12.0000" displayed is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
If you want to abort the simulated output process, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen
Click "ENT".
(5) Simulated output of analog output 1 is now generated.

Output of analog output 1 is fixed to 12.00mA.
(Unaffected by obtained measurements, error processing or other factors.)
(During the check, GFN LED blinks on and off.)
If you want to cancel the simulate output process, click "SEL3".
Simulated output stops and the window returns to initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
90
L--740--14--E
9.7.2 Pulse output

A pulse output is available at any frequency desired.
(Simulated output in pulse output 1 is described here in the example below.)
This section covers the procedure to provide a 2100Hz simulated pulse output. A similar procedure applies
to other output settings.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of pulse
output 1 (Fix Pulse 1).
When the cursor is placed over simulated output of pulse output 1 (Fix Pulse 1),
click "SEL1" to bring up simulated output setup screen for pulse output 1.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of pulse output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the process without running a simulated output, click "ENT" and then
"SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".

Set up a simulated output frequency desired.
For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the following screen, a value 2100.00 is finalized.)
(4) Run a simulated output.

If a simulated output "2100.0" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
"SEL3".
The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Simulated output of pulse output 1 is now generated.

Output of pulse output 1 is fixed to 2100Hz.
Click "SEL3".
91
L--740--14--E
9.7.3 Status output

A status output is available at any level desired.
This section covers the procedure to provide a simulated status output in the setting ON. A similar
procedure applies to other output settings

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of status
output (Status Output).
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition
chart.)
When the cursor is placed over Status Output, click "SEL1" to bring up
simulated output setup screen for status output.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of status output, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the procedure without running a simulated output, click "ENT" and
then "SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".

Select the simulated output mode.
For the setup procedure, see 9.4 Parameter Selection (3).
(4) Run a simulated output.

If setting "On" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
"SEL3".
The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Status output is now generated.

Output of status output is fixed to On.
Click "SEL3".
Click "SEL3".
92
L--740--14--E
9.7.4 Status input

You can monitor the status of status input signal.
(1) Bring up the item of function you want to use "ENT".

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for Status Input monitor.
When the cursor is placed over status input monitor (Status Input), click "SEL1"
to bring up status input monitor screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Status input monitor active now.

The screen changes in the status input monitor mode.
If you want to cancel the input monitor mode, click "SEL3".
Input monitor mode is canceled and the window returns to menu select screen.
★ Status signal is in the open. ★ Status signal is in the short.
★ Status signal is in the short.
★ Status signal is in the open.
Click "SEL3". Click "SEL3".
93
L--740--14--E
9.8 Zeroing Function

This feature detects errors in zeroing and reduces offset flowrate drift to minimum. At the stage of
installation and in cases where flow conditions significantly change, zeroing is an essential part of the
routines required for maintaining accurate and consistent measurement.
During the zeroing, fill the sensor unit completely with the fluid the temperature of which is within ±10℃
from the temperature at which it operates.
CAUTION: 1. Fluid (liquid or gas) must completely fill the sensor unit and be absolutely
at zero flow.
2. Accurate zeroing cannot be achieved unless fluid flow is completely halted.
3. Ensure that the shutoff valve has no leaks.
Zero adjustment comes in three options: with LCD switches, with status input, and through
communication. Each has identical functions. Choose one that best suits your task.
9.8.1 Through LCD display switches

Firstly, proceed key operation to show Calibration (Auto Zero) screen.
When the cursor is placed over zeroing (Auto Zero), click "SEL1" to bring up the next
confirmation screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Confirm zero flow
Shut off valves before after the meter and verify that fluid flow is halted.
Upon confirmation of steady state, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If fluid flow is not completely halted, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3".
Do not attempt zeroing. (Ensure zero flow once again before you perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".

Click "ENT".
(3) Confirm precautionary notes during zeroing.

Performing zeroing overwrites previous zero setting.
Reconfirm. If no problem is found, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to reconfirm the state, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3". Do not
attempt to run zeroing. (Upon reconfirmation of the state, perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".

Click "ENT".
(4) Confirm before performing the zeroing

The current zero offset is shown.
If you want to perform zeroing, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to reconfirm the state, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3". Do not run
zeroing. (Upon reconfirmation of the state, you may perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3".
(5) Zeroing in progress

Zeroing is now in progress. (During the zero adjustment, GRN LED blinks on and off.)
As a warning, RED backlight lights for 1 sec at start and end of zeroing.
(Zeroing lasts for 30 sec. approx.)
(6) Auto zero results

Upon completion of auto zero, results are indicated; 3 sec later, the window returns to menu select screen.
If zeroing has failed, you cannot expect accurate measurement in this state.
Reconfirm the state and perform the zeroing once again.
In case of auto zero failure, an error message "Auto Zero Failure" appears.
(For details, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
★ Zeroing successful ★ Zeroing failed
★3 sec elapsed ★3 sec elapsed
94
L--740--14--E
9.8.2 Through status input signal

You can perform the zeroing with status input signal. Follow the procedure given below for preparation
and operation:
(1) Preparation to assign status input to zeroing
・Set status input function to "Auto Zero".
(For details of setup, see 9.15 Status Input and 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-1].
・Set input mode of status input.
(For details of setup, see 9.15 Status Input and 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-2].
(2) Preparation to assign zeroing in progress to status output
(You can perform the zeroing without this setting. You may omit this procedure if not required.)
By completing the settings that follow, you can monitor the zeroing status with status output.
・Set function assignment of status output to "Error Status".
・Set adjustment item of status output to "On".
・Set working output of status output. (For detail of setup procedure, see 9.14.3 Status output and
9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1], [No. 2-4-5-2-8], and [No. 2-4-5-3].
(3) Procedure to run the zeroing
By working with separately input, you can perform the zeroing. Follow the procedure outline below:
① Preparation
Verify the following precautions:
During the zeroing, fill the sensor unit completely with the fluid the temperature of which is
within ±10℃ from the temperature at which it operates.
CAUTION: 1. Fluid (liquid or gas) must completely fill the sensor unit and be absolutely
at zero flow.
2. Accurate zeroing cannot be achieved unless fluid flow is completely halted.
3. Ensure that the shutoff valves, etc. have no leaks.
② Run the zeroing: set the status input to 0.3 sec or longer in the "Short" (when input mode is
"Short"). Upon detection of an input, the zeroing process starts and this process lasts in about
30 seconds.
In the event zeroing has failed, you cannot expect accurate measurement. Upon completion of
zeroing, do not forget to run a check for possible errors.
9.8.3 Through Link Top communication

Zeroing can be conducted through communication, using the software Link Top. For detail of procedure,
see the Link Top instruction manual.
95
L--740--14--E
9.9 Analog Trim Function

The transmitter is provided with two analog outputs. Both are factory adjusted and requires no further
adjustment. However, if it is absolutely necessary to readjust, follow the instructions outlined below.
Prior to making adjustment, connect required measuring instruments in place for making output level
measurement of analog output. Covered below is the procedure to make 4mA trim of analog output 1
(trimming 4.1mA to 4mA in the example below). A similar procedure applies to other adjustments.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show Trim Analog 1 screen (4mA trim of analog output 1).
When the cursor is placed over 4mA trim of analog output 1, click "SEL1" to bring up
4mA trim screen of analog output 1.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to perform analog trim or not.
To perform 4mA trim of analog output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next
screen.
If you want to cancel the trim process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3" and
the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Enter the present output value. (The transmitter produces 4mA output now.)
At present, the output of analog output 1 is fixed to 4mA.
Enter the current reading (4.1mA) of the instrument connected.
For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the screen below, a value 4.1000 is finalized.)
(4) Conform the measurement value.

If the measurement value "4.1000" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
4mA trim of analog output 1 is performed accordingly.
If you want to cancel the trim process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3" and
the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Confirm the current reading of analog output1.

Analog output 1 produces the 4mA output that has just been trimmed.
Confirm the current value of the instrument connected.
If the instrument reads 4mA and requires no further trimming, click "SEL3".
But in the case the instrument reads a value different from 4mA, click "ENT"
followed by clicking "SEL3". You are now back to step (3) and ready to try again.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
Click "ENT".
Click "SEL3".
96
L--740--14--E
9.10 Reset Function

The transmitter is provided with two pulse outputs along with two counters (1 and 2) and two totalizers
(1 and 2) which work in sync with pulse output. If it is desired to reset one particular counter and its
associated totalizer, follow the procedure outlined below. (Since the totalizer counts pulses coming in from
the counter, you cannot reset them independently.)
The procedure to reset the counter / totalizer 1 to 0 is described here as an example. The same
procedure applies to the other pair.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show counter/totalizer 1 reset (Cnt/Ttl Reset )
screen.
When the cursor is placed over counter/totalizer 1 reset (Count/Total 1), click "SEL1"
to bring up the Count/Total 1 reset screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to reset to 0 or not.

The present counter reading is indicated.
If you want to reset to 0, click "SEL3". The next screen appears and the counter
reads 0.
If you want to cancel the reset process, click "ENT" and then click "SEL3".
The window then returns to menu select screen.

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) The present counter reading after the reset operation is indicated.
If you want to abort the reset process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3"
and the window returns to menu select screen.
If you want to reset to 0 once again, click "SEL3".

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
97
L--740--14--E
9.11 View Variables Screen Setup

Display / Hide and priority of variables view can be set up at the view variables screen.
Follow the procedure outlined below:

Firstly, proceed key operation to show the variables view priority setup (Var. Priority)
screen.
When the cursor is placed over variables view priority setup (Var. Priority), click "SEL1"
to bring up Var. Priority setup screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to change priority of variables or not.

The current priority of variables is shown.
If you want to change the priority, click "SEL3" and the next screen, Var. Priority,
appears.
If you want to cancel the priority change process, click "ENT" followed by clicking
"SEL3" and the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) View priority setup

The current view variables priority is shown.
Individual items are numbered on the right side according to their view priority. If
0 is set, the affected item disappears from the list. By entering numbers desired
and then scrolling through the list downward, the order of items are rearranged.
(For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).)
Available items subject to priority rearrangement are
1. Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate
2. Vol Fiow: Instant volume rate or instant volume rate (fixed density)
3. Density: Density
4. Temp: Temperature
5. Counter1: Counter reading of pulse output 1
6. Counter2: Counter reading of pulse output 2
7. Tortalizer1: Total flow of pulse output 1
8. Totalizer2: Total flow of pulse output 2
9. Ana Out1: % reading of analog output 1
10. Ana Out2: % reading of analog output 2
Upon completion of setup, move the cursor to "Enter" and click "S1"
A Var. Priority confirmation screen appears.
(4) Finalizing priority

① If the priority is OK, click "SEL3".
Click "SEL1".
Setup is complete and the window returns
to the initial menu select screen.
If you want to abort the setup, click "ENT"
and the screen below appears.
Click "SEL3".

② If you want to abort setup, click "SEL3".
Setup is complete and the window returns
to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
98
L--740--14--E
9.12 Pulse Output Function

The transmitter is provided with two pulse outputs which can be set up as independent outputs. Attractive
features include a double pulse output created by allowing two pulses out of phase by 90 or 180 degrees,
and a bidirectional pulse output - linked with status output signal, enabling the operator to discriminate the
direction of flow. Refer to the following topics for description of these features.
(NOTE: When the pulse output assignment, full scale flowrate, or frequency at full scale is modified, the
Counter/Totalizer will be reset.)
9.12.1 Pulse output 1

If you want to use pulse output 1, it is required that the following be set up.
For using bidirectional pulse output or double pulse output, be sure to set the assignment of interest.
(1) Setup procedure
① Pulse output 1 assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-1].)
Kind of flow is selected.
・Mass Flow: Mass flow
・Volume Flow: Volumetric flow
・Nothing: No assignment (Pulse output remains in the Off.)
② Frequency of pulse output 1 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3)
[No. 2-4-3-2].)
The frequency at the flowrate set in ③ is set up. Set it to match the measurable range of the
instrument that measures pulse output. Acceptable setting range is from 0.1 to 10000Hz.
③ Full scale flowrate of pulse output 1 (Rate Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-3].)
An output is generated at the frequency set in ② when the preset flowrate is reached.
④ Low flow cutoff of pulse output 1 (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-4].)
When the proportion of flowrate is smaller than the low flow cutoff value - where the flowrate set
in ③ is set to 100% - the output is clamped at 0. Acceptable setting range is from 0.0 to 10.0%.
⑤ The state of pulse output in an error (Pulse) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-6-2].)
Pulse output value in an error can be selected from the following three options:
・Zero: Pulse output is halted.
・Hold: Pulse output immediately before an error is maintained.
・Upscale: 11kHz is output. (For detail of output in an error, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
9.12.2 Pulse output 2

If you want to use pulse output 2, it is required that the following be set up.
For using bidirectional pulse output or double pulse output, be sure to set the assignment of interest.
(In the case of double pulse output, set only pulse output 2 assignment. Invalidating parameters other
than that, pulse output 2 is also output with the same setting as that of pulse output 1.)
① Pulse output 2 assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart(3) [No. 2-4-4-1].) Type of flow to
be assigned is selected.
・Mass Flow: Mass flow
・Volume Flow: Volumetric flow
・Double pulse 90: Double pulse output 90°
・Double pulse －90: Double pulse output － 90°
・Nothing: No assignment (Pulse output remains in the OFF.)
As for double pulse output, see 9.12.4 Double pulse output.
As for ②, ③, and ④ below, a procedure similar to pulse output 1 applies. See 9.12.1 Pulse output (1).
② Frequency of pulse output 2 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3)
[No. 2-4-4-2].)
③ Full scale flowrate of pulse output 2 (Rate Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-4-3].)
④ Low flow cutoff of pulse output 2 (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-4-4].)
⑤ The state of pulse output in an error (Pulse) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-6-2].)
99
L--740--14--E
9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output

By allowing status output signal to provide flow direction information, the transmitter distinguishes
between pulse outputs in the forward and reverse flow, and counts up pulses independently. (Hence, it
requires on the part of measuring instrument a circuit to distinguish the directions of flow.) To utilize this
function, you need to set up the following in addition to settings of pulse outputs 1 and 2.
(1) Setup procedure
① Status output function assignment (Function) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・Select Bi Direction.
② Active output of status output (Mode) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-3].)
Set the active output status of status output.
・Off Active: Output is in the Short in the forward fluid flow.
・On Active: Output is in the Open in the forward fluid flow.
(2) An example of settings and assignments

Status output function assignment (Function): Bi Direction
Active output of status output (Mode): Off Active
Pulse output 1 assignment (Assign): Mass Flow
Frequency of pulse output 1 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor): 1000 [Hz]
Full scale flowrate of pulse output 1 (Rate Factor): 100.0 [kg/min]
Low flow cutoff of pulse output 1 (Lowcut): 10.0 [%]
100
80
Mass flowrate [kg/min]
60
40
20
0
Time
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
Output freq. [Hz]
1000
800
600
400 Low flow cutoff freq.
100[Hz]
200
=1000｢Hz]×10[%]/100"
0
Output clamped at 0 Output appears Output clamped at Output appears due to

due to proportion of due to proportion 0 due to proportion proportion of flowrate > low
flowrate < low cutoff. of flowrate > low of flowrate < low cutoff.
cutoff. cutoff.
Status output
Open
Short
Status output is open Status output is short
as flowrate goes as flowrate goes
negative below 0. positive below 0.
100
L--740--14--E
9.12.4 Double pulse output

This function provides pulse output 2 in sync with pulse output 1.
It is enabled by setting up one of the following to pulse output 2 assignment.
(1) Setup procedure
① Pulse output 2 assignment (Assign)
Pulse output 2 lags pulse output 1 by 90 degrees (1/4 of the period) when it goes into action.
(The maximum lag is 1 msec, above which is a lag within 1/4 of the period, however.)
Pulse output 2 goes into action, polarity of pulse output 1 waveform inverted.
・Double pulse －90: Double pulse output －90°
Pulse output 1 lags pulse output 2 by 90 degrees (1/4 of the period) when it goes into action.
(The maximum lag is 1 msec, above which is a lag within 1/4 of the period, however.)
(2) Examples of setting and behavior
① Double pulse 90°
・Fast pulse output (above 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
90°
(1/4 of the period)
・Slow pulse output (below 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
1msec
② Double pulse 180°

Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
③ Double pulse －90°

・Fast pulse output (above 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
90°
(1/4 of the period)
・Slow pulse output (below 250Hz)

Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
1msec
101
L--740--14--E
9.13 Analog Output Function

The transmitter is provided with two analog outputs which can be assigned to "mass flow", "volume flow",
"temperature", "density" and "drive output". The setup procedure is outlined below:
(1) Setup procedure

By reconfiguring the following five parameters, outputs that suit your particular application are made
available.
① Output assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-1] and [No. 2-4-2-1].)
Types of measurement are selected.
・Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate
・Vol Flow: Instant volume flowrate
・Density: Density
・Temp: Temperature
・Drive Output: Drive output
・Nothing: No assignment (Analog output remains at 4mA.)
When assignments are modified, reconfigure upper limit, lower limit, low flow cutoff, and damping
factor to values that best suit your application.
② Upper limit value (URV) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-2] and [No. 2-4-2-2].)
The lower limit of analog output can be changed; a 4mA output is produced when the preset
value is reached. Values outside the maximum range (※1) and smaller than the lower limit value
are unacceptable, however.
③ Lower limit value (LRV) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-3] and [No. 2-4-2-3].)
The upper limit of analog output can be changed; a 20mA output is produced when the preset
value is reached. Values outside the maximum range (※1) and larger than the upper limit value
are unacceptable, however.
④ Low flow cutoff (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-4] and [No. 2-4-2-4].)
The low flow cutoff of analog output (%) can be changed. When the low flow cutoff value is
larger than the proportion of analog output － where the upper limit is set to 100% and the lower
limit is 0% － the analog output becomes 4mA. Acceptable setting range is from 0% to 10%.
⑤ Damping factor (Added Damp) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-5] and [No. 2-4-2-5].)
Damping constant of analog output (sec) can be changed. Select a larger value when analog
output fluctuates excessively; select a smaller value when fast response is desired.
Acceptable setting range is from 0 to 200 (sec).
⑥ The state of analog output in an error (Analog) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (5) [No. 2-4-6-1].)
・Downscale: 2.4mA is output.
・Zero: 　　 4mA is output.
・Hold: 　　 Analog output immediately before an error is maintained.
・Upscale: 21.6mA is output.
(For details of outputs in an error, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
※1 Maximum range
Instant mass flowrate: － Max. allowable range to max. allowable range
Instant volume flowrate: － Max. allowable range/0.3 to max. allowable range/0.3
Temperature: Max. temperature range of sensor
Density: 0.0 to 5.0
CAUTION: When measurement-related unit set up at Assign is modified, the

upper and lower limit values will be converted automatically to the
measures to read in the unit selected.
102
L--740--14--E
9.14 Status Output

One output chosen from status information, flow direction, and alarm state can be assigned to the status
output.
For details of individual functions, refer to the respective items below:
9.14.1 Status output (Error Status)

By assigning the output of status information to the status output, the state of the flowmeter of interest can
be output. Listed below are user assignable flowmeter-related items that can be set up and configured
individually.
・Sensor error (Sensor Failure)
・Transmitter warning (Txr Failure)
・Calibration error (Calibration Failure)
・Output error (Saturated Alarm)
・Parameter alarm (Parameter Alarm)
・Transmitter alarm (Transmitter Alarm)
・Slug flow alarm (Slug Alarm)
・Calibration in progress (Cal in Progress)
・Simulated output being produced (Fix Output)
(For details, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.)
(1) Operating procedure
・Select "Error Status" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5
Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・The flowmeter-related states listed above are available for an output; set up each item to
either on or off. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-2-1] thru [No. 2-4-5-2-9].)
・Set up the active output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs
become available.
With setting "On Active", the output is Short when the preset state is reached.
With setting "Off Active", the output is Open when the preset state is reached.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-3].)
When the settings above take effect, the functions are ready for use.
9.14.2 Bidirectional flow direction output (Bi Direction)

By selecting the bidirectional output for status output, an output representing the flow direction becomes
available.
Pulse output is normally available in the forward direction, but with the bidirectional output setup, pulse
output in the reverse direction is also available. (For details, see 9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output.)
・Select "Bi Direction" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5
・Set the active output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs
become available.
With setting "On Active", the output is Short when the fluid flows in the forward direction.
With setting "Off Active", the output is Open when the fluid flows in the forward direction.
103
L--740--14--E
9.14.3 H/L alarm output (H/L Alarm)

By assigning the high/low alarm output to the status output, an error output of high/low alarm of interest
can be provided. Listed below are available variables that can be set up.
・Dens: Density
・Counter 1: Counter 1
(For details of high/low alarms, see 9.16 High/Low Alarm Functions.)
・Select "H/L Alarm" in selecting the status output function assignment; the state of high/low
alarm can then be output. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・Set the output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs become
available.
With setting "On Active", the output is in the Short in an alarmed condition of high/low
alarms.
With setting "Off Active", the output is in the Open in an alarmed condition of high/low
alarms.
9.14.4 No assignment (No Function)

When this setting takes effect, the following status output appears.
With setting "On Active", the output is always in the Open.
With setting "Off Active", the output is always in the Short.
・Select "No Function" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5
9.15 Status Input Function

One of "pulse/analog output fixed to 0%", "zeroing", "totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset", "totalizer 1 reset", or
"totalizer 2 reset" can be assigned to the status input.
For details of individual functions, refer to the respective items below.
9.15.1 Pulse/analog output fixed to 0% (0% Sig Lock)

When an input arrives across status input terminals, pulse output and analog output are fixed to 0Hz and
0mA, respectively.
Stopping an input across status input terminals cancels fixing of the output.
・Select "0% Sig Lock" in selecting the status input function assignment.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-1].)
・Set the input mode of status input. With the setting activated, the following input modes
become enabled.
With setting "Short Active", the function is activated when status input terminals are shorted
at least for 0.3 sec.
With setting "Open Active", the function is activated when status input terminals are left
open at least for 0.3 sec. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-2].)
When the settings above take effect, the function is ready for use.
104
L--740--14--E
9.15.2 Zero adjustment (Auto Zero)

When an input arrives across status input terminals, automatic zero is initiated to reduce offset flowrate
drift to minimum.
(For detail of the function, see "9.8 Zeroing Function".)
・Select "Auto Zero" in selecting the status input function assignment.
・Set the input mode of status input. According to the setting, the following input modes
become active.
open at least for 0.3 sec.
9.15.3 Totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 1 and 2)

The transmitter is provided with counters (Counters 1 and 2) and totalizers (Totalizers 1 and 2) which
work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, all these
counters － Counters 1 and 2 and Totalizers 1 and 2 － are reset to 0.
In this connection, counter 1 and totalizer 1 respond to pulse 1 output while counter 2 and totalizer 2
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Function.)
・Select "Reset C/T 1･2" in selecting the status input function assignment.
become active.
9.15.4 Totalizer 1 reset (Reset Total 1)

work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, counter 1
and totalizer 1 are reset to 0.
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Functions.)
・Select "Reset D/T 1" in selecting the status input function assignment.
・Set the input mode of status input. According to the settings, the following input modes
become active.
105
L--740--14--E
9.15.5 Totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 2)

work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, counter 2
and totalizer 2 are reset to 0.
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Function.)
・Select "Reset C/T 2" in selecting the status input function assignment.
become active.
9.16 High/Low Alarm Function

The transmitter provides the operator with quick grasp of conditions of the installation － flowrate,
temperature, density and total flow － when high/low alarms are set up. In the event the preset alarm
conditions are met, it tells the operator the event with an alarm message along with a status output signal.
Setup procedure and behavior of alarm functions are described below:
(1) Setup procedure
Ensure positive settings on individual items.
① Status output function assignment (Function) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
To use high/low alarm function, it is essential to assign high/low alarms to status output.
Set "H/L Alarm" to status output function assignment.
("H/L Alarm" setting is required even in cases of high alarm only or low alarm only.)
② Output mode of status output (Mode) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-3].)
Set up the output mode of status output.
・Active output of status output: Off Active or On Active
(For detail of the status output function, see 9.14 Status Output Function.)
③ Assignment of H/L alarm values (Assign) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-1].)
From the following options, select the variables against which the transmitter identifies
alarmed conditions.
・Dens: Density
④ Alarm type selection (H/L Alm. Type) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-2].)
Select alarm type from the following options.
・To validate only high alarm, select "High Alarm".
・To validate only low alarm, select "Low Alarm".
・To validate both high and low alarms, select t "H/L Alarm".
⑤ High alarm value setting (High Alm. Po.) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-3].)
If the input exceeds this setting, the high alarm is activated. Set the high alarm value
desired.
In the case "Low Alarm" is set in ④, setting is not required.
106
L--740--14--E
⑥ Low alarm value setting (Low Alm. Po.) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-4].)
・Low Alm. Po.: Low alarm value
In the case "High Alarm" is set in ④, setting is not required.
⑦ Hysteresis value setting for high/low alarms (H/L Alm. hys)
The setting determines a dead (or immunity) zone following the occurrence of an alarm.
Select a larger value when measurement fluctuates excessively; select a smaller value if
fast recovery from alarmed condition is desired.
(2) An example of settings and assignments

Status output assignment (Function): H/L Alarm
Active output of status output (Mode): Off Active
H/L alarm value assignment (Assign): Mass Flow
Alarm type selection (H/L Alm. Type): H/L Alarm
High alarm value setting (High Alm. Po.): 900 [kg/min]
Low alarm value setting (Low Alm. Po.): 200 [kg/min]
High/low alarm hysteresis value setting (H/L Alm. hys): 100 [kg/mn]
Instant mass flowrate [kg/min]
｝
900 High alarm
[900]
800
700
Hysteresis
600
of H/L alarm
500 [100]
400
｝
300
200 Low alarm
[200]
100
Status output
0
Time
Open
Short
H/L alm active H/L alm active
Low alarm arises Low alarm canceled as instant High alarm arises High alarm canceled as
as instant mass mass flowrate exceeds [low as instant mass instant mass flowrate falls
flowrate falls below alarm + H/L alarm hysteresis]. flowrate exceeds below [high alarm + H/L alarm
low alarm value. low alarm value. hysteresis].
107
L--740--14--E
9.17 Gas Mixed Flow Alarm Function

If gases exist in large quantities in the process fluid, it is impossible to make accurate flow measurement.
This feature, if correctly set up, detects gases entrapped in the fluid, indicates a slug flow alarm, clamps
the flow signal at 0, and provides a status output telling the operator the alarm event. (If you want to use
this function, set the higher limit density value of slug flow to 10 (default) and the lower limit density value
of slug flow to 0 (default). This function then remains disabled.) The setup procedure of slug flow function
is outlined below.
(1) Setup procedure
Ensure positive settings of individual items.
① Lower limit density of slug flow (Slug Low) (See 9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-3].)
Upon detection of density smaller than this setting, the circuitry interprets it as slug flow
and starts analysis.
Set a value small enough with respect to the density expected for the fluid of interest.
② Higher limit density of slug flow (Slug High) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-4].)
Upon detection of density larger than this setting, the circuitry interprets it as slug flow and
starts analysis.
Set a value large enough with respect to the density expected for the fluid of interest.
③ Slug flow identification time (Slug Duration) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-5].)
It is the time required for the circuitry to identify the slug flow being outside the slug flow
high/low limit and to issue a slug flow alarm (sec). Until this slug flow identification time
expires, it retains the most recent and properly measured value. After the expiration of this
preset time, the flowrate becomes 0.
④ If you want to assign this slug flow alarm in the status output function to the status output,
setting the following is required: (For detail of this output function, see 9.14 Status Output
Function.)
・Status output function assignment: Error Status (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-4-
5-1].)
・Slug flow error select: On (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-2-7].)
・Active output of status output: Off Active or On Active (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4)
[No. 2-4-5-3].)
108
L--740--14--E
(2) An example of settings and behavior

・Lower limit density value of slug flow: 0.5 [g/ml]
・Upper limit density value of slug flow: 2.0 [g/ml]
・Slug flow identification time: 10 [sec]
2.0 "Higher limit density [2.0]"

Density [g/ml]
Density
0.5 "Lower limit density [0.5]"
0
Time
Slug flow identifi- 10sec Slug flow identifi- 10sec
cation time cation time
Flowrate with slug flow alarm active
Flowrate [kg/min]
Flowrate with slug flow alarm inactive
0
Time
Slug flow Slug flow Slug flow Slug flow
under alarm active under alarm active
test test
Density fell below Alarm canceled Density exceeded Alarm canceled

high limit value; as density high limit value; as density fell
slug flow test exceeded low slug flow test below high limit
starts with flow limit value. starts with flow value.
data retained. data retained.
Density fell below low limit value; Density exceeded high limit value;
as slug flow test duration expires, as slug flow test duration expires,
a slug flow alarm is issued with a slug flow alarm is issued with
flowrate clamped at 0. flowrate clamped at 0.
109
L--740--14--E
9.18 Setup Units List

Measurement type No. Acceptable setup units LCD display
M-1 g/sec g/s
M-2 g/min g/min
M-3 g/hr g/h
M-4 kg/sec kg/s
M-5 kg/min kg/min
M-6 kg/hr kg/h
M-7 kg/day kg/d
M-8 MetTon/min Mt/min
Instant mass
M-9 MetTon/hr Mt/h
flowrate
M-10 MetTon/day Mt/d
M-11 lb/sec lb/s
M-12 lb/min lb/min
M-13 lb/hr lb/h
M-14 lb/day lb/d
M-15 ShTon/min St/min
M-16 ShTon/hr St/h
M-17 ShTon/day St/d
V-1 ml/sec mL/s
V-2 ml/min mL/min
V-3 ml/hr mL/h
V-4 liter/sec L/s
V-5 liter/min L/min
V-6 liter/hr L/h
V-7 liter/day L/d
V-8 CuMtr/sec Cm/s
V-9 CuMtr/min Cm/min
V-10 CuMtr/hr Cm/h
V-11 CuMtr/day Cm/d
Instant volume
V-12 gal/sec ga/s
flowrate
V-13 gal/min ga/min
V-14 ImpGal/min Ig/min
V-15 ImpGal/hr Ig/h
V-16 ImpGal/day Ig/d
V-17 CuFt/sec Cf/s
V-18 CuFt/min Cf/min
V-19 CuFt/hr Cf/h
V-20 bbl/sec bl/s
V-21 bbl/min bl/min
V-22 bbl/hr bl/h
V-23 bbl/day bl/d
D-1 SGU SGU
D-2 g/ml g/mL
D-3 g/Cucm g/cc
Density D-4 kg/l kg/L
D-5 kg/CuMtr kg/Cum
D-6 lb/gal lb/gal
D-7 lb/CuFt lb/Cf
T-1 deg C deg C
T-2 deg F deg F
Temperature
T-3 Kelvin Kelvin
T-4 deg R deg R
110
Indications in error Influences on output in an error
Error Status message Description Coping action RED GRN Backlight Analog Analog Pulse Pulse Status
type
LED LED （※1） Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output
Analog Output 1 21.6mA None
Analog output 1 out of －10 to 110(%) range; failure Measurement is out of range. Adjust measurement
Saturated
to produce proper output. such that measurement selected falls within [lower 2.4mA None
(Ana. Out 1 Satur) Unaffected
limit of analog output to upper limit value], or modify Per
Analog Output 2 Saturated Analog output 2 out of －10 to 110(%) range; failure None 21.6mA
Saturated setting. (※6) status
(Ana. Out 2 Satur） to produce proper output. Blink ON OFF None 2.4mA
Alarm select
Pulse Output 1 Saturated Pulse output 1 exceeds 11kHz; failure to produce (※7)
Instant flowrate selected exceeds full scale flowrate 11KHz None
(Pls. Out 1 Satur) proper output.
of pulse output. Lower instant flowrate for use or Unaffected
Pulse Output 2 Saturated Pulse output 2 exceeds 11kHz; failure to produce
contact the factory.
increase full scale flowrate setting. (※5) None 11KHz
(Pls. Out 2 Satur) proper output.
A fault in drive oil connections is a possibility. Verify
Drive Input Out of Range Drive frequency out of normal range; failure to make
drive coil connections by self diagnostics.
(Drive Out Of Range) proper measurement.
10. MAINTENANCE
(For details,see 9.6.2 Drive coil check.)

10.1 Error Messages
Scale Over Mass flowrate exceeds 110% of max. allowable Mass flowrate exceeds the specification.
(Scale Over) range; possible failure to make proper measurement. Use within the maximum allowable range.
Temperature Out of A fault in temperature sensor is a possibility. Verify
Temperature out of normal range, failure to make
Range temperature sensor connections by self diagnostics.
proper measurement.
(Temp Out Of Range) (For details,see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.)
Density Outside Limit Density measured out of normal range (0 to 5[g/mL], Bubble entrapment is a possibility. Per error Per
(Density Outside) failure to make proper measurement. Check for bubble entrapment. Per error output
Sensor ORG output status
ON OFF Setting
Failure A fault in pickoff sensor is a possibility. Verify pickoff (※4) Setting select
P.O. Sig Error(P.O. Sig Pickoff signal voltage out of normal range, failure to (※6)
coil connections by self diagnostics. (※5) (※7)
Err) make proper measurement.
(For details,see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.)
Temperature Connect Error A fault possible in temperature sensor wiring A fault in temperature sensor is a possibility. Check
(Temp Connect Err) connections temperature sensor connections.
P.O. Connect Error A fault in pickoff coil connections.
A fault possible in pickoff sensor wiring connections
(P.O. Connect Err) Check pickoff coil connections for condition.
A fault in drive coil connections. Check drive coil
connections. (This error does not show up in
Drive Coil Error A fault possible in drive coil wiring connections
measurement. Upon error diction, be sure to verify
drive coil connections by self diagnostics.)
EEPROM Error Blink ORG
An error in parameters; inactive operation A fault in EEPROM is suspected. Contact the factory. OFF 2.4mA Stopped OFF
Transmitter (EEPROM Err) (※2) (※4)
Failure Data Update Error A fault in transmitter is suspected. Contact the ORG Per error output Per error output Status
A fault in internal data ON OFF
(Data Update Err) factory. (※4) setting (※3, 6) setting (※3, 5) Select (※7)
Analog 1 Set Alarm Parameter setting of analog output 1 or analog
(Ana. 1 Set Alm.) output 2 comes under any of the following conditions
Verify parameters and reconfigure to acceptable
・Upper limit < lower limit
Analog 2 Set Alarm values. (※6)
・Upper limit or lower limit > max. acceptable setting Per error
(Ana. 2 Set Alm.) ・Upper limit or lower limit < max. acceptable setting Per error output Status
Parameter output
Blink ON OFF setting Select
Alarm H/L alarm parameter setting comes under any of the setting
(※6) (※7)
H/L Alarm Point Set following conditions (※5)
Verify parameters and reconfigure to acceptable
Alarm ・High alarm < Low alarm
values. (For details, see 9.16 H/L Alarm Functions.)
(H/L po.Set Alm) ・High alarm or low alarm > max. acceptable setting
・High alarm or low alarm < max. acceptable setting
Calibration Auto Zero Failed Wait until the fluid flow settles down to a steady state Status
Auto zero offset (correction) is out of normal range. Blink OFF OFF Unaffected Unaffected
Failure (Auto Zero Fail) and retry zeroing. Select (※7)
Stays on for a preset duration (slug flow check) upon Only flow output
Clamped Status
Slug Flow Slug Flow Alarm detention of gas entrapment Air entrapment in the fluid is a possibility. Verify the Clamped
Blink ON OFF Select
Alarm (Slug Flow) After expiration of slug flow check duration upon gas fluid and line for conditions.
Flow output at "0" Stopped (※7)
entrapment detection
High ambient temperature cause a rise in the
Transmitter Temperature
Transmitter’s internal temperature is unusual (above transmitter’s internal temperature, leading to shorten Status
Transmitter Alarm Blink ON OFF Continued Continued
80°). life of components. Take necessary step to lower Select
(Txr Temp Alm.)
Alarm ambient temperature. (※7)
Switch Alarm(Switch Alm.) Faulty operating switches Faulty switch operation. Contact the factory. Blink ON OFF Continued Continued
※1: Even with the run indicator staying off, the white backlight comes on in response to switch operation when backlight is set in the "ON" or "sleep".
※2: In an alarm, the LED blinks at a faster rate (at intervals of 100ms) than in other alarms (at intervals of 250ms).
※3: Outputs can go uncontrolled under certain circumstances if the transmitter fails, however.
※4: For 5 minutes after occurrence of an alarm condition (or sleep duration of backlight setting), the ORG backlight comes on; after which it will blink on and off.
※5: For details,see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.
※6: For details,see 9.13 Analog Output Function.
111
of trouble and finding necessary corrective action. If the problem persists, or if you have any question,
nature. Sections 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages will assist you in identifying the cause
In the event an error occurs, an error message appears at the bottom of LCD display. Make sure of its
L--740--14--E
※7: For details,see 9.14 Status Output Function.

Indications in error Influences on output in an error
Error type Status message Description RED GRN Backligh Analog Analog Pulse Pulse Status
112
LED LED （※1） Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output
Analog Output 1 Fixed
Analog output 1 fixed is active (※2) Fixed output Unaffected
(Ana. Out 1 Fix)
Unaffected
Analog Output 2 Fixed
Analog output 2 fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Fixed output
(Ana. Out 2 Fix)
Unaffected
Pulse Output 1 Fixed
Pulse output 1 fixed is active (※2) Fixed output Unaffected
L--740--14--E
(Pls. Out 1 Fix)

Fixed Output Pulse Output 2 Fixed OFF Blink OFF Unaffected
Pulse output 2 fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Fixed output
(Pls. Out 2 Fix)
Status Output Fixed
Status output fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Unaffected Fixed output
(Status Out Fix)
0% Signal Lock With a status input, 0% signal lock is active. (※2)
4mA Stopped Unaffected
(0% Sig Lock) (Analog output clamped at 4mA with no pulse output.)
OFF while ORG
indicator blinks at
Calibration Calibration in Progress
Auto zero in progress OFF Blink operation startup Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
in Prgress (Cal. in Progress)
and shutoff.
OFF during the test
H/L Alarm Triggered H/L alarm occurred and is active.
H/L Alarm OFF Blink OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(H/L Alm. Trig.) (For details, see 9.16 High/Low Alarm Function.)
Self-Diagnosis
Self diagnosis in progress OFF Blink OFF 0％ Stopped Unaffected
(Self diag)
Installation
Test Pipeline vibration check in progress OFF Blink OFF 0％ Stopped Unaffected
(Installation)
10.2 A List of Status Messages
Maintenance Test
Maintenance in progress OFF Blink OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(Maintenance Test)
Key Protect A key operation attempt with key protect activated
OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(key Protect) (If key operation is required, reconfiguration is needed.)
When the number of run hours has exceeded 100,000
hours, it could lead to component failure or degradation.
Transmitter Operating-Time Over
We suggest transmitter replacement. OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
("●" blinks at lower left of LCD)
(You can cancel indicator ●.
See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 4-3].)
Transmitter
Operation Warmup in progress
Transmitter warming up
(Stays on for 20 minutes upon power on. Countdown OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(WARMUP 20)
value decrements at one (1) minute intervals.)
Poor power supply condition is a possibility. (A short
duration power cycling has occurred a couple of times.)
Powr OK ? While there is no problem in continuation of operation, OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
we suggest to run a check for condition of power supply.
This message goes out automatically in 20 minutes.
※1: Even with the run indicator staying off, the white backlight comes on in response to switch operation if backlight is set in the sleep mode.
※2: Simulated output is available irrespective of the state of alarm. (Certain types of error disables output, however.)
L--740--14--E
10.3 Replacement Parts

We recommend to keep a stock of replacement parts in case anything goes wrong. Replacement parts
are available at the OVAL representative in your area or OVAL Customer Service Department. Please
supply us with the flowmeter model, part name, product number, and quantity when you order.
Interconnect cable (Teflon or PVC): Quantity 1
11. EX-INFORMATION
11.1 Nameplates
Explosionproof pertinent information is described (as“PRODUCT”or“Ex”) on the label attached on
the product.
SENSOR SIDE
OVAL ALTImass FLOW METER Ex ib ⅡB T

CERT. No. .DEKRA 11ATEX0172 ③
MODEL CA00A＊1＊＊＊2＊＊＊＊＊2 ① RATING
IS CIRCUITS
BORE DATE DRIVE CERCUIT OTHER CERCUITS
Ⅱ2G 0344
SIRIAL NO. Ui ： 12. 3V Ui ： 15. 0V
Ii ： 0. 878A Ii ： 17mA
MAX. PRESS. Pi ： 2. 7W Pi ： 64mW
MAX. TEMP. ＋ ② deg. C Ci ： 0 μF Ci ： 0 μF
SEE INSTRUTION MANUAL FOR Li VALUE OF DRIVE CIRCUIT AND OTHER
TAG. NO. −40deg. C≦Ta≦＋60deg. C
OVAL Corporation 1−9−5 Fukuura, Kanazawa-ku, Yokohama, Kanagawa, 236-8645 JAPAN
TRANSMITTER SIDE
OVAL ALTImass FLOW METER OVAL CORPORATION
TYPE □ PA0K C □ 12 Ex d ib ⅡB T4 Gb
MODEL □ PA0K C □ 22 Ex d［ib］ⅡB T6 Gb
Ⅱ2G 0344
SERIAL NO. RATING
POWER □ AC240V 50/60Hz 100mA 25VA
FLOW RATE □ DC30V
MAX. ALLOWED VOLTAGE OF OUTPUT CIRCUITS ：
500mA 15W
AC250V, 50/60Hz, DC250V

POWER MAX. FLUID TEMP. MEASURED BY SENSOR ：＋80deg.C
（ONLY APPLICATION FOR THE INTEGRAL TYPE）
TAG. NO. （ONLY CB015：＋70deg. C）
−40deg. C≦Ta≦＋55deg. C
DATE WARNING
CERT. No.：DEKRA 11ATEX0171X
1−9−5 FUKUURA,
1. DO NOT MODIFY OR ALTER COMPONENTS AND WIRING OF THE DEVICE. KANAZAWA-KU,
YOKOHAMA,
2. SEE INS. MANUAL NO. L-740 FOR THE DETAILS OF ARRANGEMENT AND WIRING. KANAGAWA,
3. AFTER-DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. 236-8645 JAPAN
Fig.11.1
WARNING: 1. Do not modify or alter components and wiring of the device.

2. See Ins. Manual No. L-740 for the details of arrangement and wiring.
3. AFTER-DE-ENERGIZING, delay 3 minutes before opening
113
114
NOTES
L--740--14--E
HAZARDUS AREA NON HAZARDUS AREA
MASSFLOW METER（INTEGRAL TYPE）

Uncertificated
SENSOR TRANSMITTER Apparatus
CN11 CN22 A1 ＋）
DRIVE CIRCUIT 1AB○1AB DRIVE CIRCUIT A1 −） Um : 250V
2AB○2AB A2 ＋）
Ui ： 12. 3V Ci ： 0 μF U D ： 12. 3V C D ：8.1 μF A2 −）
3AB○3AB P1 ＋）
TB2
Ii ： 0. 878A I D ： 0. 864A L D ：0.18mH P1 −） OUTPUT CIRCUITS
Pi ： 2. 7W L i ： AA CN15 CN23 P D ： 2. 66W P2 ＋）
1AB○1AB P2 −） AC250V 50/60Hz
MAX. TEMP. ：80deg.C 2AB○2AB CIRCUITS OTHER DC250V
S. I. ＋）
CIRCUITS OTHER THAN DRIVE CIRCUIT 3AB○3AB THAN DRIVE CIRCUIT S. I. −）
TB3
S.D. ＋）
Ui ： 15. 0V C i ： 0 μF 4AB○4AB U D ： 7.2V C D ：240 μF S.D. −）
I i ： 17mA 5AB○5AB I D ： 9.4mA L D ：2.2mH
6AB○6AB L ＋） POWER SUPPLY
Pi ： 64mW L i ： BB P D ： 16.9mW
TB1
G −）
7AB○7AB F6
AC240V 50/60Hz
DC30V
Ⅱ2G Ex d ib ⅡB T4 Gb
−40deg. C≦ta≦＋55deg. C
MASSFLOW METER（INTEGRAL TYPE）

Uncertificated
SENSOR TRANSMITTER Apparatus
B B B TB20 A1 ＋）
DRIVE CIRCUIT ○ ○B 1AB DRIVE CIRCUIT A1 −）
※1: In case of CS080, the lower limit temp. is -20deg.C

R R R A2 ＋）
Um : 250V
Ui ： 12. 3V Ci ： 0 μF ○ ○R 2AB UO ： 12. 3V CO ：8.1 μF
SPECIAL CABLE A2 −）
BR BR BR P1 ＋）
TB2
Ii ： 0. 878A ○ ○BR 3AB IO ： 0. 864A LO ：0.18mH OUTPUT CIRCUITS

VT VI DRIVE CIRCUIT VI TB21 P1 −）
MAX. TEMP. ：T4 = 80deg.C Pi ： 2. 7W L i ： AA ○ ○VI 1AB PO ： 2. 66W P2 ＋）
11.2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONTROL DRAWING)
A A A P2 −） AC250V 50/60Hz
MAX. TEMP. ：T3 = 150deg.C ○ LW=8.22mH CW=30mF ○OA 2AB
Y Y Y CIRCUITS OTHER S. I. ＋） DC250V
CIRCUITS OTHER THAN DRIVE CIRCUIT ○ ○Y 3AB
MAX. TEMP. ：T2 = 200deg.C BL BL BL THAN DRIVE CIRCUIT S. I. −）
CIRCUITS OTHER
TB3
○ ○BL 4AB S.D. ＋）

Ui ： 15. 0V Ci ： 0 μF BY GY THAN DRIVE CIRCUIT GY S.D. −）
○ ○GY 5AB UD ： 7.2V CD ：240 μF
※4: In case of CS010 to CS080, the upper limit temp. is +130deg.C

※3: In case of CB006 to CB050, the upper limit temp. is +125deg.C
I i ： 17mA M V LW=11.0mH CW=26mF V ID ： 9.4mA LD ：2.2mH
○ ○W 6AB L ＋）
Pi ： 64mW L i ： BB G G G POWER SUPPLY
TB1
○ ○G 7AB PD ： 16.9mW G −）
F6
AC240V 50/60Hz
DC30V
2 Ⅱ2G Ex d［ib］ⅡB T6 Gb
Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡB T 3 Gb
4 −40deg. C≦ta≦＋55deg. C
Fig.11.2
※2: For CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA004, CA100 and CA150, only separate types are applicable.
L--740--14--E
Sensor coil inductance (Li=AA, BB) and internal resistance value

Drive circuit Circuits other than drive circuit
Drive coil Pick off coils
Sensor type
Li max R min Drive Li max R min
resistance
(mH) (Ω) (Ω) (mH) (Ω)
CA00A＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 8.1 161 2400

8.1 161
CA001＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 8.1 161 2400
CA003＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 3.6 80 2400 3.3 76.25
CA004＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 33.7 337 — 3.6 69
CA006＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 8.0 162 2400
CA010＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 8.0 162 2400
CA015＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 33.7 33.7 —
CA025＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 55.6 348 —
CA040＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 31.0 172 — 8.0 162
CA050＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 31.0 172 —
CA080＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 13.9 89 60
CA100＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 13.9 89 60
CA150＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 13.9 89 60
CB006＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 3.6 69 1000
CB010＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 3.6 69 1000
CB015＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 15.2 159 —
3.6 69
CB025＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 55.6 358 —
CB040＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 31.0 173 —
CB050＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 31.0 173 —
CS010＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 12.3 202 — 7.23 151
CS015＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 12.3 202 — 12.3 202
CS025＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 15.3 174 — 7.23
CS040＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 8.0 85 —
151
CS050＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 6.8 87 — 7.2
CS080＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 2.9 54 —
Repairs relevant to explosionproof configuration by user are not allowed and all such works shall be
handled by the manufacturer. Hence, all users are requested to ask us directly or the nearest our agent
for the purpose.
115
L--740--14--E
■ Shipping Parameters
Given below is the explanation of parameters found in the parameter list attached to the product.
No. Item Name Factory setting Setting

Transmitter information (Device Info)
1 Tag Tag No.
2 Descriptor Description
3 Message Message
4 Date Date of manufacture
5 Dev ID Device ID
6 Final asmbly num Serial No.
7 Snsr s/n Sensor serial No.
8 Snsr model Sensor model
9 Flange Flange rating
10 Snsr matl Sensor material
11 Hardware rev Hardware revision
Sensor information (Sensor Type)
12 Sensor type Sensor type
13 Mass flow USL Max. allowable rang
14 Mass flow LSL Min. allowable range
15 Temperature USL Max. allowable temperature range
16 Temperature LSL Min. allowable temperature range
Flow information (Flow)
17 Mass flow unit Instant mass flowrate unit
18 Vol flow unit Instant volume flowrate unit
19 Flow Direction Flow direction select
20 Damp Flowrate (mass) damping
21 Flow cutoff Flowrate (mass) cutoff
22 Vol flow coef Volume flow correction coefficient
Density information (Density)
23 Unit Density unit
24 Damp Density damping
25 Slug low limit Lower limit density, slug flow identification
26 Slug high limit Higher limit density, slug flow identification
27 Slug duration Slug flow identification duration
28 Density compensation Run reference temp. conversion setting
29 Standard temp Reference temperature
30 Expansion coef Expansion coefficient
31 Set density Run fixed density conversion setting
32 Density value Fixed density value
Temperature information (Temperature)
33 Unit Temperature unit
34 Damp Temperature damping
Analog output 1 information (Analog Output 1)
35 Assign Analog output 1 assignment
36 URV 20mA setting, analog output 1
37 LRV 4mA setting, analog output 1
38 Lowcut Low flow cutoff, analog output 1
39 Added damp Added damping, analog output 1
Analog output 2 information (Analog Output 2)
40 Assign Analog output 2 assignment
41 URV 20mA setting, analog output 2
42 LRV 4mA setting, analog output 2
43 Lowcut Low flow cutoff, analog output 2
44 Added damp Added damping, analog output 2
Continued on next page➡
116
L--740--14--E
Pulse output 1 information (Pulse Output 1)

45 Assign Pulse output 1 assignment
46 Freq factor Full scale frequency, pulse output 1
47 Rate factor Full scale flowrate, pulse output 1
48 Lowcut Low flow cutoff, pulse output 1
Pulse output 2 information (Pulse Output 2)
49 Assign Pulse output 2 assignment
50 Freq factor Full scale frequency, pulse output 2
51 Rate factor Full scale flowrate, pulse output 2
52 Lowcut Low flow cutoff, pulse output 2
Status input/output information (Status Input/Output)
53 Input function Function select, status input
54 Input mode Input mode select, status input
55 Output function Function select, status output
56 Output mode Output mode select, status input
High/low alarm information (H/L Alarm)
57 Assign High /low alarm assignment
58 H/L alarm type High/low alarm type select
59 High alarm point Higher limit alarm value
60 Low alarm point Lower limit alarm value
61 H/L alarm hys High/low alarm hysteresis value
Error information (Error Select)
62 Sensor failure
63 Transmitter failure
64 Calibration failure
65 Saturated alarm
66 Parameter failure Output select in individual item
67 Transmitter alarm
68 Slug flow alarm
69 Calibration in progress
70 Fixed output
Output in an error information (Error Output)
71 Analog Analog output pattern in an error
72 Pulse Pulse output pattern in an error
Flow factor information (Flow Cal)
73 SK20 Meter factor of flowrate
74 SKM Meter error correction term
75 SKt Flowrate correction factor (Skt)
76 Cal temp Temperature during flow calibration
77 Cal freq Frequency during flow calibration
78 SKfa Flow correction factor (Skfa)
79 SKfb Flow correction factor (Skfb)
80 FKt Flow correction factor (Fkt)
Density factor information (Density Cal)
81 Dens (Water) Density during density calibration
82 Cal temp Temperature during density calibration
83 Cal freq Frequency during density calibration
84 Freq coef β Density correction coefficient
117
L--740--14--E
SAFETY STATEMENT ON RETURNED GOODS

When you return your Coriolis flowmeter for repair or other processing, send us a fax of this Safety
Statement and, at the same time, attach it to the equipment to be returned as we need to provide a safe
working environment for our employees.
Unless the Safety Statement on Returned Goods is attached to the returned equipment, or if we find it
difficult to ensure safety, we may decline, at our discretion, to accept and process the returned equipment.
(In case some residual metered fluid may be present in the housing, consult the factory.)
Oval Coriolis Flowmeter ALTImass
Model
Serial No.
List all chemicals and process fluids in contact with the equipment.
Process Fluid Names
If an MSDS is available, attach here.

Health and Safety
Hazards
If an MSDS is available, attach here.

Precautions
(First aid)
NOTE: MSDS stands for Material Safety Data Sheet. It informs us of the physical
and chemical properties of materials and how to handle them
I hereby certify that the equipment being returned has been cleaned and decontaminated in accordance
with good industrial practices. This equipment poses no health or safety risks due to contamination.
Date:
Company Name
Address
Phone No. Fax No.
Job Title
Signature by
Reason for return
Remarks
118
L--740--14--E
REPAIR REQUEST SHEET

Company name
Address
Contact
Return (shipping)
Reason for return □ Repair　　　　□ Calibration 　　□ Replacement　　　　□ Return

(type of order) □ Others
Date of
Delivery date
installation
Date of failure
Descriptions of
nonconformance (failure)
◆ Unless the statements below are fully documented, returned equipment will not be processed.
Model
Serial No.
Fluid name
Fluid density
Fluid temperature
Line pressure
Specification modification □ Yes □ No
Full scale flowrate
Pulse output ① □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　 □ Volume 　 □ Pulse unit: □ O.C. □ Voltage
Pulse output ② □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　 □ Volume 　 □ Pulse unit:
Analog output ① □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　□ Temperature 　□ Density to
Analog output ② □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　□ Temperature 　□ Density to
□ Tubes empty (no obstacles)
Sensor conditions □ Sensor empty (no obstacles)
□ Tubes clogged / contaminated
Type of cleaning material used for sensor unit
◆IMPORTANT
If sensor tubes leak, make sure that no process fluids remain in the housing. To provide a safe working
environment for our employees and engineers, this form must be filled in completely and accurately.
Unless accurate and precise information about the process fluids is given, returned equipment will NOT
be processed. Include your instructions and conditions accurately and in detail.
NOTE: To avoid misunderstanding, completely fill in this form.
119
L--740--14--E
2013.10 Revised
2009.08 Released
All specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement. L-740-14-E (1)

M41-F.o Supply Unit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M41-F.o Supply Unit

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M41-F.o Supply Unit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document mainly about?

What is the document mainly about?

What components are described in the document?

What components are described in the document?

FINAL DRAWING

TITLE F.O SUPPLY UNIT

Ship Owner 74,000 DWT CRUDE / PRODUCT OIL / TANKER

Date 2014.05.29 Prepared by

Rev. Description Date Prepare Check Appd

Technical specifition - General description ------------------------------5

Mechnical drawing & part list - Specification Of Piping System --------------------- 12

Component drawing - HFO supply pump electric driven (PP01/02) ------------20

Electric drawing - Power & Control junction box -----------------------90

Spare parts - Spare part & Tool list -----------------------------103

3. Pipe connection flange

4. Name plate and Caution plate

PP01/02 HFO supply pump with Electric motor -------------------------------- 2

FM01 HFO flow meter for mass type --------------------------------------------- 1

DT01 HFO venting box ------------------------------------------------------- 1

PP03/04 HFO circ. pump with Electric motor ---------------------------------- 2

HT01/02 HFO heater ------------------------------------------------------------ 2

FAF01 HFO Automatic filter ----------------------------------------------------- 1

VCS HFO Electric viscosity control system ---------------------------------------- 1

PP05/06 G/E Em'cy MGO pump with Electric motor ------------------------------------ 2

CB01 Control box ----------------------------------------------------------- 1

#+4 $ %521=(

ZS242A/242B 2 Limits switch

PI242B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8"

FV01/02 2 Angle valve 5K-40A BC

OS02/03 2 Simplex oil strainer 5K-40A Basket type, 32mesh BC or FCD

OS02A/03A 2 Air vent valve @10

OS02B/03B 2 Drain valve @10

PP01A/02A 2 El-motor for supply pump AC440V, 60Hz, 3Ph

PP01B/02B 2 Relief valve for supply Pump

FV03/04 2 Angle check valve 16K-25A BC

PRV01 1 Press. Regulating valve 16K-25A BC 4kg/cm2

PRV01A 1 Root valve @6 PT1/4"

PRV01B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370

PI243 1 Pressure gauge PF1/4" SUS304 0~10kg/㎠

PI243A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4"

PI243B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370

PS243 1 Pressure switch PF1/4" 0~10kg/㎠ 3kg/cm2

PS243A 1 Gauge valve @6 PT1/4"

PS243B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370

PS243C 1 3-way test cock @6 PT1/4"

TI243 1 Thermometer PT1/2", DIAL 0 ~ 200℃

FV08 1 Globe valve 16K-25A BC

OS04 1 Simplex oil strainer 10K-25A Basket type, 60mesh BC or FCD

OS04A 1 Air vent valve @10

OS04B 1 Drain valve @10

FM01 1 F.O Flow meter 20K-40A CA040L FCD 400

FV09 1 Angle check valve 16K-40A BC

FV10 1 Angle check valve 16K-25A BC

SG01 1 Sight glass 16K-15A CAST IRON

SELF01 1 Self closing valve 5K-25A F-TYPE BC

SW01/02 2 Swing check valve 5K-25A BC

SAF01 1 Safety valve 16K-15Ax25A BC or SC 12kg/㎠

PI244B 1 Seal pot ass'y @6 PT3/8" STPG370

FV14/15 2 Angle valve 16K-40A BC

#+4 $ %521=(